Home

Mercedes Benz 4MATIC User's Manual

1. Instrument cluster submenu Selecting temperature display mode Selecting speedometer display mode Access the Instr Cl submenu via the gt Move the selection marker with gt Move the selection marker with Settings menu Use the Instr C1 button or E to the Instr Cl button or E to the Instr cl submenu to change the instrument cluster submenu submenu display settings gt Press button EAN or R repeatedly Press button EAN or Keg repeatedly The following functions are available until the message Temperature until the message Disp Unit F z 5 indicator appears in the multifunction Speed odo appears in the multifunction Wee age display display Boece temperature display iss The selection marker is on the current The selection marker is on the current setting setting Selecting speedometer display 143 mode Temperature Disp Unit Selecting language 144 indicator Speed odo Selecting display speed display 144 D D or outside temperature for EN kml status indicator TF Miles P54 32 2360 31 a P54 32 2361 31 gt Press button or Fj to settem Press button or E to set perature unit to C degrees Celsius speedometer unit to km or Miles or F degrees Fahrenheit Controls in detail Control system Selecting language gt Press button or E to select The selection marker is on the current b Move th selectionmarkerwith the language to be used for the setting button or ME to the Instr cl multifunction disp
2. Controls in detail Climate control Defrosting The air conditioning switches Deactivating automatically to the following functions gt Press button egy or i e maximum blowing and heating gt page 177 These settings should only be selected power The indicator lamp on the button goes fora ston Ume e air flows onto the windshield and out Defrosting is turned off the front side windows Activating gt Press button or gt page 177 e the air recirculation mode is switched off The indicator lamp on the button comes on Controls in detail Climate control Air recirculation mode Activating Warning A Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent gt Press button J gt page 177 unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle The indicator lamp on the button Never operate the side windows and the from the outside This setting cuts off the comes on tilt sliding sunroof if there is the possibility intake of outside air and recirculates the of anyone being harmed by the closing pro air in the passenger compartment iJ cedure lf you keep button G pressed the 3 In the event that the closing procedure Warning A OAD and tilt sliding sunroof causes potential danger the closing of the side windows can be immediately halted by When the outside temperature is pressing or pulling the respective window below 41 F 5 C only switch to air switch The closing of the tilt sliding recirculation mode fo
3. Audio system Scan search Starting scan search gt Select desired waveband P82 60 4459 31 gt Press SC soft key SC will appear in the display The radio briefly tunes in all receivable stations on the waveband selected Controls in detail Audio system e Ending scan search gt Press SC soft key or E or E The station last played will be selected and SC disappears from the display Station memory You can store ten AM and ten FM stations in the memory e Storing stations gt Tune in desired station gt Press and hold desired station button to EQ until a brief signal tone is heard The frequency is stored on the selected station button e Calling up stations gt Press desired station button to FGM briefly Autostore automatic station memory The Autostore memory function provides an additional memory level The station memory for manually stored stations is not overwritten e Calling up Autostore memory level and storing stations gt P82 60 4483 31 Press AS soft key briefly The radio switches to the Autostore memory level AS and SEARCH appear in the display and the radio finds the ten stations with the strongest signals These stations are stored on the station buttons J to IGM in order of signal strength Controls in detail Audio system e Calling up stations e Mute on Selecting a weather band station gt Press desired station button EE gt
4. P40 10 3341 31 Alignment bolt gt Unscrew upper most wheel bolt and remove gt Replace this wheel bolt with alignment bolt Q supplied in the tool kit Remove the remaining bolts Do not place wheel bolts in sand or dirt This could result in damage to the bolts and wheel hub threads gt Remove the wheel Mounting the Minispare wheel P40 10 3165 31 Wheel bolt for light alloy rims Wheel bolt for Minispare wheel or other steel rims located in vehicle tool kit Wheel bolts must be used when mounting the Minispare wheel or other steel rims The use of any wheel bolts other than wheel bolts 2 for the Minispare wheel or other steel rims will physically damage the vehicle s brakes gt Clean contact surfaces of wheel and wheel hub A To avoid paint damage place wheel flat against hub and hold it there while installing first wheel bolt Warning A Always replace wheel bolts that are damaged or rusted Never apply oil or grease to wheel bolts Damaged wheel hub threads should be repaired immediately Do not continue to drive under these circumstances Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center or call Roadside Assistance Incorrect wheel bolts or improperly tight ened wheel bolts can cause the wheel to come off This could cause an accident Make sure to use the correct wheel bolts Practical hints Flat tire P40 10 3342 31 Guide Minispare wheel onto alig
5. gt page 177 slightly to the right The climate control system will corre spondingly adjust the interior air tem perature Decreasing gt Turn temperature control or gt page 177 slightly to the left The climate control system will corre spondingly adjust the interior air tem perature 179 Controls in detail Climate control Adjusting air distribution and volume Use air distribution control gt page 177 to adjust the air distribution The following symbols are found on the controls Symbol Function Directs air to the windshield and the side defroster vents Directs air into the entire vehicle interior Directs air to the footwells Directs air through the center side and rear passenger compartment air vents Use the air volume control gt page 177 to adjust the air volume You can select between six air volume speeds Adjusting manually gt Press button W9 gt page 177 The indicator lamp on the button goes out gt Select any of the six air volume speeds and the air distribution Adjusting automatically gt Press button Bij gt page 177 The indicator lamp on the button comes on The temperature air distri bution and volume are adjusted auto matically Windshield fogged on the outside gt Switch the windshield wipers on gt page 50 Switch to manual mode gt Turn the air distribution control to or gt page 177
6. Check regularly and before a long trip Brake fluid fuse box cover removed Windshield washer and headlamp cleaning system Opening the hood see gt page 296 Coolant For normal replenishing use water pota ble water quality For more information see Coolant level gt page 301 and see Fuels coolants lubricants etc gt page 429 Brake fluid H If you find that the brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark or below have the brake system checked for brake pad thickness and leaks immediately Notify an authorized Mercedes Benz Center immediately Do not add brake fluid as this will not solve the problem For more information see Practical hints gt page 345 Removing fuse box cover gt page 414 Operation At the gas station Windshield washer and headlamp cleaning system For more information on filling up the washer reservoir see Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system gt page 303 Engine oil level For more information on engine oil level see Engine oil gt page 298 Vehicle lighting Check function and cleanliness For more information on replacing light bulbs see Replacing bulbs gt page 388 Exterior lamp switch gt page 116 Tire inflation pressure More information on tire inflation pressure gt page 315 Operation Engine compartment Hood Warn
7. Continue pressing switch Q until seat heating is automatically desired seat heating level is reached switched to level 2 2 Two indicator lamps on Switching off seat heating gt Press switch repeatedly until all After approximately ten minutes wen re y indicator lamps 2 go out seat heating is automatically switched to level 1 ri Seat eae sith 1 One indicator lamp on If one or all of the indicator lamps Indicator lamps After approximately 20 minutes on the seat heating switch are flashing seat heating is automatically there is insufficient voltage due to too switched off many electrical consumers are turned SE on The seat heating switches off auto off No indicator lamp on matically The seat heating will switch back on again automatically as soon as sufficient voltage is available gt Switch on ignition gt page 33 YV Memory function Prior to operating the vehicle the driver should check and adjust the seat height seat position fore and aft and seat backrest angle if necessary to ensure adequate control reach and comfort The head restraint should also be adjusted for proper height See also the section on air bags gt page 61 for proper seat positioning In addition adjust the steering wheel to ensure adequate control reach opera tion and comfort Both the interior and exterior rear view mirrors should be adjusted for adequate rear vision Fasten seat belts Infa
8. P82 60 4621 31 Press button The telephone number last dialed will appear in the display Select desired telephone number with button WW or Bg The letter L and the number of the memory position appears in the left hand corner of the display The numbers are stored in the order of the calls received When you have selected a number press button The call will be made Accepting an incoming call If the telephone is active in the background reception symbol is visible in the display the audio source is muted when an incom ing call is received A ringing tone can be heard and the caller s telephone number or the name under which the telephone number has been saved in the phone book appears in the display If the caller s number is not transmitted with the call CALL will appear in the display gt Press button The call is accepted Muting a call It is possible to mute a call the caller is then no longer able to hear you e Mute on gt Press MUT soft key gt MIC MUTE will appear in the display e Mute off gt Press MUT soft key again Terminating a call gt Press button The current call is terminated and the muted audio source becomes active again Controls in detail Audio system Talking with two callers at the same time If you wish to receive or place another call during an already active call you can accept or place the second call and switch between the call
9. gt When you have selected a number CEL Mobile phone Se ress Eg button HOM Home L WOR Work CLE NUM RCU Lhe call will be made FAX Fax P82 60 4467 31 PAG Pager TEL Main Controls in detail Audio system Speed dial If you have stored telephone numbers as speed dial numbers in your telephone you can also enter these with buttons to E on the radio unit gt Press desired button to Ha briefly gt Press button The call will be made Turbo dial If you have stored telephone numbers as turbo dial numbers in your telephone you can also enter these with buttons to QM on the radio unit gt Press desired button to Hi until the call is made Redial If the number you have dialed is busy you can again place calls to the last ten telephone numbers dialed using the redial function 5 9 If you have activated the automatic re dial function on your mobile telephone the number of the person being called is automatically redialed after a short waiting period if there is a busy signal Refer to the separate operating instruc tions for the mobile telephone e Manual redial Li MERCEDES GLR HUM RFCU P82 60 4621 31 Press button The telephone number last dialed will appear in the display Select desired telephone number with button WW or Bg The letter L and the number of the memory position appears in the left hand corner of the display The numbers are store
10. Be very careful not to endanger other road users when you apply the brakes Refer to the description of the Brake Assist System BAS gt page 86 If the parking brake is released and the brake warning lamp in the instrument cluster stays on the brake fluid level in the reservoir is too low Brake pad wear or a leak in the system may be the reason for low brake fluid in the reservoir Have the brake system inspected immediately Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center All checks and service work on the brake system should be carried out by qualified technicians only Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Only install brake pads and brake fluid rec ommended by Mercedes Benz AN If other than recommended brake pads are installed or other than recommended brake fluid is used the braking properties of the vehicle can be degraded to an extent that safe braking is substantially impaired This could result in an accident Warning When driving down long and steep grades relieve the load on the brakes by shifting into a lower gear to use the engine s braking power This helps prevent overheating of the brakes and reduces brake pad wear After hard braking it is advisable to drive on for some time rather than immediately parking so that the air stream will cool down the brakes faster Driving off Apply the brakes to test them briefly after driving off Perform this procedure only when the
11. Repeat The track being played is repeated until the repeat function is switched off i When you start the RPT function the RDM function is automatically switched off Controls in detail Audio system e Switching on repeat e Switching on pause function gt Press RPT soft key RPT appears in the display e Switching off repeat gt Press RPT soft key again P82 60 4556 31 Pause function gt Press button The CD changer mode is interrupted and PAUSE appears in the display The CD changer mode is interrupted by an incoming call on the telephone gt page 229 e Switching off pause function gt Press button The CD changer mode is active again Controls in detail Audio system Track and time display GSM network phones Switching on the telephone Using your Mercedes Benz specified Switching on the telephone mobile telephone a number of functions and operating steps can be performed and Press button displayed in the audio system display If the telephone was previously switched off PROCESSING appears in the display and you will then be prompted to enter your PIN Further operating instructions not covered 826045573 here can be found in the operating instruc tions for the multifunction steering wheel and the cellular telephone gt Press T soft key The number of the track being played Switching off the telephone and the elapsed playing time appear in the display
12. The battery might not be charged sufficiently bulb self check when switching on the ignition have the respective bulb checked and replaced if necessary Suggested solution gt Continue driving with added caution Wheels may lock during hard braking reducing steering capability v Read and observe messages in the display gt page 352 gt Have the system checked at an autho rized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident gt Switch off electrical consumers that are currently not needed e g seat heating gt If necessary have the generator alternator and battery checked When the voltage is above this value again the ABS is operational again Problem USA only Canada only The red brake warning lamp comes on while driving A Driving with the brake warning lamp illumi nated can result in an accident Have your brake system checked immediately if the brake warning lamp stays on Don t add brake fluid before checking the brake system Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching fire You can be seriously burned Warning The red brake warning lamp comes on while driving and you hear a warning sound Practical hints Possible cause You are driving with the gt parking brake set There is insufficient brake fluid
13. Tire labeling Besides tire name sales designation and manufacturer name a number of markings can be found on a tire Following are some explanations for the markings on your vehicle s tires P40 10 3561 31 Operation Tires and wheels Uniform Quality Grading Standards gt page 325 DOT Tire Identification Number TIN gt page 322 Maximum tire load gt page 323 Maximum tire inflation pressure gt page 324 Manufacturer Tire ply material gt page 327 Tire size designation load and speed rating gt page 318 Load identification gt page 321 Tire name For illustration purposes only Actual data on tires is specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in above illustration For more information see Rims and Tires gt page 423 317 Operation Tires and wheels Tire size designation load and speed rating Tire width Aspect ratio in Radial tire code Rim diameter Tire load rating Tire speed rating For illustration purposes only Actual data on tires is specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in above illustration General Depending on the design standards used the tire size molded into the sidewall may have no letter or a letter preceding the tire size designation No letter preceding the size designation as illustrated above Passenger car tire based on European design s
14. gt Press the clamp on housing cover 1 and remove it Pull the electrical connector off gt Turn bulb socket 4 counterclockwise and take out the bulb gt Insert the new bulb so that its socket locates in the recess of the lamp housing gt Turn bulb socket clockwise until it engages gt Plug the electrical connector onto the bulb gt Align housing cover Q and press until it engages Practical hints Replacing bulbs High beam bulb gt Press the clamp on housing cover 2 and remove it Pull the electrical connector off gt Turn bulb socket counterclockwise and take out the bulb Insert the new bulb so that its socket locates in the recess of the lamp housing Turn bulb socket clockwise until it engages Plug the electrical connector onto the bulb Align housing cover 2 and press until it engages Front turn signal lamp bulb gt Turn bulb socket 3 with the bulb counterclockwise and remove it Press gently onto the bulb and turn it counterclockwise out of bulb socket 3 Press new bulb gently into bulb socket 3 and turn clockwise until it engages Place bulb socket back into the lamp and turn it clockwise Parking and standing lamp bulb gt v v Vv YV Press the clamp on housing cover 2 and remove it Pull out bulb socket with the bulb Pull the bulb out of bulb socket Press the new bulb into bulb socket Press b
15. As soon as the brakes have cooled off the electronic traction system switches on again The display will clear after driving a short distance at more than 12 mph 20 km h gt Continue driving with added caution gt If necessary have the generator and battery checked When the voltage is above this value again the ESP is operational again Display message ESP malfunction Visit workshop Display malfunction Visit workshop SRS Restraint system malfunction Drive to workshop Warning A In the event a malfunction of the SRS is indicated as outlined above the SRS may not be operational Possible cause The ESP is deactivated because of a malfunction The brake system is still functioning normally but without the ESP available The ESP or the ESP display is malfunctioning The system is malfunctioning For your safety we strongly recommend that you visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center immediately to have the system checked otherwise the SRS may not be deployed when needed in an accident Practical hints What to do if Possible solution gt Continue driving with added caution p gt Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident gt Continue driving with added caution p gt Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Failure to follow these instructions inc
16. Display symbol wk Display message Coolant Stop engine off Coolant Visit workshop Possible cause The poly V belt could be broken The cooling fan for the coolant is malfunctioning Possible solution gt Stop immediately and check the poly V belt If it is broken gt Do not continue to drive Otherwise the engine will overheat due to an inoperative water pump which may result in damage to the engine Notify an authorized Mercedes Benz Center If it is intact gt gt Do not continue to drive the vehicle with this message displayed Doing so could result in serious engine damage that is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Observe the coolant temperature gauge in the instrument cluster gt page 24 Drive immediately to the nearest authorized Mercedes Benz Center Observe the coolant temperature gauge in the instrument cluster gt page 24 Have the fan replaced as soon as possible Display symbol Display message Cruise contr Drive to workshop Display malfunction Visit workshop Display malfunction Visit workshop Doors open Possible cause Cruise control is malfunctioning The instrument cluster display is malfunctioning The displays for several systems have malfunctioned Some systems them selves may also have malfunctioned Certain electronic systems are unable to relay information to the control system The following syste
17. If your audio system is set up for telephone operation the symbol will appear in the display gt Press T soft key again PROCESSING appears in the display until When you insert your Mercedes Benz he teleph is off Af d The total number of tracks andthe total specified mobile telephone into the the telephone is off Afterward gt Press button for approx three seconds playing time of the CD appear in the telephone cradle you will be prompted to PRUNE OPE Appeats i tie display display enter your PIN for 30 seconds gt Press T soft key gt page 225 This display disappears when you press any button The standard CD playback menu appears in the display When your mobile telephone is inserted into the telephone cradle you will see the reception strength in the upper right hand corner of the display PIN entry 5 0 If the PIN is entered incorrectly three times NEED PUK will appear in the display Enter PUK via your telephone Please refer to the separate telephone operating instructions for more information P82 60 4464 31 Enter PIN number using buttons Adjusting the volume to Gal If necessary correct number entered with the CLR soft key Press soft key briefly to delete the last digit entered press soft key and hold to delete the complete number i The volume can be adjusted separately for telephone mode and audio mode gt Turn rotary control of button during a telephone call The
18. Warning A Failure to follow these instructions can result in severe injury or death Observe all safety instructions and precautions when handling automotive batteries gt page 302 Never lean over batteries while connecting you might get injured Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid Do not allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes skin or clothing In case it does immediately flush affected area with water and seek medical help if necessary A battery will also produce hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive Keep flames or sparks away from battery avoid improper connection of jumper cables smoking etc Practical hints Battery Never loosen or detach battery termi nal clamps while the engine is running or the SmartKey is in the starter switch Otherwise the alternator and other electronic components could be se verely damaged Have the battery checked regularly by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Refer to Maintenance Booklet for main tenance intervals or contact an autho rized Mercedes Benz Center for further information Warning VAN Do not place metal objects on the battery as this could result in a short circuit Use leak proof battery only to avoid the risk of acid burns in the event of an accident Practical hints Battery Disconnecting the battery Charging and reinstalling the battery gt Turn off the engine gt page 57 gt Charge battery in accordance with
19. e poor handling characteristics e increased noise e increased fuel consumption Moreover tires and rims not approved by Mercedes Benz may under load exhibit dimensional variations and different tire deformation characteris tics that could cause them to come into contact with the vehicle body or axle parts Damage to the tires or the vehicle may be the result Technical data Rims and Tires Further information on tires and rims is available at any authorized Mercedes Benz Center A placard with the recommended tire inflation pressures is located on the driver s door B pillar Some vehicles may have supplemental tire inflation pressure information for driving at high speeds gt page 314 or for vehicle loads less than the maximum loaded vehicle con dition If such information is provided it can be found on the placard located on the inside of the fuel filler flap The tire inflation pressure should be checked regularly and should only be adjusted on cold tires Follow tire manufacturer s maintenance recom mendation included with vehicle Technical data Rims and Tires Same size tires Model C 240 all models Rims light alloy 73x16 H2 Wheel offset 1 22 in 31 mm All season tires radial ply tires 205 55 R16 91H M S Summer tires radial ply tires Winter tires radial ply tires 205 55 R16 91H M S Minispare wheel Model C 240 all models Rim steel 3 5 Bx16 H2 Wheel offset 0 67 i
20. Canada only This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interfer ence and 2 this device must accept any inter ference received including interfer ence that may cause undesired operation of the device Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user s authority to operate the equipment i You can also open and close the power windows gt page 241 and power tilt sliding sunroof gt page 245 from outside using the SmartKey Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Factory setting Global unlocking gt Press button ES All turn signal lamps flash once The locking knobs in the doors move up The anti theft alarm system is disarmed The vehicle will lock again automatically and reactivate the anti theft alarm system within approximately 40 seconds of unlocking if e neither door nor tailgate is opened e the SmartKey is not inserted in the starter switch e the central locking switch is not activated Global locking gt Press button EEN All turn signal lamps flash three times The locking knobs in the doors move down The anti theft alarm system is armed Selective setting If you frequently travel alone you may wish to reprogram the SmartKey so that pressing only unlocks the driver s door and the fuel filler flap gt Press and hold buttons and simultaneou
21. Function Page Setting daytime running lamp 150 mode USA only Setting locator lighting 151 Setting night security 151 illumination Setting interior lighting delayed 153 shut off Controls in detail Control system Setting daytime running lamp mode The selection marker is on the current In low ambient light conditions the USA only setting following lamps will switch on additionally i l Hdlamp e Parking lamps This function is not available in mode e Tail lamps countries where the daytime running e License plate lamps lamp mode is mandatory and therefore in a constant mode A e Side marker lamps For more information on the daytime gt Move the selection marker with running lamp mode see Lighting button or E to the Lighting gt page 116 submenu P54 32 2373 31 gt Press button EAN or Bed repeatedly pe Pies Putten or El to select manual operation Manual or daytime For safety reasons resetting the until the message Hdl amp mode appears i ree i running lamp mode Constant Lighting submenu to factory settings in the multifunction display a f activated gt page 141 while driving will not With daytime running lamp mode activated deactivate the daytime running lamp hel mode and the exterior lamp switch in position BM or EGR the low beam The following message appears in the headlamps are switched on when the multifunction display engine is running Lighting Cannot be co
22. Operator s Manual C Class Wagon Mercedes Benz C 240 C 240 4MATIC Our company and staff congratulate you on the purchase of your new Mercedes Benz Your selection of our product is a demon stration of your trust in our company name Furthermore it exemplifies your desire to own an automobile that will be as easy as possible to operate and provide years of service Your Mercedes Benz represents the ef forts of many skilled engineers and crafts men To help assure your driving pleasure and also the safety of you and your passen gers we ask you to make a small invest ment of time Please read this manual carefully then return it to your vehicle where it will be handy for your reference e Please follow the recommendations contained in this manual They are de signed to acquaint you with the opera tion of your Mercedes Benz e Please pay attention to the warnings and cautions contained in this manual They are designed to help improve the safety of the vehicle operator and oc cupants We extend our best wishes for many miles of safe pleasurable driving Mercedes Benz USA LLC A DaimlerChrysler Company Introduction ccccccccccccccceeceeseeesees 9 Product information ccccseeeseeeeeeee 9 Operator s Manual cccccsssseeeeeees 10 Service and warranty information 10 Important notice for California retail buyers and lessees of Mercedes Benz automobiles
23. 11 Maintenance eseseeeeeeeeeees 12 Roadside Assistance cc000000 12 Change of address or ownership 12 Operating your vehicle outside the USA or Canada ccceseeseee 13 Where to find ite eeeeesseceeeseseeees 14 SVMDOMS ssi cnsscvnsecd ecsacveveeett etnaaverdvieeeecees 15 Operating Safety s s s 16 Proper use of the vehicle 16 Problems with your vehicle 17 Reporting safety defects 18 Reporting Safety Defects 18 Vehicle data recording ee 19 Information regarding electronic recording devices 19 At a glance nininini 21 COCKPIT assener eee eae toate neice 22 Instrument cluster ssssssesesesseeeeseeeeeee 24 Multifunction steering wheel 26 Center console ceesscceceeeeesteeeeeees 27 Upper Patt ccccccsssssceeeesseseeeees 27 Lower Part wvsscsceesedcctesesssececasenseneesass 28 Overhead control panel ceeeee 29 Door control panel e cesecccceessseeeeees 30 Getting started cc ccceeeeeee 31 UNIO CKING serres eirio ee 32 Unlocking with the SmartKey 32 Starter switch positions 33 ACJUSTING ccnn enat 35 DEALS lt 2 side svt N E TE AERA 35 Steering wheel sseeeseeseesreese 39 Min OT Saree cars cts aner AEn i E 41 Driving aenn E TERAN 43 Fastening the seat belt 43 Starting the engine 46 Switching on headlamps
24. 147 Setting date year 149 Multifunction display messages ABS 358 BAS 359 Brake fluid 363 Brake pads 363 Coolant 364 366 Cruise control 367 Display 367 Doors 367 Engine oil 368 369 ESP 360 361 Front passenger front airbag 354 357 Fuel cap 347 370 Hood 370 Key SmartKey 370 Lamps exterior 371 374 Oil 368 369 Parking brake 363 Restraint system 361 Seat belt system 375 SRS 361 Steering gear oil level 375 Tailgate 376 Tele Aid 376 Telephone 376 Tilt sliding sunroof 376 Windshield washer fluid 376 Multifunction steering wheel 26 130 442 Buttons 130 N Navigation system Operating 138 See separate COMAND operating instructions Night security illumination 119 Setting 151 Normal occupant weight 329 o One touch gearshifting 164 Occupant Classification System see OCS Canceling gear range limit 164 Occupant distribution 329 Downshifting 164 Occupant safety 60 Upshifting 164 Operating Audio system 199 CD player 137 COMAND see separate Air bags 61 Opening operating instructions Children and air bags 62 Cup holder in rear seat armrest 262 Navigation system 138 Children in the vehicle 70 Doors from the inside 100 Radio 136 Radio transmitters 290 Satellite radio 136 Fastening the seat belt 43 Fuel filler flap 294 Front passenger front air bag off indicator lamp 77 Infant and child restraint systems LATCH type child seat anchors 80 OCS 73 Seat belts 43 64 OCS 73 442 Self test 78 Odo
25. 3 clockwise to es D of the arrows gt Lower the rear of the cover and remove e slide sunroof closed e raise sunroof at the rear gt Turn crank counterclockwise to Remove the cover e slide sunroof open Take the crank out of the Operator s regos Manual pouch e lower sunroof at the rear gt Remove SmartKey from the starter switch i Ci f Do not disconnect electrical Turn crank slowly and smoothly gt Pry off lens Q using a flat blade connectors f PR screwdriver The tilt sliding sunroof must be synchronized after being operated gt Insert crank 3 through hole on the left manually gt page 246 side Practical hints Replacing SmartKey batteries If the batteries in the SmartKey are discharged the vehicle can no longer be locked or unlocked It is recommended to have the batteries replaced at an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Warning A Keep the batteries out of reach of children If a battery is swallowed seek medical help immediately Batteries contain materials that can harm ij the environment if disposed of improperly Recycling of batteries is the preferred method of disposal Many states require sellers of batteries to accept old batteries for recycling i When inserting the batteries make sure they are clean and free of lint i When replacing batteries always replace both batteries The required replacement batteries are ava
26. Backup lamp bulb Rear fog lamp driver s side only tail parking standing and side marker lamp bulb Press gently onto the respective bulb and turn counterclockwise out of its bulb socket Press the new bulb gently into its bulb socket and turn clockwise until it engages Reinstall the bulb carrier Let tabs engage Reinstall trim panel 2 Let latch engage License plate lamp pa2 10 3510 39 gt Loosen both screws Q Remove the license plate lamp Replace the bulb Reinstall the license plate lamp Retighten screws Q Vv Replacing wiper blades gt Pull the tab in direction of arrow and remove wiper blade Removing wiper blades Warning A For safety reasons switch off wipers and gt Slide the wiper blade into the cutout on remove SmartKey from starter switch the wiper arm see arrows before replacing a wiper blade Otherwise Slide the tab back in direction of the wiper motor could suddenly turn on and arrow 2 until it audibly engages cause injury Installing wiper blades gt Fold the wiper arm backward to rest on the windshield Make sure you hold on to the wiper when folding the wiper arm gt Fold wiper arm forward back gt Remove SmartKey from starter switch Unlock Lock Practical hints Replacing wiper blades Never open the hood when the wiper arms are folded forward Hold on to the wiper when folding the wiper arm back If r
27. Check for secure locking by pushing and pulling on the backrest In an accident during hard braking or sud den maneuvers loose items will be thrown around inside the vehicle and cause injury to vehicle occupants unless the items are securely fastened in the vehicle To help avoid personal injury during a collision or sudden maneuver exercise care when transporting cargo Loading instructions P68 00 3059 31 The total load weight including vehicle occupants and luggage cargo should not exceed the load limit or vehicle capacity weight indicated on the corresponding placard located on the driver s door B pillar The handling characteristics of a fully load ed vehicle depend greatly on the load dis tribution It is therefore recommended to load the vehicle according to the illustra tions shown with the heaviest items being placed towards the front of the vehicle Always place items being carried against front or rear seat backrests and fasten them as securely as possible The heaviest portion of the cargo should al ways be kept as low as possible since it in fluences the handling characteristics of the vehicle Warning A Always fasten items being carried as secure ly as possible In an accident during hard braking or sud den maneuvers loose items will be thrown around inside the vehicle and can cause in jury to vehicle occupants unless the items are securely fastened in the vehicle To help
28. Controls in detail Power windows i You can also open or close the windows using the SmartKey summer opening convenience closing feature gt page 241 You can close and reopen the windows using the air recirculation button in the climate control panel gt page 177 or automatic climate control panel gt page 187 You can close and reopen the windows using the charcoal filter button EE in the automatic climate control panel gt page 187 gt Switch on ignition gt page 33 Opening the windows gt Press switch Q to to the resistance point The corresponding window will move downwards until you release the switch Closing the windows gt Pull switch to to the resistance point The corresponding window will move upwards until you release the switch A If you pull and hold the switch up when closing the window and upward movement of the window is blocked by some obstruc tion including but not limited to arms hands fingers etc the automatic reversal will not operate Warning Fully opening the windows Express open gt Press switch Q to past the resistance point and release The corresponding window opens completely Fully closing the windows Express close gt Pull switch Q to past the resistance point and release The corresponding window closes completely If the upward movement of the window is blocked during the closing procedur
29. Controls in detail Useful features Step 9 gt Press training button on the garage door opener motor head unit The training light is activated You have 30 seconds to initiate the following step Step 10 gt Firmly press hold for two seconds and release the programmed integrated signal transmitter button or Step 11 gt Press hold for two seconds and release same button a second time to complete the training process Some garage door openers or other rolling code equipped devices may require you to perform this procedure a third time to complete the training bb 277 Controls in detail Useful features gt DStep 12 gt Confirm the garage door operation by pressing the programmed integrated signal transmitter button or Step 13 gt To program the remaining two buttons repeat the steps above starting with step 3 278 Gate operator Canadian programming Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter signals to time out or quit after several seconds of transmission which may not be long enough for the integrated signal transmitter to pick up the signal during programming Similar to this Canadian law some U S gate operators are designed to time out in the same manner If you live in Canada or if you are having difficulties programming a gate operator regardless of where you live by using the programming procedures re
30. Disconnecting 404 Reconnecting 405 Reinstalling 404 Removing 404 Bead 327 Bi Xenon headlamps 439 Bi Xenon type Front lamp bulbs 393 Block heater Canada only 333 Blocking Rear door window operation 82 Bolts For Minispare wheel 381 Brake Assist System see BAS Brake fluid 431 Checking 295 Message in display 363 Brake lamp bulbs 389 Brake lamp high mounted 389 Brake lamps Messages in display 371 Brake pads Message in display 363 Brakes 284 Warning lamp 25 345 Break in period 282 Bulbs replacing 388 Additional turn signals 389 Backup lamps 389 396 Brake lamps 389 396 Cornering fog lamps 389 Fog lamp rear 389 396 Fog lamps front 389 Frontlamps 389 High beam flasher 389 High beam headlamps 389 High mounted brake lamp 389 License plate lamps 389 396 Low beam headlamps 389 Parking lamps front 389 392 394 Parking lamps rear 389 396 Rearlamps 389 Side marker lamps front Side marker lamps rear Standing lamps front Standing lamps rear Tail lamp unit 395 Taillamps 389 396 Turn signal lamps front 389 392 394 Turn signal lamps rear 389 396 Button Audio system 202 389 394 389 396 389 392 394 389 396 Cc CAC 439 California Important notice 11 Calling up Maintenance service indicator 335 Range distance to empty 158 CAN system 439 Cargo area see Cargo compartment Cargo compartment Fuse boxin 415 Lighting 124 Parcel net 250 Storage compartment inside 251 Tailgate 101 Tie d
31. EE At a glance Here you will find an overview of all the controls that can be operated from the driver s seat S ESSE Getting started Here you will find all the information you need for your first drive You should read this section first if this is your first Mercedes Benz vehicle or if you are rent ing or borrowing this vehicle E Safety and Security Here you will find descriptions of the safety features of your vehicle A Controls in detail Here you will find detailed information about the equipment installed in your vehi cle This section expands on the Getting started section and also describes techni cal innovations If you are already familiar with the basic functions of your vehicle this section will be of particular interest to you Lee Operation Here you will find all the information you need for the proper operation of your vehi cle SSeS es Practical hints This section provides fast assistance for dealing with problems you may encounter EE SSS ar Technical data All important technical data for your vehi cle can be found in this section ____ _ SSS ay Indexes The glossary provides explanations of the most important technical terms The table of contents and the index are de signed to help you find information quickly and easily The following publications are part of your vehicle documentation e this Operators Manual e the
32. For more information see Flexible Fuel Vehicles gt page 433 Only use premium unleaded fuel e The octane number posted at the pump must be 91 min It is an average of both the Research R octane num ber and the Motor M octane number R M 2 This is also known as the ANTI KNOCK INDEX Unleaded gasoline containing oxygenates such as ethanol IPA IBA and TBA can be used provided the ratio of any one of these oxygenates to gasoline does not exceed 10 MTBE must not exceed 15 The ratio of methanol to gasoline must not exceed 3 plus additional cosolvents Using mixtures of ethanol and methanol is not allowed Gasohol which contains 10 ethanol and 90 unleaded gasoline can be used These blends must also meet all other fuel requirements such as resistance to spark knock boiling range vapor pressure etc Gasoline additives A major concern among engine manufacturers is carbon build up caused by gasoline Mercedes Benz recommends only the use of quality gasoline containing additives that prevent the build up of carbon deposits After an extended period of using fuels without such additives carbon deposits can build up especially on the intake valves and in the combustion area leading to engine performance problems such as e Warm up hesitation e Unstable idle e Knocking pinging e Misfire e Power loss In areas where carbon deposits may be encountered due to lack of availability of
33. Garage door opener osses 274 transmMitten ssori cos csedcevscoseods 290 Tirelabeling somereni 317 Catalytic Convertel ccccscee 291 Load identification 006 321 Emission control cccsssseeeees 291 DOT Tire Identification Number Coolant temperature 292 TIN iiiaio 322 Maximum tire load eee eeeeeeeeee Maximum tire inflation pressure Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards U S vehicles Tire ply material 0 essences Tire and loading terminology Rotating tires oe eee Winter driving scc scesecaesneesescconvoneee Winter tires cccccecccesesteceeeeeeees Block heater Canada only Snow ChAiNS cceeeeceeceseeeteeeeees Maintenance cccccccssssceeeessseeeeeeees Clearing the maintenance service indicator Maintenance service term exceeded sseessseessesrsreeseersssessee Calling up the maintenance service indicator Resetting the maintenance service indicator Vehicle Care esssssseeseessssreessssserersse Cleaning and care of the vehicle Es Replacing wiper blades na 397 Practical hints 0 0 0 0 eee 343 Removing wiper blades 397 What todo IP sss sscssecccccnsssssesecsrepeesdeasans 344 Installing wiper blades 0 397 Lamps in instrument cluster B44 Flat tir cee ccecseesecseceseeeeeeeeereeeesees 398 Lamp in center console 0 350 Preparing the vehic
34. Gear ranges With the gear selector lever in position D you can limit the transmission s gear range by pressing the gear selector lever to the left D and reverse the gear range limit by pressing the gear selector lever to the right D The selected gear range appears in the multifunction display gt page 163 If you press on the accelerator when the engine has reached its rpm limit the transmission will upshift beyond any gear range limit selected vf Effect The transmission shifts through fourth gear only The transmission shifts through third gear only With this selection you can use the braking effect of the engine Controls in detail Automatic transmission Effect The transmission shifts through second gear only Allows the use of engine s braking power when driving e on steep downgrades e in mountainous regions e under extreme operating conditions The transmission operates in first gear only For maximum use of engine s braking effect on very steep or lengthy downgrades Controls in detail Automatic transmission Gear selector lever position Effect Park position Gear selector lever position when the vehicle is parked Place gear selector lever in position P only when vehicle is stopped The park position is not intended to serve as a brake when the vehicle is parked Rather the driver should always set the parking brake in addition to placing t
35. Press button directly to BEN The radio mode is interrupted and gt ae a la tl station e Leaving the Autostore memory level MUTED appears in the display with buttons il to Ea gt Press FM or AM soft key briefly e Mute off If a station cannot be tuned in a search is automatically started gt Press button Interrupting radio mode i The radio mode is again active Search The radio mode is interrupted by an incoming call on the telephone Weather band gt page 229 gt Press Bagg or button to tune in the next receivable weather band station i If no weather band station is received after three consecutive scans of the complete frequency range then the scan stops at the channel with which it began and NO WB FOUND appears in the display P82 60 4458 31 gt Press WB soft key The weather band station last received If this happens switch back to is tuned in standard radio mode Controls in detail Audio system Scan search e Starting scan search gt Press SC soft key SC will appear in the display The radio briefly tunes in all receivable weather band stations e Ending scan search gt Press SC soft key or E or E The weather band station last played will be selected and SC disappears from the display Introduction to satellite radio USA only SIRIUS satellite radio provides 100 chan nels of digital quality radio among others music sports news and entertai
36. Replace key Drive to workshop Possible cause A loss of pressure has been detected in the fuel system The fuel cap may not be closed properly or the fuel system may be leaky You are driving with the hood open You have forgotten to remove the SmartKey No additional code available for SmartKey Possible solution gt Check the fuel cap gt page 293 If it is not closed properly gt Close the fuel cap If it is closed properly gt Have the fuel system checked by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center gt Close the hood gt page 296 gt Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch gt Change the SmartKey Practical hints What to do if Display symbol Display message Possible cause Possible solution 3rd brake lamp The high mounted brake lamp is gt Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz malfunctioning This message will only Center as soon as possible appear if all light emitting diodes have stopped working Backup lamp left The left backup lamp is malfunctioning Replace the bulb as soon as possible Backup lamp right The right backup lamp is malfunctioning Replace the bulb as soon as possible Brake lamp Brake lamp illumination is delayed or gt Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Drive to workshop lamp is permanently on Center as soon as possible Brake lamp left The left brake lamp is malfunctioning gt Replace the bulb as soon as possible Brake lamp right The
37. Replace the bulb as soon as possible gt Inthe control system set lamp operation to manual gt page 150 gt Switch on the headlamps using the exterior lamp switch gt page 116 gt Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Halogen headlamp gt Replace the bulb as soon as possible Bi Xenon headlamp p gt Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Display symbol Display message Low beam right Parking lamp left front Parking lamp right front Rear fog lamp Substitute bulb on Switch off lights Taillamp left Substitute bulb on Taillamp right Substitute bulb on Possible cause The right low beam lamp is malfunctioning The left front parking lamp is malfunctioning The right front parking lamp is malfunctioning The rear fog lamp is malfunctioning A substitute bulb is being used Headlamps have been turned on with the driver s door opened and the SmartKey removed from the starter switch The left tail lamp is malfunctioning A substitute bulb is being used The right tail lamp is malfunctioning A substitute bulb is being used Practical hints What to do if Possible solution Halogen headlamp gt Replace the bulb as soon as possible Bi Xenon headlamp gt gt gt Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Replace the bulb as soon as possible Replace the bulb as soon as
38. The indicators come on when you activate engine until the operating temperature a switch e g unlocking the vehicle or has been reached opening a door and go out after approxi d Shift into reverse gear R or parking mately 15 minutes position P only when the vehicle is stopped Warning A Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an Current gear range gear selector lever SS extended period when driving off on position It is dangerous to shift the gear selector slippery road surfaces This may cause Current program mode laver oui oi P or N i tne engine speti ie serious damage to the drivetrain which higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty The current gear range gear selector lever position and program mode C S appear in the multifunction display When the gear selector lever is in position D you can influence transmission shifting by e limiting the gear range e changing gears manually Controls in detail Automatic transmission One touch gearshifting Even with an automatic transmission you can change the gears manually when the gear selector lever is in position D Downshifting
39. a snug fit by pulling shoulder portion up Belt outlet height adjustment Adjust seat belt so that shoulder portion is located as close as possible to the middle of your shoulder it should not touch the neck or pass under the arm pofwe 2351 31 Belt outlet front seats Release button P91 40 2366 31 Belt outlet rear seats Release button Raising gt Slide belt outlet upward Lowering gt Press button or and slide belt outlet downward Getting started Proper use of seat belts e Do not twist the belt when fastening e Adjust seat belt so that the shoulder portion is located as close as possible to the middle of the shoulder it should not touch the neck Never pass the shoulder portion of the belt under your arm For this purpose you can adjust the height of the belt outlet e Position the lap belt as low as possible on your hips over hip joint and not across the abdomen e Place the seat backrest in a nearly upright position e Never use a Seat belt for more than one person at time e Do not fasten a seat belt around a person and another object at the same time When using a seat belt to secure infant or toddler restraints or children in booster seats always follow the child seat manufacturer s instructions Getting started Driving Check your seat belt during travel to make sure that it is properly posi tioned Make sure that the seat belt is always fit
40. be opened or closed when you operate the tilt sliding sunroof with the SmartKey Warning A Never operate the windows or tilt sliding sunroof if there is the possibility of anyone being harmed by the opening or closing pro cedure In the event that the procedure causes potential danger the procedure can be immediately halted by releasing the transmit button on the SmartKey To reverse direction of movement press button for opening or for closing Controls in detail Power tilt sliding sunroof gt Aim transmitter eye at the driver s door handle Opening Summer opening feature gt Press and hold button after unlocking the vehicle The windows and the tilt sliding sunroof begin to open after approximately one second Release the button to stop procedure Controls in detail Power tilt sliding sunroof Closing Convenience feature gt Press and hold button after locking the vehicle The windows and the tilt sliding sunroof begin to close after approximately one second gt Release the button to stop procedure Make sure all side windows and the tilt sliding sunroof are properly closed before leaving the vehicle Synchronizing the power tilt sliding sunroof The tilt sliding sunroof must be synchronized after the battery has been disconnected or discharged after the tilt sliding sunroof has been closed manually gt page 385 after a malfunction if the tilt sliding su
41. carried out following any interruption of battery power e g due to reconnec tion e Set the clock gt page 145 Vehicles with COMAND See COMAND operator s manual e Synchronize side windows gt page 242 e Synchronize tilt sliding sunroof gt page 246 Practical hints Battery Batteries contain materials that can harm the environment if disposed of improperly Large 12 volt storage batteries contain lead Recycling of batteries is the preferred method of disposal Many states require sellers of batteries to accept old batteries for recycling Practical hints Jump starting Warning A Failure to follow these directions will cause damage to the electronic components and can lead to a battery explosion and severe injury or death Never lean over batteries while connecting or jump starting you might get injured Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid Do not allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes skin or clothing In case it does immediately flush affected area with water and seek medical help if necessary A battery will also produce hydrogen gas which is flammable and very explosive Keep flames or sparks away from battery avoid improper connection of jumper cables smoking etc Attempting to jump start a frozen battery can result in it exploding causing personal injury Read all instructions before proceeding If the battery is discharged the engine can be started
42. detected in the fuel system The fuel cap may not be closed properly or the fuel system may be leaky Your fuel tank is empty Practical hints What to do if Suggested solution gt Check the fuel cap gt page 293 If it is not closed properly gt Close the fuel cap If it is closed properly gt Have the fuel system checked by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center gt After refuelling start turn off and restart the engine three or four times in succession The limp home mode is canceled You do not need to have your vehicle checked Practical hints What to do if Problem The yellow ESP warning lamp comes on while driving The yellow ESP warning lamp flashes while driving Possible cause The ESP is deactivated Risk of accident Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road weather and traffic conditions The ESP or traction control has come into operation because of detected traction loss in at least one tire Suggested solution gt Switch the ESP back on gt page 87 If the ESP cannot be switched back on have the system checked at an autho rized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible gt When driving off apply as little throttle as possible gt While driving ease up on the accelerator gt Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road and weather conditions gt Do not deactivate the ESP Exceptions gt page 87 Failure to follow
43. e if impact exceeds a preset deployment threshold e independently of the side impact air bags Safety and Security Occupant safety i The front air bags in this vehicle have been designed to inflate in two stages This allows the air bag to have different rates of inflation that are based on the rate of relevant vehicle deceleration as assessed by the air bag control unit On the front passenger side the front air bag deployment is additionally influenced by the passenger s weight category as identified by the Occupant Classification System OCS page 73 The lighter the front passenger side occupant the higher the vehicle deceleration rate required for the second stage inflation of the air bag Safety and Security Occupant safety The air bags will not deploy in impacts which do not exceed the system s deployment thresholds You will then be protected by the fastened seat belts The passenger front air bag will only be deployed if e the system based on OCS weight sensor readings senses that the front passenger seat is occupied the EA center console is not lit gt page 77 e the impact exceeds a preset deployment treshold Side impact air bags window curtain air bags A b P91 60 2671 31 Window curtain air bag Side impact air bags The side impact air bags and window curtain air bags are deployed e onthe impacted side of the vehicle e in impacts exceed
44. from the fuse box 90 counterclockwise gt Release clamps Lift the rear of cover Q gt Remove fuse box cover Slide out retainer and remove cover 1 by pulling towards front Closing fuse box gt Make sure that the sealing rubber is properly positioned gt Press fuse box cover down and secure with clamps Installing cover gt Insert cover Q sideways into retainer gt Twist screws 2 90 clockwise Fuse box cover Clamps Practical hints Fuses Fuse box in cargo compartment The fuse box is located in the cargo compartment behind the left hand trim panel Fuse extractor Fuse box Spare fuses F IONS Closing trim panel Button for unlocking trim panel gt Fold up trim anel 2 Trim panel p panaia Opening trim panel gt Press button Q gt Fold down trim panel 2 Technical data Technical data Parts service The Technical data section provides the necessary technical data for your vehicle All authorized Mercedes Benz Centers maintain a stock of genuine Mercedes Benz parts required for maintenance and repair work In addition strategically located parts distribution centers provide quick and reliable parts service More than 300000 different parts for Mercedes Benz models are available Genuine Mercedes Benz parts are subjected to stringent quality inspections Each part has been specifically developed man
45. gt in the reservoir a If you find that the brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark or below have the brake system checked for brake pad thickness and leaks What to do if Suggested solution Release the parking brake gt page 47 Risk of accident Carefully stop the vehicle and notify an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Do not add brake fluid This will not solve the problem Practical hints What to do if Problem Possible cause Suggested solution USA only The yellow engine malfunction There is a malfunction in gt Have the vehicle checked as soon as Canada only indicator lamp comes on while 5 The fuel management possible by an authorized driving system Mercedes Benz Center An on board diagnostic connector is e The ignition system used by the service station to link the e The emission control vehicle to the shop diagnostics system system It allows the accurate identifi cation of system malfunctions e Systems which affect through the readout of diagnostic amissione trouble codes It is located in the front Such malfunctions may result left area of the footwell next to the in excessive emissions values parking brake pedal and may switch the engine to its limp home emergency operation mode Problem engine USA only Canada only The yellow engine malfunction indicator lamp comes on while driving Possible cause A loss of pressure has been
46. gt gt gt soft key This switches between the individual categories When changing the category the channel selected last in the new category becomes audible or Controls in detail Audio system The system will automatically switch to a station of the selected category if the currently selected station is not of the selected category Otherwise the currently selected station remains tuned Tuning a station within the selected category The channels identified for the currently selected category are arranged numerically Only one entry is visible at a time gt Press Bagg or button briefly The next station within the category is started gt Press and hold or BE button for approx three seconds until desired station has been reached Controls in detail Audio system Tuning via scan search Scan search is characterized as follows e Scan search plays a channel for approx eight seconds and then skips to the next channel within the current category e Scan search can be terminated manually gt Press SC soft key The search starts SC appears in the display gt Press SC soft key again The search stops Obtaining additional text information Additional text information artist title related to the current channel can be displayed gt Press INF soft key The title being played is displayed gt Press INF soft key again The name of the artist performing the title b
47. gt page 431 Other display messages If the SmartKey is not turned to position 2 in the starter switch the following message will appear Switch ignition on to check engine oil level gt Switch on the ignition gt page 33 If you see the message Observe waiting time gt If engine is at operating temperature wait five minutes before repeating check procedure gt If engine is not at operating tempera ture yet wait 30 minutes before repeating check procedure If you see the message Engine oil level Not when engine on gt Turn off the engine gt If the engine is at operating tempera ture wait five minutes before checking oil p gt Ifthe engine is not at operating temper ature yet you must wait 30 minutes before checking oil Operation Engine compartment If there is excess engine oil with the engine at normal operating temperature the following message will appear Engine oil level Reduce oil level gt Have excess oil siphoned or drained off Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Excess oil must be siphoned or drained off It could cause damage to the engine and catalytic converter not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty More information on messages in the display concerning engine oil can be found in the Practical hints section gt page 368 and gt page 369 Operation Engine compartment Adding engine oil H Only use approved e
48. page 141 Controls in detail Control system The number of menus available in the sys tem depends on which optional equipment is installed in your vehicle The menus are described on the following pages Controls in detail Control system Menus This is what you will see when you scroll The table on the next page provides an through the menus overview of the individual menus S aS o PHONE OFF AUDIO OFF After start 73 mi 1 30 h HAW OFF B Settings To reset Ho Press reset button message for 3 sec P54 32 2346 31 Menus submenus and functions Commands submenus Menu Q Standard display Menu AUDIO gt page 134 gt page 135 Digital speedometer Select radio or outside tempera station ture Call up maintenance Select satellite service display radio station USA only Check engine oil Operate the level CD player Menu NAV gt page 138 Activate route guidance Menu Vehicle status message memory gt page 138 Call up vehicle mal function warning and system status messages stored in memory Controls in detail Menu Settings gt page 140 Reset to factory settings Instrument clus ter submenu Time Date submenu Lighting submenu Vehicle submenu Convenience submenu Control system Menu Trip computer gt page 156 Fuel consumption statistics after start
49. page 329 Restraint systems Seat belts child restraints lower anchors and tethers for children LATCH As independent systems their protective functions complement one another Rim gt page 329 RON Research Octane Number The Research Octane Number for gaso line as determined by a standardized method It is an indication of a gaso line s ability to resist undesired deto nation knocking The average of both the gt MON Motor Octane Number and RON Research Octane Number is posted at the pump also known as ANTI KNOCK INDEX Shift lock When the vehicle is parked this lock prevents the transmission gear selector lever from being moved out of position P without SmartKey turned and brake pedal depressed Sidewall gt page 329 SRS Supplemental Restraint System Air bags air bag control unit with crash sensor emergency tensioning device Though independent systems they are closely interfaced to provide effective occupant protection Technical terms Tele Aid System Telematic Alarm Identification on Demand The Tele Aid system consists of three types of response automatic and manual emergency roadside assis tance and information Tele Aid is initially activated by completing a subscriber agreement and placing an acquaintance call The Tele Aid system is operational provided that the vehicle s battery is charged properly connected not damaged and cellular and GPS covera
50. reached an acceptable level for the system to continue operation The single CD player and the CD changer play audio CDs Tips on handling CDs Handle CDs carefully to prevent interference during playback Avoid scratches fingerprints and dust on the CDs Do not write on CDs or apply any labels or other material to them Clean CDs from time to time with a commercially available cleaning cloth Never wipe the CD in a circular motion instead wipe it in a straight line start ing in the center and moving outward Do not use solvents anti static sprays etc for cleaning Replace the CD in its case after use Protect CDs from heat and direct sunlight Operating the single CD player in the audio system unit Loading a CD The single CD player in the audio system unit has capacity for one CD The CD slot for loading the drive is located underneath the soft keys gt Make sure the system is switched on gt Insert CD into CD slot The label side of the CD must face upwards The system automatically pulls the CD into the CD slot The audio CD begins to play If a CD is already loaded it must be ejected before inserting a new CD Inserting a second CD in the slot with another CD still loaded will cause dam age to the CD drive not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty i If a CD has been inserted incorrectly or cannot be read WRONG CDO will appear in the display Ejecting a CD gt Make
51. see Windshield washer and headlamp cleaning system gt page 437 Operation Tires and wheels See an authorized Mercedes Benz Center for information on tested and recommended rims and tires for summer and winter operation They can also offer advice concerning tire service and purchase Warning VAN Replace rims or tires with the same designa tion manufacturer and type as shown on the original part See an authorized Mercedes Benz Center for further informa tion If incorrectly sized rims and tires are mounted e The wheel brakes or suspension components can be damaged e The operating clearance of the wheels and the tires may no longer be correct A Worn old tires can cause accidents If the tire tread is badly worn or if the tires have sustained damage replace them Warning When replacing rims only use genuine Mercedes Benz wheel bolts specified for the particular rim type Failure to do so can result in the bolts loosening and possibly an accident Retreaded tires are not tested or recom mended by Mercedes Benz since previous damage cannot always be recognized on retreads The operating safety of the vehicle cannot be assured when such tires are used Important guidelines Only use sets of tires and rims of the same type and make Tires must be of the correct size for the rim Break in new tires for approximately 60 miles 100 km at moderate speeds Regularly check
52. switch Unlocking and opening the tailgate A minimum height clearance of 6 40 ft 1 95 m is required to open the tailgate The emergency release is located on the inside of the tailgate h Release lever Cover Practical hints Unlocking locking in an emergency gt Remove cover 2 from the trim on the Locking the vehicle tailgate If you are unable to lock the vehicle with gt Push release lever 1 all the way to the the SmartKey do the following right Lift the tailgate gt Close the passenger doors and the tailgate H gt Press the central locking switch in the Always make sure there is sufficient center console gt page 103 Ovenibad plearanee gt Check to see whether the locking knobs on the passenger doors have Locking moved down gt Insert the mechanical key into the If the vehicle has previously been gt If necessary push them down manually driver s door lock until it stops locked from the outside using the F SmartKey opening the tailgate from Except for the driver s door the vehicle gt Turn the mechanical key clockwise to the inside will trigger the anti theft should now be locked position alarm system The driver s door is locked To cancel the alarm do one of the following e Press button or on the SmartKey e Insert the SmartKey in the starter switch Practical hints Unlocking locking in an emergency Fuel filler flap In
53. the multifunction display Select C for comfort driving e The vehicle starts out in second gear both forward and reverse for gentler starts This does not apply if full throttle is applied or gear range 1 is selected e Traction and driving stability are improved on icy roads e Upshifts occur earlier even when you give more gas The engine then operates at lower rpms and the wheels are less likely to spin Driving tips Accelerator position Your driving style influences the transmission s shifting behavior Less throttle Earlier upshifting More throttle Later upshifting Kickdown Use kickdown when you want maximum acceleration gt Press the accelerator past the point of resistance The transmission shifts into a lower gear gt Ease on the accelerator when you have reached the desired speed The transmission shifts up again Stopping When you stop briefly e g at traffic lights gt Leave the transmission in gear gt Hold the vehicle with the brake When you stop longer with the engine idling or on an uphill gradient gt Move the gear selector lever to position P gt Set the parking brake Controls in detail Automatic transmission Maneuvering When you maneuver in tight areas e g when pulling into a parking space gt Control the vehicle speed by gradually releasing the brakes Accelerate gently Never abruptly step on the accelerator Working on the
54. 123 Locator lighting 119 Low beam 116 Manual headlamp mode 117 Night security illumination 119 Parking lamps 116 Rear foglamp 120 Settings control system 149 Standing lamps 116 Limiting the gear range 165 Limp Home Mode 170 Loading 250 Cargo tie down rings 257 Instructions 256 Roof rack 250 Split rear bench seat 254 Loading terminology 327 Loading the vehicle 307 Locator lighting 119 Setting 151 Lock button 441 Locking 55 96 Automatic while driving 102 Centrally from inside 103 Fuel filler flap 293 Global SmartKey 98 Glove box 258 Vehicle in an emergency 383 Loss of keys 100 Loss of Service and Warranty Information Booklet 419 Low beam headlamps Indicator lamp 25 Messages in display 372 373 Replacing bulbs 389 391 Switching on 49 Lowering Vehicle 402 Lubricants Technical data 429 Luggage cover 253 Retractable 253 M Main dimensions 427 Main fuse box In passenger compartment 413 Mainodometer 129 Maintenance 12 334 Vehicles with E85 fuel 434 Maintenance service Calling up the maintenance service indicator 335 Major service Service B 334 Minor service Service A 334 Overdue 335 Types 335 When due 334 Maintenance service indicator 334 Calling up 335 336 Clearing 335 336 Maintenance System U S vehicles 334 441 Manual headlamp mode 117 Manual operations Maximum load rating 328 Microphone Fuel filler flap 384 Maximum loaded vehicle weight 328 Hands free microphone 29 Interior lighting control
55. 444 Telephone 26 265 Answering acall 159 Dialing a number from the phone book 160 Ending a call 160 Hands free microphone 29 Loading phone book 160 Message in display 376 Operation 158 224 Redialing 161 Temperature Display mode 143 Setting interior temperature 179 Setting units in display 143 Tires 314 Tie down rings cargo compartment Tightening torque wheel bolts Tilt Head restraint manual seat 37 Head restraint power seat 39 Tilt sliding sunroof Closing 243 385 Closing with SmartKey 245 Messages in display 376 Opening 243 385 Opening with SmartKey 245 Stopping 245 Synchronizing 246 Time Setting hours 145 Setting minutes 146 257 402 444 Time display Setting 147 Time synchronization With head unit 145 TIN 329 Tire Vehicle maximum load on 330 Tire and Loading Information 308 Tire and loading terminology 327 Tire care and maintenance 305 Tire Identification Number see TIN Tire inflation pressure Air pressure 327 Checking 295 313 315 Tire inspection 305 Tire load rating 329 Tire ply composition and material used 329 Tire speed rating 287 320 330 Tire terminology 327 Tire traction 287 Tires 304 423 Direction of rotation 307 Driving instructions 286 Retreads 304 Rims and tires 423 Rotating 331 Service life 305 Temperature 314 326 Tread depth 306 332 Wear pattern 331 Winter 332 Tools 377 Tow away alarm Canceling alarm 94 Tow away alarm 93 Arming 93 Disarming 93 Disarm
56. 49 TUIN SIQMAIS 0 eee eeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeee 50 Windshield WiperS ssccceeseeees 50 Rear WINdOW WIDPEF eseceeeeeeeees 53 Problems while driving 54 Parking and locking eeeeeeeeeeeeee 55 Parking brake ssec 55 Switching off headlamps 56 Turning off engine eee 57 IS ooo ee eeeceeeceesececeeeeeceteeeeeee 116 Safety and Security 59 Controls in detail 00 ee 95 Exterior lamp switch 6 116 Occupant safety 60 Locking and unlocking 96 Combination switch 06 120 Air DOSS varesise 61 SMAPMK CY sesiis 96 Cornering fog lamps All models Seat DENIS sce ses cbsngs ceteesute cde coeseosenes 66 Opening the doors from the with Bi Xenon headlamps 121 Children in the vehicle 0 70 Ete EE E E E ET 100 Hazard warning flasher 122 Blocking of rear door window Opening the tailgate 101 Interior lighting ceeeeeeeeeeees 123 operati N cis essceves ccssauccecveinecbectectecire 82 Closing the tailgate eee 101 Door entry lamps eee eee 124 Panic Alarim ccccccccsesseeceesssteeeeeeesnee 83 Automatic central locking 102 Instrument cluster ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 125 Activating csissd iccseeseaspartestenseeteaseese 83 Locking and unlocking from Instrument cluster illumination 125 Deactivating seernes 83 theinsidesieiesusenniinisiiiniuss 103 C
57. 7 3841 3 H ESP Sane off on Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an extended period with the ESP switched gt Press switch off This may cause serious damage to The ESP warning lamp in the the drivetrain which is not covered by speedometer comes on the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty The ESP is deactivated Switching on the ESP gt Press switch Q again The ESP warning lamp in the speedometer goes out You are now again in normal driving mode with the ESP switched on Safety and Security Driving safety systems Four wheel electronic traction system 4MATIC with the ESP Models with all wheel drive only The 4MATIC improves vehicle s ability to use available traction e g during winter operation in mountains under snowy conditions by applying power to all four wheels Warning VAN If you see the ESP warning lamp flash ing in the speedometer proceed as follows e While driving off apply as little throttle as possible e While driving ease up on the accelera tor e Adapt your speed and driving style to the prevailing road conditions Failure to observe these guidelines could cause the vehicle to skid The ESP cannot prevent accidents resulting from excessive speed Do not tow with one axle raised Otherwise the transfer case can be damaged which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Performance testing must only be con ducted on a two axle dynamometer Otherw
58. 90 Transfer case C 240 4MATIC approx 0 62 US qt 0 59 I MB Transfer case fluid Power steering approx 1 1 US qt 1 0 I MB Power Steering Fluid Pentosin CHF 11S Front wheel hubs approx 2 1 oz 60 g each High temperature roller bearing grease Brake system 0 5 US qt 0 5 MB Brake Fluid DOT 4 Cooling system approx 6 8 US qt 6 4 I MB 325 0 Anticorrosion Antifreeze Agent Technical data Fuels coolants lubricants etc Model Fuel tank including a reserve of Air conditioning system Windshield washer Windshield washer and headlamp cleaning system Capacity 16 4 US gal 62 0 I 2 1 US gal 8 0 1 3 2 US qt 3 0 1 6 4 US qt 6 0 I Fuels coolants lubricants etc Premium unleaded gasoline Minimum Posted Octane 91 Avg of 96 RON 86 MON Flexible Fuel Vehicle identified by a label reading Premium gasoline or E85 only on fuel filler flap Alternative fuel Ethanol fuel E85 R 134a refrigerant and special PAG lubricant oil never R 12 MB Windshield Washer Concentrate Use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate S and water for temperatures above freezing point or MB Windshield Washer Concentrate S and commercially available premixed windshield washer solvent antifreeze for temperatures below freezing point Follow suggested mixing ratios gt page 437 Engine oils Engine oils are specifically tested for their suitability in our engines and durability for our service intervals Th
59. Cargo tie down rings 257 Selecting Automatic time change summer winter 147 Display for status indicator 144 Station satellite radio 214 Selecting radio mode 207 Selector lever see gear selector lever Self test OCS 78 Tele Aid 267 Service Parts 418 Service and Warranty Booklet Loss of 419 Service and warranty information 10 Service life tires 305 Service see Maintenance Service System see FSS Setting Convenience functions Cruise control 248 Date day 148 Date month 147 Date year 149 Daytime running lamp mode 150 Exterior rear view mirror parking position 115 Higher speed in cruise control 249 Hours clock 145 Individual vehicle settings 140 Instrument lighting 125 Interior lighting delayed shut off 153 Key dependent memory 155 Lamps and lighting control system 149 Language multifunction display 144 Locator lighting 151 142 154 Lower speed in cruise control 249 Miles kilometers in speedometer 143 Minutes clock 146 Night security illumination 151 Parking position for exterior rear view mirrors 156 Slower speed in cruise control 249 Speed in cruise control 249 Speedometer display mode 143 Temperature interior 179 189 Temperature indicator 143 Time display mode clock 147 Units Speedometer 143 Temperature 143 Setting current speed 248 Setting the temperature 179 Settings Convenience functions 154 Factory SmartKey 98 Individual SmartKey 155 Lighting control system 149 Menus and
60. Electronic Stability Program ESP warning lamp BRAKE Brake warning lamp USA only OJ Brake warning lamp Canada only Low beam head lamp indicator lamp WN U Left turn signal indicator lamp Multifunction display with Trip odometer Main odometer Gear selector lever position Page 87 348 47 55 345 47 55 345 49 116 50 129 127 129 46 166 Item Program mode Status indicator outside temperature digital speedometer Digital clock BEM Right turn signal indicator lamp Tachometer with OJ Antilock Brake System ABS indicator lamp Engine malfunction indicator lamp USA only Engine malfunction indicator lamp Canada only Eg Supplemental restraint system indicator lamp Page 168 127 144 129 145 50 127 85 344 346 347 346 347 60 349 At a glance Instrument cluster Item Seat belt telltale E High beam head lamp indicator lamp Fuel gauge with Fuel reserve warning lamp EA Fuel filler cap location indicator The fuel filler cap is on the rear right hand side Coolant temperature gauge Reset button for e Resetting trip odometer e Resetting individual settings e Instrument cluster illumination Page 66 349 49 120 349 126 127 140 125 At a glance Multifunction steering wheel Item Page Multifunction display 129 Operating contr
61. Fuel consumption statistics since the last reset Call up range Menu Q Telephone gt page 158 Load phone book Search for name in phone book Controls in detail Control system i The headings used in the menus table are designed to facilitate navigation within the system and are not neces sarily identical to those shown in the control system displays The first function displayed in each menu will automatically show you which part of the system you are in Standard display menu In the standard display the main odometer and the trip odometer are shown in the multifunction display Trip odometer Main odometer If you see another display press button or repeatedly until the standard display appears You can select the functions in the standard display menu with button Rg or ES The following functions are available Function Page Display digital speedometer or 135 outside temperature Calling up maintenance service 334 display Checking engine oil level 298 Display digital speedometer or outside temperature gt Press button EAN or Keg repeatedly until the digital speedometer appears in the multifunction display The current vehicle speed is shown in the multifunction display 55 Mph P54 32 2734 31 Q Digital speedometer i You can have the outside temperature displayed instead of the digital speedometer You can select the setting in the submenu In
62. Headlamps 49 High beam headlamps 49 High beams 120 Ignition 33 Immobilizer 57 91 Low beam headlamps 49 Rear window defroster 175 Residual heat 197 Seat heating 112 Tow away alarm 93 Windshield wipers 51 Adding Coolant 301 Engine oil 300 Additional turn signals 389 Adjustable air vents rear passenger compartment 185 198 Adjusting 35 Air distribution 180 190 Airvolume 180 191 Backrest contour 111 Backrest side bolsters 111 Backrest tilt manual seat 36 Backrest tilt power seat 38 Exterior rear view mirrors 41 Folding back rear seat head restraints 109 Head restraint height manual seat 37 Head restraint height power seat 38 Head restraint height rearseats 108 Head restraint tilt manual seat 37 Head restraint tilt power seat 39 Head restraint tilt rear seats 110 Instrument cluster illumination 125 Interior rear view mirror 41 Manual seat 36 Mirrors 41 Multicontour seat 111 Placing upright rear seat head restraints 109 Power seat 38 Rear seat head restraints 108 Seat belt height 45 Seat cushion depth 111 Seat cushion tilt manual seat 36 Seat cushion tilt power seat 38 Seat fore and aft adjustment manual seat 36 Seat fore and aft adjustment power seat 38 Seat height manual seat 36 Seat height power seat 38 Seats 35 Steering column height electrical 41 Steering column height manual 40 Steering column length electrical 41 Steering column length manual 40 Steer
63. Information button Ry gt Press and hold button for longer than two seconds A call to the Customer Assistance Center will be initiated The button will flash while the call is in progress The message Connecting call will appear in the multifunction display and the audio system is muted When the connection is established the message Call connected appears in the multifunction display The Tele Aid system will transmit data generating the vehicle identification number model color and location subject to availability of cellular and GPS signals A voice connection between the Customer Assistance Center representative and the occupants of the vehicle will be established Information regarding the operation of your vehicle the nearest Mercedes Benz Center or Mercedes Benz USA products and services is available to you For more details concerning the Tele Aid system please visit www mbusa com and use your ID and password sent to you separately to learn more USA only i The indicator lamp on the Information button remains illuminated in red for approximately ten seconds during the system self check after switching on ignition together with the SOS button and the Roadside Assistance button Pg See system self check gt page 267 when the indicator lamp does not come on in red or stays on longer than approximately ten seconds If the indicator lamp on the Information button is flashing continuously an
64. O or 1 Otherwise the ESP will immediately be engaged and will apply the rear wheel brakes When towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground the gear selector lever must be in position N and the SmartKey must be in starter switch position 2 When towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground or the front axle raised the vehicle may be towed only for distances up to 30 miles 50 km and at a speed not to exceed 30 mph 50 km h To be certain to avoid a possibility of damage to the drivetrain however we recommend the drive shaft be discon nected at the rear axle drive flange vehicles with 4MATIC disconnected at the front and rear axle drive flanges for any towing beyond a short tow to a nearby garage Warning VAN If circumstances require towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground always tow with a tow bar if e the engine will not run e there is a malfunction in the power supply or in the vehicle s electrical system as that will be necessary to adequately control the towed vehicle Prior to towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground make sure the SmartKey is in starter switch position 2 If the SmartKey is left in starter switch position O for an extended period of time it can no longer be turned in the switch In this case the steering is locked To unlock remove SmartKey from starter switch and reinsert Practical hints Towing the vehicle i To signal turn
65. Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching fire You can be seriously burned Practical hints Possible cause You are driving with the parking brake gt set The brake pads have reached their wear gt limit There is insufficient brake fluid in the gt reservoir H If you find that the brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark or below have the brake system checked for brake pad thickness and leaks What to do if Possible solution Release the parking brake gt page 47 Have the brake pads replaced as soon as possible Risk of accident Stop the vehicle and notify an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Do not add brake fluid This will not solve the problem Brake pad thickness must be visually checked by a qualified technician at the intervals specified in the Maintenance booklet Practical hints What to do if Display symbol Display message Coolant Check level A Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which may burn if it comes into contact with hot engine parts You can be seriously burned Warning Possible solution gt Add coolant gt page 301 Possible cause The coolant level is too low gt Ifyou have to add coolant frequently have the cooling system checked by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Do no
66. Power seat adjustment The seat adjustment switches are located in each front door OO da e P54 25 2949 31 Head restraint height Seat height Seat cushion tilt Seat fore and aft adjustment Seat backrest tilt gt Switch on ignition gt page 33 or gt Open the respective door Seat fore and aft adjustment gt Press switch forward or backward in direction of arrow Adjust seat to a comfortable seating position that still allows you to reach the accelerator brake pedal safely The posi tion should be as far rearward as possible consistent with ability to properly operate controls When moving the seat make sure that there are no items in the footwell or behind the seat Otherwise you could damage the seat i The memory function gt page 113 lets you store the setting for the seat position together with the settings for the steering wheel and exterior rear view mirrors Seat cushion tilt gt Press switch up or down in direction of arrow 3 until your upper legs are lightly supported Seat backrest tilt gt Press switch forward or backward in direction of arrow G until your arms are slightly angled when holding the steering wheel Seat height gt Press switch up or down in direction of arrow 2 Head restraint height gt Press switch up or down in direction of arrow Q il Adjust the head restraint in such a way that it is as close to
67. The alarm system will rearm automati cally after approximately 40 seconds if no door or the tailgate lid was opened Canceling the alarm To cancel the alarm gt Press the or button on the SmartKey or gt Insert the SmartKey in the starter switch Tow away alarm Once the tow away alarm is armed a visual and audible alarm will be triggered when someone attempts to raise the vehicle i The tow away protection alarm is triggered for example if the vehicle is lifted on one side If the alarm stays on for more than 30 seconds a call to the Response Center is initiated automatically by the Tele Aid system gt page 266 provid ed Tele Aid service was subscribed to and properly activated and that neces sary cellular service and GPS coverage are available Arming tow away alarm gt Lock your vehicle with the SmartKey The tow away alarm is automatically armed after about 30 seconds i When you unlock your vehicle the tow away protection disarms automatically The tow away alarm remains disarmed until you lock the vehicle again Disarming tow away alarm To prevent triggering the tow away alarm switch off the tow away alarm feature before towing the vehicle or when parking on a surface subject to movement such as a ferry or auto train Safety and Security Anti theft systems The switch is located on the center console Tow away alarm off switch Indicator lamp gt Swit
68. To activate press the SOS button the Roadside Assistance button or the Information button Ry depend ing on the type of response required i The SOS button is located above the interior rear view mirror The Roadside Assistance button and the Information button are located below the center armrest cover Shortly after the completion of your Tele Aid acquaintance call you will receive a user ID and password By visiting www mbusa com and selecting Tele Aid USA only you will have access to account information remote door unlock and more i The Tele Aid system utilizes the cellular network for communication and the GPS Global Positioning System satel lites for vehicle location If either of these signals are unavailable the Tele Aid system may not function and if this occurs assistance must be sum moned by other means System self check Initially after switching on ignition mal functions are detected and indicated the indicator lamps in the SOS button the Roadside Assistance button and the Information button stay on longer than ten seconds or do not come on The message Tele Aid malfunction Drive to workshop appears in the multifunction display Controls in detail Useful features Warning A If the indicator lamps in the SOS button in the Roadside Assistance button and or in the Information button remain illuminated constantly in red and or the message Tele Aid malfunction D
69. VAN If the level of steering gear oil in reservoir is too low the steering power assistance could fail Much greater effort will then be needed to turn the steering wheel Do not add steering oil without checking the steering system Do not drive the vehicle Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Practical hints What to do if Possible cause Possible solution The seat belt system is malfunctioning Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible The steering gear oil level is too low Have the system checked by an There is a danger of steering gear authorized Mercedes Benz Center damage Practical hints What to do if Display symbol D p fo n Display message Close slid pop up sunroof Close slid pop up sunroof Tele Aid malfunction Drive to workshop Function unavailable Trunk open Washer fluid please refill Possible cause You have opened the driver s door with the SmartKey removed from the starter switch and the tilt sliding sunroof open You have opened the driver s door with the SmartKey removed from the starter switch and the tilt sliding sunroof open One or more main functions of the Tele Aid system are malfunctioning This display appears if button or on the multifunction steering wheel is pressed and the vehicle is not equipped with a telephone This message will appear wheneve
70. Vehicle Weight Rating see GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight see GVW GVW 328 GVWR 328 H Halogen type Front lamp bulbs 391 Hands free microphone 29 Hard plastic trim items Cleaning 341 Hazard warning flasher 122 Switching off 122 Switching on 122 Head restraints 107 Front seats manual seat 107 Front seats power seat 108 Manual seat 37 Power seat 38 Rear seats 108 Head unit Time synchronization with 145 Headlamp cleaning system 303 Headlamp shut off delay see Delayed shut off exterior lamps Headlamps Automatic control 117 Bi Xenon 439 Bi Xenon type Replacing bulbs 393 Cleaning 339 Cleaning system 171 303 437 Halogen type replacing bulbs 391 Refilling washer fluid 303 Switching off 56 Switching on 49 Washer fluid 437 Headliner and shelf below rear window Cleaning 341 Heated seats 112 Height adjustment Head restraints manual seat 37 Head restraints power seat 38 Rear seat head restraints 108 Seat belts 45 Steering wheel electrical adjustment 40 Steering wheel manual adjustment 40 High beam flasher 49 120 High beam headlamps Indicator lamp 25 Messages in display 372 Replacing bulbs 389 392 Switching on 49 120 High beam headlamps xenon type Replacing bulbs 393 High mounted brake lamp 389 Hood 296 Closing 297 Message in display 370 Opening 296 Horn 23 Hydroplaning 286 l Identification labels 420 Certification label 420 Emission control information label 420 Vacuum line routing diagram label
71. a damp cloth and dry thoroughly or clean with Mercedes Benz approved Leather Care Cup holders Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or mild detergent for delicate fabrics as a washing solution Wipe with a cloth moist ened in lukewarm solution Do not use scouring agents Hard plastic trim items Pour Mercedes Benz approved Interior Care onto soft lint free cloth and apply with light pressure Headliner and rear window shelf Clean with soft bristle brush or use a dry shampoo cleaner in case of excessive dirt Seat belts The webbing must not be treated with chemical cleaning agents Only use clear lukewarm water and soap Do not dry the webbing at temperatures above 176 F 80 C or in direct sunlight AN Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may severely weaken them In a crash they may not be able to provide adequate protection Warning Operation Vehicle care Upholstery Using aftermarket seat covers or wearing clothing that have the tendency to give off coloring e g when wet etc may cause the upholstery to become permanently dis colored By lining the seats with a proper intermediate cover contact discoloration will be prevented Leather upholstery Wipe leather upholstery with a damp cloth and dry thoroughly or clean with Mercedes Benz approved Leather Care Exercise particular care when cleaning perforated leather as its underside should not become wet Operation Vehicle ca
72. a door e remove the SmartKey from the starter switch e open the tailgate Manual control Switching all front interior lights on and off gt Press the symbol on rocker switch The front interior lights come on gt Press rocker switch to center position to activate the automatic control Controls in detail Lighting i The setting selected for the interior lighting is used for the cargo compart ment lighting as well If you leave the tailgate open for an extended period of time the cargo compartment lighting will switch off automatically after approximately ten minutes Switching rear interior lights on and off gt Press button EJ The lights in the rear passenger compartment come on gt Press button again The lights in the rear passenger compartment go out Switching right front reading lamp on and off gt Press right button EES The right reading lamp comes on gt Press right button again The right reading lamp goes out Switching left front reading lamp on and off gt Press left button JEJ The left reading lamp comes on gt Press left button again The left reading lamp goes out Door entry lamps The appropriate door entry lamp switches on if a door is opened in darkness and if the interior lighting is switched to auto matic function The entry lamp switches off automatically when the door is closed i If you turn the SmartKey in the starter swi
73. activated ACQUIRING will also appear in the radio display and NO SAT will appear in the multifunction display Selecting a station The following options are available e Selecting a station using the selected category gt page 215 e Tuning via station presets gt page 214 e Tuning via scan search gt page 216 e Tuning via manual channel input gt page 214 e Tuning via the program category list gt page 215 Tuning via station presets Ten satellite radio station presets are available You can access the presets via number keys Accessing via number keys gt Enter number of preset you wish to select e g EM The radio plays the station stored under this number and the PTY function changes to the category corresponding to the station Tuning via manual channel input P82 60 4461 31 Example tuning in channel 16 gt Press EJ button Input line appears in the main radio menu gt Use number keys to enter desired channel within eight seconds eg i I The system tunes to channel 16 The station you have selected begins to play You can only enter available channel numbers i Tuning via the program category list The category list contains all currently receivable categories of programs It is arranged alphabetically Selecting a category gt Press PTY soft key P82 60 4462 31 The current PTY category of the station is displayed gt Press lt lt lt or
74. afforded The BAS cannot prevent accidents includ ing those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydroplaning Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or danger ous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others For more information see Practical hints gt page 359 ESP The Electronic Stability Program ESP is operational as soon as the engine is run ning and monitors the vehicle s traction force of adhesive friction between the tires and the road surface and handling The ESP recognizes when a wheel is spinning or if the vehicle starts to skid By applying brakes to the appropriate wheel and by limiting the engine output the ESP works to stabilize the vehicle The ESP is especially useful while driving off and on wet or slippery road surfaces The ESP also stabilizes the vehicle during braking maneuvers The ESP warning lamp in the speedometer flashes when the ESP is engaged The ESP warning lamp in the speedometer comes on when you switch on the ignition It goes out when the engine is running Safety and Security Driving safety systems Warning A Never switch off the ESP when you see the ESP warning lamp flashing in the speedometer In this case proceed as follows e While driving off apply as little throt
75. air bag off indicator lamp remains out have the system checked as soon as possible by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Do not transport a child on the front passenger seat until the system has been repaired gt Also note any messages in the multifunction display and follow corrective steps gt page 354 i hil traint or n the front passenger Warning VAN child restraint or less o e ont passenge seat do not transport a child on the front Ifthe JEA indicator lamp does not passenger seat until the system has been illuminate or remains out with the weight of repaired a typical 12 month old child in a standard Practical hints What to do if Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display Warning and malfunction messages appear in the multifunction display located in the instrument cluster Certain warning and malfunction messag es are accompanied by an audible signal Address these messages accordingly and follow the additional instructions given in this Operator s Manual Selecting the vehicle status message memory menu in the control system gt page 138 displays both cleared and uncleared messages High priority messages appear in the multifunction display in red color Certain messages of high priority cannot be cleared from the multifunction display using the reset button gt page 125 or button ENN Beal z or on the steering wheel Other messages of high priority and
76. antifreeze on hot engine parts because it may ignite and burn You could be seriously burned Warning Technical data Fuels coolants lubricants etc Washer fluid mixing ratio For temperatures above freezing point use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate S and water e 1 part S to 100 parts water 1 34 fl oz 40 ml S to 1 gallon 4 0 I water For temperatures below freezing point use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate S and commercially available premixed windshield washer solvent antifreeze e 1 part S to 100 parts solvent 1 34 fl oz 40 ml S to 1 gallon 4 0 I solvent ABS Antilock Brake System Prevents the wheels from locking up during braking so that the vehicle can continue to be steered Accessory weight gt page 327 Air pressure gt page 327 Alignment bolt Metal pin with thread The centering pin is an aid used when changing a tire to align the wheel with the wheel hub Aspect ratio gt page 327 Bar gt page 327 BAS Brake Assist System System for potentially reducing braking distances in emergency braking situations The system is activated when it senses an emergency based on how fast the brake is applied Bead gt page 327 Bi Xenon headlamps Headlamps which use an electric arc as the light source and produce a more intense light than filament headlamps Bi Xenon headlamps produce low beam and high beam CAC Cust
77. appears in the multifunction display As an alternative you may unlock the vehi cle via Internet using the ID and password sent to you shortly after the completion of your acquaintance call The Response Center will then unlock your vehicle with the remote door unlocking feature i The remote door unlock feature is available if the relevant cellular phone network is available The SOS button will flash and the message Connecting call will appear in the multifunction display to indicate receipt of the door unlock command Once the vehicle is unlocked a Response Center specialist will attempt to establish voice contact with the vehicle occupants If the tailgate recessed handle was pulled for more than 20 seconds before door unlock authorization was received by the Response Center you must wait 15 minutes before pulling the tailgate recessed handle again Controls in detail Useful features Stolen Vehicle Recovery services In the event your vehicle was stolen gt gt Report the incident to the police The police will issue a numbered incident report Pass this number on to the Mercedes Benz Response Center along with your password issued to you when you subscribed to the service The Response Center will then attempt to covertly contact the vehicle s Tele Aid system Once the vehicle is located the Response Center will contact the local law enforcement and you The vehicle s location
78. avail able to the next operator If you bought this vehicle used be sure to send in the Notice of Purchase of Used Car found in the Service and Warranty In formation Booklet or call the Mercedes Benz Customer Assistance Cen ter in the USA at 1 800 FOR MERCedes or Customer Service in Canada at 1 800 387 0100 Introduction Operator s Manual Operating your vehicle outside the USA Certain Mercedes Benz models are avail or Canada able for delivery in Europe under our Euro pean Delivery Program For details consult If you plan to operate your vehicle in for an authorized Mercedes Benz Center or eign countries please be aware that write to e service facilities or replacement parts In the USA may not be readily available Mercedes Benz USA LLC e unleaded gasoline for vehicles with cat European Delivery Department alytic converters may not be available One Mercedes Drive the use of leaded fuels will damage the Montvale NJ 07645 0350 catalysts y In Canada e gasoline may have a considerably low er octane rating and improper fuel can cause engine damage Mercedes Benz Canada Inc European Delivery Department 98 Vanderhoof Avenue Toronto Ontario M4G 4C9 Introduction Where to find it This Operator s Manual is designed to pro vide comprehensive support information for you the vehicle operator Each section has its own reference color so you can find information quickly
79. be driving your vehicle at high speeds of 100 mph 160 km h or higher where it is legal and conditions allow consult the placard on the inside of the fuel filler flap on how to adjust the cold tire inflation pressure If you do not adjust the tire inflation pressure excessive heat can build up and result in sudden tire failure Be sure to readjust the tire inflation pressure for normal driving speeds You should wait until the tires are cold before adjusting the tire inflation pressure Some vehicles may have supplemental tire inflation pressure information for vehicle loads less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition If such information is provided it can be found on the placard located on the inside of the fuel filler flap Tire inflation pressure changes by approxi mately 1 5 psi 0 1 bar per 18 F 10 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire inflation pressure where the temperature is different from the outside temperature Checking tire inflation pressure Regularly check your tire inflation pressure at least once a month Check and adjust the tire inflation pressure when the tires are cold The tires can be considered cold if the vehicle has been parked for at least three hours or driven less than one mile 1 6 km If you check the tire inflation pressure when the tires are warm the vehicle has been driven for several miles or sitting less than three hours the reading will be app
80. being played Fast forward reverse appears next to TRACK in the display Fastforward gt Press and hold button until desired point has been reached You can only enter available track numbers Reverse gt Press and hold button until desired point has been reached Skipping tracks forward backward e Skipping tracks forward gt Press button briefly The next track will be played The track number and the relative time of the track is shown in the display during the search e Skipping tracks backward gt Press button briefly If the track has been playing for more than ten seconds the unit skips back to the beginning of the track currently playing If less than ten seconds have been played the unit skips back to the beginning of the previous track Pressing the or button repeatedly will result in multiple tracks being skipped Scan e Starting scan gt Press SC soft key SC will appear in the display Each track on the current CD will be played for approx eight seconds in ascending order e Ending scan gt Press SC soft key or IRM or BER Random play The random function RDM plays the tracks of the current CD in random order i When you start the RDM function the RPT function is automatically switched off e Switching on random gt Press RDM soft key RDM appears in the display A randomly selected track is played e Switching off random gt Press RDM soft key again
81. book the name will appear in na display Pp telephone s phone book using the gt Press and hold button ZW audio system You can access both the or BA main entries and the sub entries of j initi Phone book The system jumps from one initial your phone book letter to the next in ascending or The numbers stored in the phone book of descending order the telephone can be called up either by name or number gt Press and hold button RW or B until desired initial letter In addition incoming calls are stored in the has been reached phone book CLR HUM RCW or P82 60 4559 31 gt Press button WN or BA repeatedly until desired entry has been reached gt When you have selected a number press button The call will be made The stored entries are selected in alphabetical order with the sub entries i Several sub entries can be stored for each main entry name These entries are marked by a corresponding abbreviation that appears in the upper Returning calls received left hand corner of the display The following abbreviations for sub entries are possible CEL Mobile phone e Viewing the telephone number of a telephone book entry gt Search for desired entry gt Press NUM soft key The telephone number of the phone book entry appears in the display HOM Home WOR Work CLE HUH RoW FAX Fax P82 60 4467 31 PAG Pager TEL Main Controls in detail Audio system P
82. button or Do not release the button gt The indicator lamp will begin to flash after 20 seconds Without releasing the integrated signal transmitter button proceed with programming starting with step 3 279 The first 1000 miles 1500 km B Driving instructions At the gas station Engine compartment Tires and wheels Winter driving Maintenance Vehicle care Operation The first 1000 miles 1500 km In the Operation section you will find detailed information on operating main taining and caring for your vehicle The more cautiously you treat your vehicle during the break in period the more satis fied you will be with its performance later on e Drive your vehicle during the first 1000 miles 1500 km at varying but moderate vehicle and engine speeds e During this period avoid heavy loads full throttle driving and excessive engine speeds no more than Ay of maximum rpm in each gear e Shift gears in a timely manner e Avoid accelerating by kick down e Do not attempt to slow the vehicle down by shifting to a lower gear using the gear selector lever e Select positions 3 2 or 1 only when driving at moderate speeds for hill driving e Select C as the preferred shift program gt page 168 for the first 1000 miles 1500 km After 1000 miles 1500 km you may gradually increase vehicle and engine speeds to the permissible maximum All of the above instructions as may ap
83. could occur under some circumstances even with the air bag technology installed in your vehicle The only means to completely eliminate this risk is to never place a child ina rear facing child restraint in the front seat We therefore strongly recommend that you always place a child ina rear facing child restraint in the back seat If you must install a rear facing child restraint on the front passenger seat because circumstances require you to do so make sure that the gJ indicator lamp is illuminated indicating that the front passenger front air bag is deactivated Should the indicator lamp not illuminate or go out while the restraint is installed please check installation Periodically check the EA EER indicator lamp while driving to make sure the EJ indicator lamp is illuminated If the J indicator lamp goes out or remains out do not transport a child on the front passenger seat until the system has been repaired A child in a rear facing child restraint on the front passenger seat will be seriously injured or even killed if the passenger front air bag inflates If you have to place a child in a forward facing child restraint on the front passenger seat move the seat as far back as possible use the proper child restraint recommended for the age size and weight of the child and secure child restraint with the vehicle s seat belt according to the child seat manufacturer s instructions For children lar
84. den maneuvers loose items will be thrown around inside the vehicle and cause injury to vehicle occupants unless the items are securely fastened in the vehicle Always use the cargo tie down rings gt page 257 Folding the backrest forward gt Pull release handle Q gt Fold seat cushion 2 forward gt Right hand side of rear seat 4 A S3 Slip seat belt webbing behind retainer Fully retract and fold rearward head restraints gt page 109 Controls in detail Loading Returning the backrest to original position Ne pod 2622 3 If the backrest is not locked into position a red indicator will be visible gt Pull release lever gt Fold backrest forward gt Fold backrest 2 rearward until it i engages and pulling on the backrest With the twin reel roller blind installed Fold seat cushion Q rearward until it locks into position gt Check for secure locking by pushing e When folding the backrest forward fold the right section first and then the left section e If only the left section is to be folded first remove the twin reel roller blind gt page 253 Controls in detail Loading Warning VAN If a red indicator is visible with the backrest up then the backrest is not properly locked into position Always lock backrest in its upright position when rear seat bench is occupied or the extended cargo compartment is not in use
85. either dispatch a qualified Mercedes Benz technician or arrange to tow your vehicle to the nearest authorized Mercedes Benz Center For services such as labor and or towing charges may apply Refer to the Roadside Assistance manual for more information The following is only available in the USA e Sign and Drive services Services such as jump start a few gallons of fuel or the replacement of a flat tire with the vehicle spare tire are obtainable 270 i The indicator lamp on the Roadside Assistance button remains illumi nated in red for approximately ten seconds during the system self check after switching on ignition together with the SOS button and the Informa tion button E See system self check gt page 267 when the indicator lamp does not come on in red or stays on longer than approximately ten seconds If the indicator lamp on the Roadside Assistance button is flashing continuously and there was no voice connection to the Response Center established then the Tele Aid system could not initiate a Roadside Assis tance call e g the relevant cellular phone network is not available The message Call failed appears in the multifunction display Roadside Assistance calls can be terminated using the button on the multifunction steering wheel or the respective button for ending a telephone call on the audio system or COMAND head unit Information button Located below the center armrest cover is the
86. fail from being over heated Do not overinflate tires Overinflated tires can adversely affect handling and ride comfort wear unevenly increase stopping distance and result in sudden deflation blowout because they are more likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris potholes etc Your vehicle is equipped with either the Tire and Loading Information placard Example A or the Vehicle Tire Information placard Example B located on the driver s door B pillar gt page 308 The tire inflation pressure should be checked regularly and should only be ad justed on cold tires The tires can be con sidered cold if the vehicle has been parked for at least three hours or driven less than one mile 1 6 km Follow recommended cold tire inflation pressures listed on placard Keeping the tires properly inflated provides the best handling tread life and riding comfort Operation Tires and wheels In addition to the tire placard on the driver s door B pillar also consult the fuel filler flap for any additional information pertaining to special driving situations For more information see Important notes on tire inflation pressure gt page 314 i Data shown on placard examples is for illustration purposes only Tire data is specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in the illustrations below Refer to placard on vehicle for actual data specific to your vehicle Operation Ti
87. for which your tires are rated is below the speed rating of your vehicle you must place a notice to this effect where it will be seen by the driver Such notices are available from your tire dealer or from any authorized Mercedes Benz Center A If you use your spare tire when winter tires are fitted on the other wheels be aware that the difference in tire characteristics may very well impair turning stability and that overall driving stability may be reduced Adapt your driving style accordingly Warning Have the spare tire replaced with a winter tire at the nearest authorized Mercedes Benz Center Block heater Canada only The engine is equipped with a block heater The electrical cable may be installed at an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Snow chains Snow chains should only be driven on snow covered roads at speeds not to exceed 30 mph 50 km h Remove chains as soon as possible when driving on roads without snow i When driving with snow chains you may wish to deactivate the ESP gt page 87 before setting the vehicle in motion This will improve the vehicle s traction Operation Winter driving Please observe the following guidelines when using snow chains e Use of snow chains is not permissible with all wheel tire combinations e Snow chains should only be used on the rear wheels Follow the manufac turer s mounting instructions e Only use snow chains that are approved by
88. forward That would increase the chance of head and neck injuries The belt would also apply too much force to the ribs or abdomen which could severely injure internal organs such as your liver or spleen Never wear belts over rigid or breakable objects in or on your clothing such as eyeglasses pens keys etc as these might cause injuries Position the lap belt as low as possible on your hips and not across the abdo men If the belt is positioned across your abdomen it could cause serious injuries in a crash Never use a seat belt for more than one person at a time Do not fasten a seat belt around a person and another person or other objects Belts should not be worn twisted In a crash you wouldn t have the full width of the belt to distribute impact forces The twisted belt against your body could cause injuries Pregnant women should also use a lap shoulder belt The lap belt portion should be positioned as low as possible on the hips to avoid any possible pressure on the abdomen Never place your feet on the instrument panel dashboard or on the seat Always keep both feet on the floor in front of the seat When using a seat belt to secure infant or toddler restraints or children in booster seats always follow the child seat manufacturer s instructions Safety and Security Occupant safety Emergency tensioning device ETD seat belt force limiter The seat belts for the front and rear outer
89. from the coat hooks or handles over the door These items may turn into projec tiles and cause head and other injuries when curtain air bag is deployed Never place your feet on the instrument panel dashboard or on the seat Always keep both feet on the floor in front of the seat Air bag system components will be hot after an air bag has inflated Do not touch e In addition improper repair work on the SRS creates a risk of rendering the SRS inoperative or causing unintended air bag deployment Work on the SRS must therefore only be performed by qualified technicians Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center e For your protection and the protection of others when scrapping the air bag unit or emergency tensioning device our safety instructions must be fol lowed These instructions are available from your authorized Mercedes Benz Center e Given the considerable deployment speed required inflation volume and the textile structure of the air bags there is the possibility of abrasions or other more significant injuries resulting from air bag deployment When you sell your vehicle we strongly urge you to give notice to the subsequent owner that it is equipped with an SRS by alerting them to the applicable section in the Operator s Manual Front air bags Driver s air bag Passenger front air bag Driver and front passenger air bags are deployed e inthe event of certain frontal impacts
90. gasolines which contain these additives Mercedes Benz recommends the use of additives approved by us for use on Mercedes Benz vehicles Refer to Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet for a listing of approved product s Follow directions on product label Do not blend any specific fuel additives with fuel This only results in unnecessary cost and may be harmful to engine operation Damage or malfunction resulting from poor fuel quality or from blending additional fuel additives other than those tested and approved by us for use on Mercedes Benz vehicles listed in the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet are not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Technical data Fuels coolants lubricants etc Flexible Fuel Vehicles Flexible Fuel Vehicles are identified by a label reading Premium gasoline or E85 only on fuel filler flap These vehicles are designed to operate on premium unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel E85 or on any mixture of these two Ethanol fuel E85 is a mixture of approximately 85 ethanol and 15 unleaded gasoline A Ethanol fuel E85 and its fumes are highly flammable poisonous and burn easily Etha nol fuel can cause serious injuries if ignited or if you come into contact with it or inhale fumes of it Avoid inhalation of ethanol fumes and skin contact with ethanol Extin guish all open flames before fueling Never smoke or create sparks close to ethanol Warning
91. into and exit from the vehicle The easy entry exit feature can be activated or deactivated in the Convenience submenu of the control system gt page 154 Warning A You must make sure no one can become trapped or injured by the moving steering wheel and driver s seat when the easy entry exit feature is activated To cancel seat steering wheel movement do one of the following e Press seat adjustment switch gt page 30 e Move steering column stalk gt page 40 e Press memory position switch gt page 114 Do not leave children unattended in the ve hicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Children could open the driver s door and unintentionally activate the easy entry exit feature which could result in an accident and or serious personal injury Controls in detail Seats When exiting the vehicle with the easy entry exit feature activated and depending on your selection the steering wheel tilts upwards and or the driver s seat moves a few inches to the rear when you e remove the SmartKey from the starter switch or e open the driver s door with the SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or 1 Controls in detail Seats i If the current position for the steering wheel is in the uppermost tilt position the steering wheel will no longer be able to move upward when the easy entry exit feature is activated If the current seat position falls into a factory set
92. is covering a distance of 44 feet approximately 14 m every second Observe all legal requirements Controls in detail Useful features You can take and place telephone calls using the and buttons on the steering wheel To carry out other tele phone functions use the control system gt page 158 See separate operating manual for instruc tions on how to use the telephone Tele Aid H The initial activation of the Tele Aid system may only be performed by completing the subscriber agreement and placing an acquaintance call using the button Failure to complete either of these steps will result in a system that is not activated If you have any questions regarding activation please call the Response Center at 1 800 756 9018 in the USA or 1 888 923 8367 in Canada The Tele Aid system Telematic Alarm Identification on Demand The Tele Aid system consists of three types of response e automatic and manual emergency e roadside assistance and e information The Tele Aid system is operational provid ing that the vehicle s battery is charged properly connected not damaged and cellular and GPS coverage is available The speaker volume of a Tele Aid call can be adjusted when using the volume control on the multifunction steering wheel To raise press button and to lower press button JBM The volume can also be adjusted using the volume knob on your audio system or COMAND head unit gt
93. messages of less immediate priority can be cleared from the multifunction display using the reset button gt page 125 or button a KA me or on the steering wheel They are then stored in the vehicle status message memory gt page 138 Remember that clearing a message will only make the message dis appear Clearing a message will not cor rect the condition that caused the message to appear Warning A All categories of messages contain impor tant information which should be taken note of and where a malfunction is indicated addressed as soon as possible at an autho rized Mercedes Benz Center Failure to repair condition noted may cause damage not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty or result in property damage or personal injury Warning A No messages will be displayed if either the instrument cluster or the multifunction display is inoperative Contact your nearest authorized Mercedes Benz Center i Switching on the ignition causes all instrument cluster lamps except low beam headlamp indicator lamp high beam headlamp indicator lamp and turn signal indicator lamps unless activated as well as the multifunction display to come on Make sure the lamps and multifunction display are in working order before starting your journey On the pages that follow you will find a compilation of the most important warning and malfunction messages that may appear in the multifunction display For
94. move gear selector lever to position N Try to keep the vehicle under control by corrective steering action i For information on driving with snow chains see Snow chains gt page 333 A On slippery road surfaces never downshift in order to obtain braking action This could result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control Your vehicle s ABS will not prevent this type of control loss Warning Road salts and chemicals can adversely affect braking efficiency Increased pedal force may become necessary to produce the normal braking effect Depressing the brake pedal periodically when traveling at length on salt strewn roads can bring road salt impaired braking efficiency back to normal If the vehicle is parked after being driven on salt treated roads the braking efficiency should be tested as soon as possible after driving is resumed A Make sure not to endanger any other road users when carrying out these braking maneuvers Warning Operation Driving instructions Standing water Passenger compartment Warning A If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow make sure snow is kept clear of the exhaust pipe and from around the vehicle with the engine running Otherwise deadly carbon monox ide CO gases may enter vehicle interior re sulting in unconsciousness and death To assure sufficient fresh air ventilation open a window slightly on the side of the vehicle not facing the
95. passenger should always use the EA indicator lamp as an indication of whether or not the front passenger is properly positioned Warning A If the EA indicator lamp illuminates when an adult or someone larger than a small individual is in the front passenger seat have the front passenger re position himself or herself in the seat until the J indicator lamp goes out More information about air bag display messages gt page 354 In the event of a collision the air bag control unit will not allow front passenger front air bag deployment when the OCS classified the front passenger seat occupant as being up to or less than the weight of a typical 12 month old child in a standard child restraint or if the front passenger seat is sensed as being empty When the OCS senses that the front passen ger seat occupant is classified as being up to or less than the weight of a typical 12 month old child in a standard child restraint the illuminate when the engine is started and remain illuminated indicating that the front passenger front air bag is deactivated When the OCS senses that the front passen ger seat is classified as being empty the indicator lamp will illuminate when the engine is started and remain illuminated indicating that the front passenger front air bag is deactivated When the OCS senses that the front passen ger seat occupant is classified as being heavier than the weight of a typical 12 mo
96. physically damage the vehicle s to have the flat tire repaired or 7 brakes replaced as appropriate e Do not exceed a vehicle speed of 50 mph 80 km h e Do not operate vehicle with more than one Minispare wheel mounted pee Warning A C Wheel bolt for light alloy rims Wheel bolt for Minispare wheel or other Make sure to use the original length wheel steel rims located in vehicle tool kit bolts when remounting the original wheel after it has been repaired For more information see Rims and Tires gt page 423 Practical hints Unlocking locking in an emergency Unlocking the vehicle Unlocking the driver s door If you are unable to unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey open the driver s door using the mechanical key and the tailgate using the emergency release Removing the mechanical key Unlocking gt Insert the mechanical key into the fi driver s door lock until it stops 4 gt Turn the mechanical key counterclock wise to position Q P80 35 2111 31 7 The driver s door is unlocked Mechanical key locking tab Mechanical key i gt Move locking tab Q in direction of Unlocking the driver s door with the arrow mechanical key will trigger the anti theft alarm system gt Slide mechanical key out of the 4 housing To cancel the alarm do one of the following e Press button or on the SmartKey e Insert the SmartKey in the starter
97. position range and the system recognizes the current seat position to be rearward enough for easy entry and exit the driver s seat will not move to the rear when the easy entry exit feature is activated When entering the vehicle with the easy entry exit feature activated the steering wheel or depending on your selection the steering wheel and driver s seat will return to their last set position or a factory set maximum forward position when you e close the driver s door with the ignition switched on e insert the SmartKey into the starter switch with the driver s door closed i For safety reasons the driver s seat will not return to its last set position with the easy entry exit feature activated if the system recognizes the last set posi tion as an extreme forward position Instead the driver s seat will remain at or move to a factory set maximum forward position To again fully return the driver s seat to your last set posi tion or to memory position adjust the seat to the desired position or press and hold the respective memory position switch gt page 114 Removing and installing front seat head restraints For information on head restraint adjustment see Seats gt page 35 i Adjust the head restraint in such a way that it is as close to the head as possible Warning A For your protection drive only with properly positioned head restraints Adjust head restra
98. proper tire inflation Warning A Never exceed the max tire inflation pressure Follow recommended tire inflation pressures r aa P40 10 3137 31 Do not underinflate tires Underinflated tires wear excessively and or unevenly adverse Maximum permissible tire inflation ly affect handling and fuel economy and are pressure more likely to fail from being overheated i Do not overinflate tires Overinflated tires can adversely affect handling and ride com fort wear unevenly increase stopping dis tance and result in sudden deflation blowout because they are more likely to become punctured or damaged by road de bris potholes etc For illustration purposes only Actual data on tires is specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in above illustration This is the maximum permissible tire inflation pressure for the tire Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards U S vehicles Tire manufacturers are required to grade tires based on three performance factors treadwear traction and temperature resistance aoo Treadwear Traction Temperature resistance For illustration purposes only Actual data on tires is specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in above illustration Quality grades can be found where appli cable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width For example Treadwear Traction Temperature 200 AA A All
99. re undercoated Your vehicle has been treated at the facto ry with a wax base rustproofing in the body cavities which will last for the lifetime of the vehicle Post production treatment is neither necessary nor recommended by Mercedes Benz because of the possibility of incompatibility between materials used in the production process and others applied later Operation Vehicle care We have selected car care products and compiled recommendations which are specially matched to our vehicles and which always reflect the latest technology You can obtain Mercedes Benz approved car care products at an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Scratches corrosive deposits corrosion or damage due to negligent or incorrect care cannot always be removed or repaired with the car care products recommended here In such cases it is best to seek aid at an authorized Mercedes Benz Center The following topics deal with the cleaning and care of your vehicle and give important how to information as well as references to Mercedes Benz approved car care products Power washer When using a power washer for cleaning the vehicle always observe the manu facturer s operating instructions Never use a round nozzle to power wash tires The intense jet of water can result in damage to the tire Always replace a damaged tire Always keep the jet of water moving across the surface Do not aim directly at electrical parts electrical
100. reads the phone book which is stored in the telephone This may take up to 30 seconds The message Please wait appears in the multifunction display When the message Please wait disappears the phone book has been loaded gt Press button EAN or Keg repeatedly until the desired name appears in the multifunction display The stored names are displayed in ascending or descending alphabetical order TEL lt gt Miller Q KA P54 32 2395 31 Name from the phone book i If you press and hold EAN or RA for longer than one second the system scrolls rapidly through the list of names until you release the button again Cancel the quick search mode by pressing button AN Press button K The system dials the selected phone number e If the connection is successful the name of the party you called and the duration of the call will appear in the multifunction display TEL 00 02 54 Hiller P54 32 2396 31 If no connection is made the control system stores the dialed number in the redial memory Controls in detail Control system Redialing The control system stores the most recently dialed phone numbers This eliminates the need to search through your entire phone book gt Press button or repeatedly until the message TEL appears in the multifunction display Press button gal The first number in the redial memory appears in the multifunction display gt
101. right brake lamp is malfunctioning Replace the bulb as soon as possible Display malfunction The display for the lamps or the systemis Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Visit workshop malfunctioning Center as soon as possible Front foglamp left The left front fog lamp is malfunctioning Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Front foglamp right The right front fog lamp is malfunctioning Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Front left The left front side marker lamp is gt Replace the bulb as soon as possible side marker lamp malfunctioning Front right The right front side marker lamp is gt Replace the bulb as soon as possible side marker lamp malfunctioning Practical hints What to do if Display symbol Display message High beam left igh beam right left right Light sensor Drive to workshop Low beam left License plate lamp License plate lamp Possible cause The left high beam lamp is malfunctioning The right high beam lamp is malfunctioning The left license plate lamp is malfunctioning The right license plate lamp is malfunctioning The lamp sensor is malfunctioning The headlamps switch on automatically The left low beam lamp is malfunctioning Possible solution gt Replace the bulb as soon as possible gt Replace the bulb as soon as possible gt Replace the bulb as soon as possible gt
102. road is clear of other traffic Warm up the engine smoothly Do not place full load on the engine until the operating temperature has been reached When starting off on a slippery surface do not allow a drive wheel to spin for an extended period with the ESP switched off Doing so may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Simultaneously depressing the accelerator pedal and applying the brake reduces engine performance and causes premature brake and drivetrain wear Parking Set the parking brake whenever park ing or leaving the vehicle In addition move gear selector lever to position P When parking on hills always turn front wheels towards the road curb Operation Driving instructions A Do not park this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as grass hay or leaves can come into contact with the hot exhaust system as these materials could be ignited and cause a vehicle fire Warning To reduce the risk of personal injury as a re sult of vehicle movement before turning off the engine and leaving the vehicle always e Keep right foot on brake pedal e Firmly depress parking brake pedal e Move the gear selector lever to position P e Slowly release brake pedal e When parked on an incline turn front wheels towards the road curb e Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 0 and remove the SmartKey from the
103. seat belts must be done before the vehicle is put into motion Seats The seats can be adjusted either manually or electrically depending on the vehicle s equipment Warning A Do not adjust the driver s seat while driving Adjusting the seat while driving could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat back in an excessively reclined position as this can be dangerous You could slide un der the seat belt in a collision If you slide under it the belt would apply force at the ab domen or neck That could cause serious or fatal injuries The seat back and seat belts provide the best restraint when the wearer is in a nearly upright position and belts are properly posi tioned on the body Your seat must be ad justed so that you can correctly fasten your seat belt gt page 43 Never place hands under the seat or near any moving parts while a seat is being ad justed Warning VAN When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Even with the SmartKey removed from the starter switch the power seats can be operated when the respective door is open Therefore do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsupervised use of vehicle equip ment may cause an accident and or serious personal injury Getting started Adjusting Warning A Ac
104. seats are equipped with emergency tensioning devices and belt force limiters The ETD is designed to activate in the following cases e in frontal or rear end impacts exceeding a preset severity level e if the restraint systems are operational and functioning correctly see Eg indicator lamp gt page 60 The ETDs for the front seats will only activate if the front seat belts are fastened latch plate properly inserted into buckle The ETDs for the rear outer seats will activate with or without the respective seat belts fastened Safety and Security Occupant safety In an impact emergency tensioning devices remove slack from the belts Belt force limiters reduce the force exerted by the seat belts on occupants during a crash A An emergency tensioning device ETD that was activated must be replaced Warning When disposing of the emergency tension ing device our safety instructions must be followed These are available at your authorized Mercedes Benz Center Children in the vehicle If an infant or child is traveling with you in the vehicle e Secure the child using an infant or child restraint appropriate to the age and size of the child e Make sure that the infant or child is properly secured at all times while the vehicle is in motion Infant and child restraint seats and information on choosing an appropriate restraint system can be obtained from any Mercedes Benz Center Infant a
105. set to P Do not depress accelerator gt Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 3 and hold until the engine starts gt page 33 i You can also use the touch start function Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 3 and release it again immediately The engine then starts automatically gt Depress the brake pedal The gear selector lever lock is released For information on turning off the engine see Turning off engine gt page 57 Starting difficulties If the engine does not start as described carry out the following steps gt Turn the SmartKey in the starter to position O and repeat starting procedure gt page 46 gt Remember that extended starting at tempts can drain the battery gt Geta jump start gt page 406 If the engine does not start after several starting attempts there could be a mal function in the engine electronics or in the fuel supply system gt Notify an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Getting started Parking brake ie Q Release handle Parking brake AN When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Children could release the parking brake which could result in an accident and or serious injury Warning Getting started Drivin
106. small incre ments preferably starting at 72 F 22 C i When operating the automatic climate control system in automatic mode you will only rarely need to adjust the temperature air volume and air distribution Controls in detail Automatic climate control Adjusting air distribution Adjusting manually ir distribution control r Use the button RA for automatic mode gt Turn air distribution control 0 ms AD oe or air distribution controls T and gt page 187 to the desired symbol S Sate sb S ae gt page 187 to separately adjust the air The indicator lamp on the button Egy pa3 40 2679 31 distribution on each side of the passenger goes out Display compartment The Tollawing symbols are The automatic air distribution is found on the controls switched off The air distribution is Temperature left j P controlled according to the selected Blower speed Symbol Function Temperature right control setting P oo Directs air to the windshield and the side defroster vents Adjusting automatically Increasing Directs air into the entire gt Push temperature control gt Press button BGR gt page 187 vehicle interior and or gt page 187 The indicator lamp on the button Directs air to the footwells comes on The automatic climate control system 7 will correspondingly adjust the interior eee through the center air temperature side and rear passenger c
107. the With a disconnected battery b Turoa electrical consumers instructions of the battery charger e you will no longer be able to turn the N a io ieh manufacturer emove SmartKey from starter switch SmartKey in the starter switch Reinstall the charged battery Follow e the gear selector lever will remain gt Open the hood gt page 296 the previously described steps in locked in position P gt Remove the filter box gt page 403 reverse order gt Disconnect the battery negative lead f from negative terminal Warning AN gt bei cover from the positive Never charge a battery while still installed in terminal the vehicle Gases may escape during charg gt Disconnect the battery positive lead ing and cause explosions that may result in paint damage corrosion or personal injury Removing the battery gt Remove the screw nuts securing the battery Negative terminal Positive terminal cover gt Remove the battery bracket gt Take out the battery Reconnecting the battery gt Turn off all electrical consumers vv v Remove SmartKey from starter switch Connect the battery positive lead and fasten its cover Connect the battery negative lead NEVER invert the terminal connections Reinstall the filter box gt page 403 The battery its filler caps and the vent tube must always be securely installed when the vehicle is in operation i The following procedures must be
108. then no longer brake or accelerate Fastening the seat belt Warning A Always fasten your seat belt before driving off Always make sure your passengers are properly restrained even those sitting in the rear and pregnant women Failure to wear and properly fasten and po sition your seat belt greatly increases your risk of injuries and their likely severity in an accident You and your passengers should always wear seat belts If you are ever in an accident your injuries can be considerably more severe without your seat belt properly buckled Without your seat belt buckled you are much more likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be ejected from it You can be seriously injured or killed In the same crash the possibility of injury or death is lessened if you are wearing your seat belt The air bags can only provide the protection they were designed to afford if the occupants are using their seat belts gt page 66 Getting started Driving Warning A According to accident statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seat ing position Thus we strongly recommend that children be placed in the rear seats Regardless of seating position children 12 years old and under must be seated and properly secured in an appropriate infant or toddler restraint or booster seat recom mended for the size and weight of the child For additional informat
109. tires of the same dimension all around tires can be rotated observing a a front to rear rotation pattern that will maintain the intended rotation spinning direction of the tire gt page 307 In some cases such as when your vehicle is equipped with mixed size tires different tire dimension front vs rear tire rotation is not possible If applicable to your vehicle s tire configu ration tires can be rotated according to the tire manufacturer s recommended in tervals in the tire manufacturers warranty pamphlet located in your vehicle literature portfolio If none is available tires should be rotated every 3000 to 6000 miles 5000 to 10000 km or sooner if neces sary according to the degree of tire wear The same rotation spinning direction must be maintained gt page 307 Rotate tires before the characteristic tire wear pattern becomes visible shoulder wear on front tires and tread center wear on rear tires Thoroughly clean the mounting face of wheels and brake disks i e the inner side of the wheels tires during each rotation Check for and ensure proper tire inflation pressure Operation Tires and wheels Warning A Have the tightening torque checked after changing a wheel Wheels could become loose if not tightened with a torque of 80 lb ft 110 Nm Only use genuine Mercedes Benz wheel bolts specified for your vehicle s rims For information on wheel change see the Practical hi
110. to brake and steer the the engine and leaving the vehicle always fe jae vehicle e Keep right foot on brake pedal Release handle e Firmly depress parking brake pedal Parking brake e Move the gear selector lever to gt Step firmly on parking brake pedal osition P od P When the engine is running the e Slowly release brake pedal warning lamp USA only e When parked on an incline turn front or Canada only in the wheels towards the road curb instrument cluster will be illuminated e Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 0 and remove the SmartKey from the starter switch e Take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle when leaving Getting started Parking and locking Warning A When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Children could release the parking brake and or move the gear selector lever from position P either of which could result in an accident and or serious injury Warning A Getting out of your vehicle with the gear se lector lever not fully engaged in position P is dangerous Also when parked on an incline position P alone may not prevent your vehi cle from moving possibly hitting people or objects Always set the parking brake in addition to shifting to position P When parked on an incline turn front
111. to their previous position The air recirculation mode is deactivated automatically e after five minutes if the outside temperature is below approximately 41 F 5 C e after five minutes if the air conditioning is turned off e after 30 minutes if the outside temperature is above approximately 41 F 5 C At outside temperatures above 79 F 26 C the system will not automatically switch back to outside air A quantity of outside air is added after approximately 30 minutes Charcoal filter An activated charcoal filter markedly reduces bad odors and removes pollutants from air entering the passenger compart ment The charcoal filter can be activated or deactivated The system switches automatically to the air recirculation mode if the e carbon monoxide CO or e nitrogen oxide NOx concentration of the outside air increases beyond a predetermined level i The automatic air recirculation mode does not function if the ACOFF mode is activated indicator lamp on button illuminated or A C mode is deactivated indicator lamp on button not lit or if the outside temperature has fallen below 41 F 5 C Activating gt Press button gt page 187 The indicator lamp on the button comes on If you keep button EE pressed the side windows and tilt sliding sunroof will close i The activated charcoal filter should be switched off when windows fog up on the inside or if the passeng
112. volume control are The indicator lamp on the button goes set to RNg gt page 187 and there is a out Defrosting is turned off high need for cooling the display MAXCOOL appears These settings should only be selected for a short time Activating The previous settings are once again in effect This provides the fastest possible cooling gt Press button KRA or of the vehicle interior when side windows gt page 187 and tilt sliding sunroof are closed The indicator lamp on the button comes on The air conditioning switches automatically to the following functions e maximum blowing and heating power e air flows onto the windshield and the front side windows e the air recirculation mode is switched off Controls in detail Automatic climate control Air recirculation mode ap ah Switch ta airm cinclation mode ioprevent If you keep button EE pressed the The air rep renlatian mode is activated P side windows and tilt sliding sunroof automatically unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle willeipse from the outside This setting cuts off the e at high outside temperatures intake of outside air and recirculates the if the concentration of carbon toi air in the passenger compartment Warnine A oxide and nitrogen oxide in the outside air increases for example Warning A Never operate the side windows and the in a tunnel charcoal filter must be _ eC tilt sliding sunroof if there
113. wheels towards the road curb Switching off headlamps gt Turn the exterior lamp switch to BR gt page 49 For more information on headlamps see Lighting gt page 116 Turning off engine gt Place the gear selector lever in position P i Always set the parking brake in addition to shifting to position P On slopes turn the front wheels towards the road curb Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 0 and remove the SmartKey from the starter switch The immobilizer is activated i The SmartKey can only be removed from the starter switch with the gear selector lever in position P gt Press the seat belt release button gt page 44 Allow the retractor to completely rewind the seat belt by guiding the latch plate i With the SmartKey removed and the driver s door open a warning sounds if the vehicle s exterior lamps are not switched off Warning VAN To prevent possible personal injury always keep hands and fingers away from the door openings when closing the doors Be espe cially careful when small children are around Before closing doors make sure there is no possibility of someone getting caught in a door during closing Getting started Parking and locking After exiting the vehicle press the lock button on the SmartKey gt page 32 All turn signal lamps flash three times The locking knobs in the doors move down The a
114. will only be provided to law enforcement i When the anti theft alarm or the tow away alarm stays on for more than 30 seconds a call is initiated automat ically to the Response Center See anti theft alarm system gt page 91 and tow away alarm gt page 93 273 Controls in detail Useful features Garage door opener Warning A Before programming the integrated remote control to a garage door opener or gate operator make sure people and objects are out of the way of the device to prevent po tential harm or damage When programming a garage door opener the door moves up or P68 00 3350 31 down When programming a gate operator Remote control integrated into the interior the gate opens or closes rear view mirror The built in remote control is capable of operating up to three separately controlled devices for example garage door openers gate openers or other devices compatible with HomeLink or some other systems You can program the signal transmitter buttons lt Do not use the integrated remote control O Indicator lamp with any garage door opener that lacks Signal transmitter button safety stop and reverse features as required Hand held transmitterbutton 5 U S federal safety standards this includes any garage door opener model Hand held remote control manufactured before April 1 1982 transmitter not part of the A garage door that cannot detect an object vehicle equi
115. your convenience the messages are divided into two sections e Text messages gt page 354 e Symbol messages gt page 362 Practical hints What to do if Practical hints What to do if Text messages Display message Front pass airbag activated See Operator s Manual Possible cause Possible solution Air bag is activated while driving even Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as though a child small individual or possible and check the following object below the system s weight threshold is on the front passenger seat or the front passenger seat is empty Objects on the seat or forces acting on the seat may make the gt Make sure that no objects applying supple system sense supplemental weight mental weight onto the seat are present The system may recognize such supplemental weight and sense that an occupant on the front passenger seat is of a heavier weight than actually present gt Make sure that there is nothing between seat cushion and child seat and check installation of the child seat Continued on next page Display message Front pass airbag activated See Operator s Manual Warning A If the message Front pass airbag activated See Operator s Manual remains on in the multifunction display and or the EA E indicator lamp Possible cause Practical hints What to do if Possible solution If performing any of the above corrective steps is successf
116. 02 Telephone operation 224 Auto dimming for rear view mirror Automatic central locking Activating deactivating 199 202 200 207 172 control system 153 Automatic climate control 186 Activating 187 Adjusting air distribution 190 Air recirculation mode 193 Deactivating 187 Defrosting 192 Setting the temperature 189 Automatic headlamp mode 117 Automatic lighting control Activating 123 Deactivating 123 Automatic locking when driving Automatic shift program Automatic transmission Automatic time change summer winter 147 Automatic transmission 162 Accelerator position 169 Automatic shift program Emergency operation Limp Home Mode Fluid level 300 Gear ranges 165 Gear selector lever 46 162 Gear selector lever position Gear shifting malfunctions Kickdown 169 Manual shifting 164 One touch gearshifting 164 Program mode selector switch automatic shift program 168 Starting with 47 Transmission fluid 300 Automatic Transmission Fluid see ATF 102 168 168 170 162 166 170 B Backrest Folding forward 254 Folding rearward 255 Backrest contour Adjusting 111 Backrest side bolsters Adjusting 111 Backrest tilt Manual seat 36 Power seat 38 Backup lamps Messages in display 371 Replacing bulbs 389 Bar 327 BAS 86 439 Messages in display 359 Batteries SmartKey Changing 387 Check lamp 99 Checking 99 448 Battery discharged Jump starting 406 Battery vehicle 302 403 Charging 404
117. 1 Interior rear view mirror antiglare position SI P68 40 2062 31 Lever gt Tilt the mirror to the antiglare night position by moving lever Q towards the windshield The interior rear view mirror is dimmed 171 Controls in detail Good visibility Auto dimming rear view mirrors The reflection brightness of the exterior rear view mirror on the driver s side and the interior rear view mirror will respond automatically to glare when e the ignition is switched on and e incoming light from headlamps falls on the sensor in the interior rear view mirror The rear view mirror will not react if e reverse gear R is engaged e the interior lighting is turned on 172 Warning A The auto dimming function does not react if incoming light is not aimed directly at sensors in the interior rear view mirror The interior rear view mirror and the exterior rear view mirror on the driver s side do not react for example when transporting cargo which covers the rear window Glare can endanger you and others Warning A In the case of an accident liquid electrolyte may escape from the mirror housing if the mirror glass breaks Electrolyte has an irritating effect Do not allow the liquid to come into contact with eyes skin clothing or respiratory system In case it does immediately flush affected area with water and seek medical help if necessary Electrolyte drops coming into contact wi
118. 123 Maximum tire inflation pressure 328 Miles kilometers in speedometer Locking the vehicle 383 MB Tex upholstery Setting 143 Tilt sliding sunroof 385 Cleaning 342 Minispare wheel 380 425 Unlocking the driver s door 382 Mechanical key 382 Bolts 381 Unlocking the tailgate 382 Memory function 113 441 Mounting 398 Unlocking transmission Recalling positions from Mirrors gear selector lever 384 memory 114 Activating exterior rear view Manual seat Storing exterior rear view mirror mirror parking position 173 Adjusting 36 parking position 115 Adjusting 41 Adjusting backrest tilt 36 Storing key dependent settings 114 Auto dimming for Adjusting head restraint height 37 Menus 130 interior mirror 172 Adjusting head restraint tilt 37 AUDIO 135 Auto dimming for Adjusting seat cushion tilt 36 In control system 132 133 rear view mirror 172 Adjusting seat height 36 NAV 138 Exterior rear view mirror 41 Front seat head restraints 107 Settings menu 140 Exterior rear view mirror Seat fore and aft adjustment 36 Standard display 134 parking position 156 MAXCOOL maximum cooling 192 Submenus 131 Interior rear view mirror 41 TEL 158 Storing exterior rear view mirror Trip computer 156 parking position 115 Vehicle status message memory 138 MON 294 442 Motor Octane Number see MON Mph or km h in speedometer 143 Multicontour seats 111 Multifunction display 129 442 Displaying gear range 165 Selecting language 144 Setting date day 148 Setting date month
119. 40 Fuel 294 Additives 433 Cruising range 434 E85 ethanol fuel 434 Fuel reserve warning lamp 349 Gasoline additives 433 Premium unleaded gasoline 294 430 432 Requirements 432 433 Switching Flexible fuel vehicle 434 Technical data 429 430 Fuel additives 433 Fuels coolants lubricants etc G Fuel cap Capacities 429 Garage door opener 274 Message in display 347 370 Functions control system 130 133 Gasoline additives 433 Fuel consumption statistics Resetting 141 Gasoline see Fuel After start 157 Fuse box GAWR 328 Since last reset 157 In cargo compartment 415 Gear range 441 Fuel filler flap 293 In engine compartment 414 Automatic transmission 165 Locking 293 Fuse chart 413 Limiting 165 Opening in an emergency 384 Fuse extractor 413 Shifting into optimal 164 Unlocking 293 Fuses 412 Gear range limit Fuel gauge 25 Aids for changing fuses 413 Canceling 164 Fuel requirements 432 Fuse box in cargo compartment 415 Gear selector lever 46 162 For ethanol fuel 433 Fuse box in engine compartment 414 Cleaning 341 Fuel reserve Fuse chart 413 Lock 46 Warning lamp 25 Fuse extractor 413 Position automatic Fuel tank Main fuse box in passenger transmission 129 162 166 Capacity 430 compartment 413 Filler flap 293 Spare fuses 413 Global Locking 98 Unlocking 98 Global Positioning System see GPS Glove box 258 Closing 258 Locking 258 Opening 258 Unlocking 258 Good visibility 171 GPS 441 Gross Axle Weight Rating see GAWR Gross
120. 404 Display Messages in display 367 Display elements Air conditioning cooling 184 196 Deep water see Standing water Audio system 200 Air recirculation mode 183 194 Defogging Displays Alarm 92 Windshield 180 191 Digital speedometer 135 Anti theft alarm system 92 Defrosting 181 192 Maintenance service indicator 334 Automatic climate control 187 Central locking control system 153 Charcoal filter 195 Climate control 177 Delayed shut off Exterior lamps 151 Interior lighting 153 Department of Transportation see DOT Outside temperature 135 Selecting display for status indicator 144 Showing vehicle status Climate control system 179 Dialing messages 139 Cruise control 248 A number telephone 160 Symbol messages 362 Defrost 192 Difficulties Text messages 354 Defrosting 181 Engine with the SmartKey 57 ESP 88 While driving see Problems while driving With starting 47 Vehicle status messages 352 Distance to empty range Calling up 158 Door control panel 30 Door entry lamps 124 Door handle 100 Door unlock With Tele Aid 273 Doors Message in display 367 Opening from inside vehicle 100 Opening from the outside 98 DOT 328 Downhill driving Cruise control 248 Downshifting 164 Drink holder see Cup holders Drinking and driving 283 Driving Driving abroad 290 General instructions 43 283 Hydroplaning 286 In winter 288 Problems 54 Safety systems 85 Through standing water 289 Driving abroad 290 Driving instr
121. 420 Vehicle Identification Number 420 Ignition 33 Immobilizer 91 Activating 91 Deactivating 91 Indicator lamps see Lamps indicator and warning Infant and child restraint systems 70 Installing 79 LATCH type child seat anchors 80 Information About service and warranty 10 Inside door handle 100 Installing Infant and child restraint systems 79 Parcel net in cargo compartment 251 Towing eye bolt 411 Twin reel roller blind 253 Wiper blades 397 Instrument cluster 24 125 441 Cleaning 340 Coolant temperature gauge 126 Illumination 125 Lampsin 344 349 Multifunction display 129 Outside temperature indicator 127 Selecting language 144 Instrument lighting 125 Instruments and controls see Cockpit Interior lighting 123 J Activating automatic control 123 Jack 377 378 Deactivating automatic control 123 Jump starting 406 Delayed shut off 153 Manual operation 123 Interior rear view mirror Adjusting 41 Antiglare 171 Interior storage spaces 258 Armrest 259 Cup holder in rear seat armrest 261 Cup holders in front of seat armrest 260 Glove box 258 Parcel net in front passenger footwell 262 Intermittent wiping Rear window wiper 53 Windshield wipers 52 K Key dependency memory Settings 155 Key positions in starter switch 33 Key mechanical 382 Key SmartKey Battery check lamp 98 Checking the batteries 99 Factory setting 98 Global locking 98 Global unlocking 98 Loss of 100 Messages in display 370 Positions in starter switch 33 Rem
122. 50 2217 31 Rail Mounting lug Removal of parcel net gt Slide rails Q upward and remove Installation of parcel net gt Place mounting lugs in opening gt Slide rails down as far as they can go Storage compartment under cargo compartment floor To open cargo compartment floor gt Press handle Q on the recess gt Lift compartment cover a The compartment can be used to store small light or flat objects Controls in detail Loading To close cargo compartment floor gt Lower the cover and lock by applying light pressure to handle Q Warning VAN If items are stored in the compartment make sure compartment is securely closed In an accident during hard braking or sud den maneuvers they could be thrown around inside the vehicle and cause injury to vehicle occupants Controls in detail Loading Retractable luggage cover and partition net The twin reel roller blind comprises a lug gage cover and a partition net It is mount ed on the backrest of the rear seat and can also be used with backrest folded down Partition net Warning A To help avoid personal injury during a colli sion or sudden maneuver always use parti tion net when transporting cargo Partition net with rear seats folded up Tab Eyelets on roof gt Pull out upper blind partition net by tab gt Engage it into eyelets on the roof Partition net with rear seats fold
123. 8 Example Combined Numberof Seating weight limit occupants configura of occu driver and tion pants and passengers cargo from placard 1 1500 Ibs 5 front 2 rear 3 2 1500 Ibs 3 front 1 rear 2 3 1500 Ibs 1 front 1 The higher the weight of all occupants the less cargo and luggage load capacity is available For more information see Trailer tongue load gt page 312 Occupants weight Occupant 1 Occupant 2 Occupant 3 Occupant 4 Occupant 5 Occupant 1 Occupant 2 Occupant 3 Occupant 1 150 Ibs 180 Ibs 160 Ibs 140 Ibs 120 Ibs 200 Ibs 190 Ibs 150 Ibs 150 Ibs Combined weight of all occupants 750 Ibs 540 Ibs 150 Ibs Operation Tires and wheels Available cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight total load limit or vehicle capacity weight from plac ard minus combined weight of all occupants 1500 Ibs 750 Ibs 750 Ibs 1500 Ibs 540 Ibs 960 Ibs 1500 Ibs 150 Ibs 1350 Ibs Operation Tires and wheels Certification label Even after careful determination of the combined weight of all occupants cargo and the trailer tongue load if applicable gt page 312 as to not exceed the permis sible load limit you must make sure that your vehicle never exceeds the Gross Vehi cle Weight Rating GVWR and the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR for either the front or rear axle You can obtain the GVWR and GAWR from the Certification label The Certifi
124. Because the vehicle s electronic components are interconnected any modifications made may produce an undesired effect on other systems Electronic malfunctions could seriously impair the operating safety of your vehicle See an authorized Mercedes Benz Center for repairs or modifications to electronic components Other improper work or modifications on the vehicle could also have a negative impact on the operating safety of the vehicle Some safety systems only function while the engine is running You should therefore never turn off the engine while driving Warning A Heavy blows against the vehicle underbody or tires wheels for example when running over an obstacle road debris or a pothole may cause serious damage and impair the operating safety of your vehicle If you feel a sudden significant vibration or ride distur bance or you suspect that damage to your vehicle has occurred you should turn on your hazard warning flashers carefully slow down and drive with caution to an area which is a safe distance from the road Inspect the vehicle underbody and tires wheels for possible damage If the vehicle appears unsafe have it towed to the nearest authorized Mercedes Benz Center or other qualified maintenance or repair facility for further inspection or repairs Proper use of the vehicle Proper use of the vehicle requires that you are familiar with the following information and rules e the safety precautions
125. Beg repeatedly until the message Automatic door 1k appears in the multifunction display Controls in detail Control system gt gt The selection marker is on the current setting Automatic door Ik On Off P54 32 2379 31 gt Press button or E to switch the automatic central locking On or Off Convenience submenu Access the Convenience submenu via the Settings menu Use the Convenience submenu to change the settings for a number of convenience features The following functions are available Function Page Activating 154 easy entry exit feature Setting key dependency 155 Setting parking position for 156 exterior rear view mirror Activating easy entry exit feature Use this function to activate and deactivate the easy entry exit feature gt page 105 Warning A You must make sure no one can become trapped or injured by the moving steering wheel and driver s seat when the easy entry exit feature is activated To cancel seat steering wheel movement do one of the following e Press seat adjustment switch gt page 30 e Move steering column stalk gt page 40 e Press memory position switch gt page 114 Do not leave children unattended in the ve hicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Children could open the driver s door and unintentionally activate the easy entry exit feature which could result in an accident and or serious persona
126. D will resume playback at the point where it was switched off CD changer gt Press button CD and the selected magazine slot number appear in the upper left hand corner of the display If you have not removed a CD since the last time the CD audio source was activated the last CD listened to will begin to play at the point where it was switched off After the last track on a CD has finished the next CD is automatically played Controls in detail Audio system Playing tracks Selecting CDs in the audio unit with CD changer If there is no CD in the selected magazine slot NO CD appears in the display with the corresponding slot number You have the following options e Audio system with CD changer selecting CDs CDi e Direct track entry TRACK e Track skip forward reverse Direct track entry RDM RPT e Fast forward reverse E e Scan gt You can select from among the e Random tracks inserted CDs with buttons EE to EN e Repeat track E CD player in the audio unit EE to IEAM CDs inthe P82 60 4456 31 CD changer You can make a direct selection from The magazine slot number of the among the tracks on a CD selected CD appears next to Din the Press IEJ button display and the number of the gt Enter track number usin ttons i currently played track appears next ber using buttons HEEE to TRACK to BEN ee Controls in detail Audio system gt gt The number of the track
127. Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head restraints Head restraints are intended to help reduce injuries during an accident The head restraints will fold backward Make sure the head restraints engage when placing them upright Otherwise their protective function cannot be assured Controls in detail Seats Head restraint tilt rear outer seats Two different head restraint angle positions are available gt Press the release button gt page 109 and tilt the head restraint to the desired position Removing and installing rear seat head restraints rear outer seats i Adjust the head restraint in such a way that it is as close to the head as possible i The rear center seat head restraint cannot be removed Warning A For your protection drive only with properly positioned head restraints Adjust head restraint so that the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at eye level This will reduce the poten tial for injury to the head and neck in the event of an accident or similar situation Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head restraints Head restraints are intend ed to help reduce injuries during an acci dent Do not interchange head restraints from front and rear seat o__ a Release button Removing rear seat head restraints gt Fold back head restraint gt page 109 gt Pull head restraint to its highest position gt Pus
128. It also contains information on the proper size and recommended tire inflation pres sures for the original equipment tires on your vehicle Operation Tires and wheels The Certification label also found on the driver s door B pillar tells you about the gross weight capacity of your vehi cle called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle all occupants fuel and cargo The Certification label also tells you about the front and rear axle weight capacity called the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the total allowable weight that can be carried by a single axle front or rear Never exceed the GVWR or GAWR for either the front axle or rear axle Operation Tires and wheels Driver s door B pillar Following is a discussion on how to work with the information contained on the two placards with regards to loading your vehicle Tire and Loading Information Warning Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit or vehicle capacity weight as indicated on the placard on the driver s door B pillar Overloading the tires can overheat them possibly causing a blowout Overloading the tires can also result in handling or steering problems or brake failure Your vehicle is equipped with either the Tire and Loading Information placard Example A or the Vehicle Tire Information placard Example B Data shown on placard examples is f
129. Maintenance Booklet Separate operating instructions will be provided as required depending on the equipment options installed in your vehi cle Introduction Symbols Y Symbols The following symbols are found in this gt This symbol points to instructions for Operator s Manual Warning A you to follow Optional equipment is identified with an asterisk Since standard equipment varies between models the descriptions and illustrations in this manual may differ slightly from gt A number of these symbols appearing in succession indicates a multiple step procedure Warning notices draw your attention to haz ards that may endanger your health or life or the health or life of others gt Page This symbol tells you where to H look for further information on a the actual equipment of your vehi toni ick opic cle Highlights hazards that may result in damage to your vehicle bb This continuation symbol marks an interrupted procedure which ri will be continued on the next page Helpful hints or further information you may find useful gt In the glossary of technical terms this symbol is used to indicate cross references to term definitions Display Words appearing in the multi function display are printed in the type shown here Introduction Operating safety Warning A Work improperly carried out on electronic components and associated software could cause them to cease functioning
130. Mercedes Benz Your authorized Mercedes Benz Center will be glad to advise you on this subject e Use of snow chains may be prohibited depending on location Always check local and state laws before installing snow chains Even on vehicles with all wheel drive use snow chains on rear tires only Use of snow chains is not permissible with tire size e T 125 90 R16 98M Operation Maintenance We strongly recommend that you have Starting approximately one month before The type of maintenance service due is your vehicle serviced by an authorized your next maintenance service is due one indicated in the multifunction display Mercedes Benz Center in accordance with of the following messages will appear in Basi asic service A the Maintenance Booklet at the times the multifunction display while you are l called for by the maintenance service driving or when you switch on the ignition Extended service B indicator display example service A i Vehicles equipped with FSS Flexible Service System only Canada Failure to have the vehicle maintained in Service A in XX Days accordance with the Maintenance Booklet Service A in XX Miles Km and maintenance service indicator at the A Service due now vehicles The interval between designated times mileage will result in maintenance services depends on your vehicle damage not covered by the driving habits A gentle driving style Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty moderate engine
131. Press button EAN or ed repeatedly until the desired name appears in the multifunction display gt Press button Fags The control system dials the selected phone number Controls in detail Automatic transmission For more information on driving with an i automatic transmission see Automatic ao During the brief warm up transmission transmission gt page 46 upshifting is delayed This allows the Your vehicle s transmission adapts its gear catalytic converter to heat up more shifting process to your individual driving quickly to operating temperature style by continually adjusting the shift points up or down These shift point adjust ments are performed based on current operating and driving conditions If the operating conditions change the automatic transmission reacts by adjusting its shift program Gearshift pattern for automatic transmission The automatic transmission selects indi vidual gears automatically depending on e the gear selector lever position D gt page 166 with gear ranges 4 3 2 1 gt page 165 e the selected program mode C S gt page 168 e the position of the accelerator pedal gt page 169 e the vehicle speed Controls in detail Automatic transmission An additional indication of the current gear Hi selector lever position can be found on the a Allow engine to warm up under low cover of the shifting gate load use Do not place full load on the
132. Reset to factors settings Confirm by pressing reset button P54 32 2506 31 gt Press the reset button once more The functions of all the submenus will reset to factory settings i The settings you have changed will not be reset unless you confirm the action by pressing the reset button a second time After approximately five seconds the Settings menu reappears in the multifunction display For safety reasons the following functions are not reset while driving e the Hdlamp mode function in the Lighting submenu e the Key dependency function in the Convenience submenu Submenus in the Settings menu gt Press button RA or Ba The collection of the submenus appears in the multifunction display Settings D Time Date Lighting gt Press button EE The selection marker moves to the next submenu P54 32 2359 31 The submenus are arranged by hierarchy Scroll down with button JM scroll up with button JER Move within the submenus with button R or BaN to the individual functions The settings themselves are made with button or E Controls in detail Control system Resetting the functions of a submenu For each submenu you can reset all the functions to the factory settings gt Move to a function in the submenu gt Press the reset button gt page 125 in the instrument cluster for approxi mately three seconds The request to press the reset but
133. Right center air vent Adjusting air distribution gt Push the slide for the left center vent Q or right center vent to the left right up or down The air flow is directed in the corresponding direction i For draft free ventilation push slides and upward Adjusting air volume gt Turn thumbwheel 2 up or down The air volume is increased or decreased V Audio system Audio and telephone operation These instructions are intended to help you become familiar with your Mercedes Benz audio system They con tain useful tips and a detailed description of the user functions Warning A In order to avoid distraction which could lead to an accident the driver should enter system settings with the vehicle at a standstill and operate the system only when road and traffic conditions permit Always pay full attention to traffic conditions first before operating system controls while driving Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph approximately 50 km h your car is covering a distance of 44 feet approximately 14 m every second Operating safety Warning A Any alterations made to electronic components can cause malfunctions The radio amplifier CD changer satellite radio and telephone are interconnected When one of the components is not opera tional or has not been removed replaced properly the function of other components may be impaired This condition might seriousl
134. Technical data Fuels coolants lubricants etc Switching fuels For best performance and driveability it is recommended to use either one or the other fuel A refueling pattern that alternates between the two different fuels should be avoided if possible When switching fuels make sure e Fuel level is below half full e Fuel level is above reserve fuel reserve warning lamp is not lit e Amount of added fuel is more than 5 gallons 20 liters e Ignition is off during refill e Immediately after refueling engine is started and operated for at least five minutes These precautions and recommendations are supposed to prevent any difficulties when starting and operating the engine which otherwise may be experienced before the engine has fully adapted to the different fuel If in spite of these recommendations the engine does not perform properly adding more gasoline at least 3 gallons 12 liters to the fuel may improve the engine behavior Cold weather performance It is possible that starting times will signif icantly increase at temperatures below 32 F 0 C At low temperatures the use of a block heater Canada only is recommended see an authorized Mercedes Benz Center for further information Rough idling may also be experienced at such temperatures before the engine is fully warmed up E85 fuel is unsuitable for use when ambient temperatures fall below 14 F 10 C Hot weather perf
135. The seating capacity gives you important information on the number of occupants that can be in the vehicle Observe front and rear seating capacity Your vehicle is equipped with either placard Example A or placard Example B located on the driver s door B pillar gt page 308 Data shown on placard examples is for illustration purposes only Seating data is specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in the illustrations below Refer to placard on vehicle for actual data specific to your vehicle Operation Tires and wheels E TIRE AN AND LOA ING INFORMATION The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ibs ORIGINAL TIRE SIZE COLD TIRE INFLATION PRESSURE FE OWNER S PG TOR EE En COMPACT SPARE TIRE Teamo pimentas P40 00 2052 31 Placard Example A Seating capacity VEHICLE TIRE INFORMATION Placard Example B Seating capacity Operation Tires and wheels Steps for determining correct load limit The following steps have been developed as required of all manufacturers under Title 49 Code of U S Federal Regulations Part 575 pursuant to the National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966 Step 1 Vehicles equipped with placard Example A gt Locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ibs on your vehicle s placard Step 1 Vehicles equipped with placar
136. The sound settings for bass and treble FADER appears in the display A a E EE are returned to their center level and the volume is set to a predefined level Controls in detail Audio system Adjusting balance Returning volume distribution to gt Press RES soft key briefly the factory settings respective volume distribution is reset gt Press REJ button repeatedly until j z to its center flat level BALANCE appears in the display gt Press REJ button to call up settings menu in the display or gt Press and hold RES soft key until RESET appears in the display The volume distribution settings for fader and balance are set to their center level P82 60 4453 31 5 gt Press lt lt lt or gt gt gt softkey P82 60 4452 31 The radio switches back to the standard radio menu four seconds The volume is distributed between the after the last soft key is pressed left and right sides of the vehicle or Telephone muting gt Press RES soft key briefly If your vehicle equipment includes a Mercedes Benz specified mobile telephone you can adjust its volume The radio switches back to the separately from the volume of the audio standard radio menu eight seconds system while the telephone is being used after the last button is pressed The balance is reset to its center level Connecting an external audio source AUX to the radio An optional dealer installed cinch connec tor for connecting an external au
137. Warning ZN Raising ive wi gt Manually adjust the height of the head Removing front seat head restraints For safety reasons always drive with the i y adj ine 8 rear head restraints in the upright position restraint by pulling it upward gt Press switch upwards and hold until when the rear seats are occupied If the head restraint is fully retracted head restraint is fully extended Keep the area around head restraints clear push release button and pull the gt Pull out head restraint of articles e g clothing to not obstruct the head restraint out folding operation of the head restraints Lowering gt To lower the head restraint push release button and push down on the head restraint Controls in detail Seats aD Folding head restraints back Placing head restraints upright Adjust the head restraint in such away The rear seat head restraints can be folded A that it is as close to the head as backward for increased visibility possible Warning A For your protection drive only with properly positioned head restraints 1 16 2247 31 gt Pull the head restraint forward until it locks into position Adjust head restraint so that the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at eye level This will reduce the poten tial for injury to the head and neck in the Release button ae OE erie a event of an accident or similar situation gt Push release button Warning A
138. ag inflates with considerable speed and force a proper seating and hands on steering wheel position will help to keep you at a safe distance from the air bag Occupants who are unbelted out of position or too close to the air bag can be seriously injured by an air bag as it inflates with great force in the blink of an eye e Sit properly belted in a nearly upright position with your back against the seat backrest Adjust the driver seat as far as possible rearward still permitting proper opera tion of vehicle controls The distance from the center of the driver s breast bone to the center of the air bag cover on the steering wheel must be at least 10 in 25 cm or more You should be able to accomplish this by a combina tion of adjustments to the seat and steering wheel If you have any prob lems please see an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Do not lean your head or chest close to the steering wheel or dashboard Keep hands on the outside of steering wheel rim Placing hands and arms in side the rim can increase the risk and potential severity of hand arm injury when driver front air bag inflates Adjust the front passenger seat as far as possible rearward from the dashboard when the seat is occupied e Occupants especially children should never place their bodies or lean their heads in the area of the door where the side impact air bag inflates This could result in serious injuries or death should the air bag
139. air vent adjustable Thumbwheel for air volume control for left side air vent Thumbwheel for air volume control for left center air vent Left center air vent adjustable Right center air vent adjustable Thumbwheel for air volume control for right center air vent CC Sele elere Thumbwheel for air volume control for right side air vent Right side air vent adjustable Right side defroster vent fixed 00 Automatic climate control panel il For draft free ventilation move the sliders for the air vents and 9 to the middle position Depending on production date your vehicle is equipped with either automatic climate control panel design A or B 000000000 ry gal iminis 71s qs 16 15 gn 14 13 12 11 10 P in TS Sera OO 413 12 11 010 Automatic climate control panel design B a 0 0000000O 00000 Controls in detail Automatic climate control Item Left side air distribution control Defrosting Temperature control left raising Display Air volume control raising Temperature control right raising Rear window defroster Right side air distribution control Charcoal filter AC cooling on off ACOFF or A C Residual heat ventilation Temperature control right lowering Air volume control lowering Temperature control left lowering Air recirculation Automatic climate control on off complete system Air distribution and air volu
140. ant will result in a significantly once a year in hot southern regions you shortened service life should have the anticorrosion antifreeze concentration checked The coolant is also Your vehicle contains a number of aluminum parts The use of aluminum components in motor vehicle engines Therefore the following product is strongly necessitates that anticorrosion antifreeze recommended for use in your vehicle regularly checked each time you bring your coolant used in such engines be specifi Mercedes Benz 325 0 vehicle to an authorized Mercedes Benz cally formulated to protect the aluminum Anticorrosion Antifreeze Agent Center for service parts Anticorrosion antifreeze quantity Model Approx freeze protection 35 F 37 C 49 F 45 C C 240 all models 3 4 US qt 3 2 I 3 8 US qt 3 6 Windshield washer and headlamp cleaning system Both the windshield washer and headlamp cleaning system are supplied from the windshield washer fluid reservoir The washer fluid reservoir has a capacity of approx e 3 2 US qt 3 0 I in vehicles without headlamp cleaning system e 6 4 US qt 6 0 I in vehicles with headlamp cleaning system gt Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield Washer Concentrate and water or concentrate and commercially available premixed windshield washer solvent antifreeze depending on ambient temperatures A Washer solvent antifreeze is highly flamma ble Do not spill washer solvent
141. ap is not twisted Fold the rear backrest back until it locks in place gt page 255 i With a child seat and top tether installed in the right rear seat position and twin roller blind installed make sure the top tether strap is positioned between seat backrest and twin roller blind Safety and Security Occupant safety A Always lock backrest in its upright position when rear seat bench is occupied by pas sengers or the extended cargo area is not in use Check for secure locking by pushing and pulling on the backrest Warning Anchorage rings are located on the back side of the outer rear backrests and on the floor behind the rear center seat G Anchorage ring Hook gt Fold up anchorage ring P91 40 2353 31 gt D Safety and Security Occupant safety gt gt gt Securely fasten hook 2 whichis part Child seat anchors LATCH type gt Grip inner side of anchors Q and fold of the tether strap to anchorage This vehicle is equipped with two LATCH forward until they audibly lock in place ring Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren Install child seat according to the type anchors at each of the outer rear manufacturer s instructions seats for the installation of a LATCH type child seat with the matching mounting iJ fittings If a child seat is not installed the LATCH type anchors can be folded To fold anchors out back between the seat cushion a
142. arate telephone operating instructions that came with your mobile phone for information on how to place a 911 emergency call on the mobile phone A The 9 11 emergency call system is a public service Using it without due cause is a crim inal offense Warning The following conditions must be met for a 911 emergency call e Telephone must be switched on e The corresponding mobile communica tions network must be available i Emergency calls may not be possible with all telephone networks or if certain network services and or telephone functions are active Check with your local service providers If you cannot make an emergency call you will have to initiate rescue measures yourself Controls in detail Audio system GSM network phones Placing a 911 emergency call using audio head unit with the phone locked gt Press button to switch to telephone operation PIN appears in the audio display gt Enter 911 using the number keypad on the audio head unit gt Press OK soft key or button for dialing to begin DIALING appears in the audio display while the telephone establishes the connection gt Wait until the emergency call center answers then describe the emergency 237 Controls in detail Audio system Placing a 911 emergency call using audio head unit with the phone unlocked gt Press button to switch to telephone operation E
143. as soon as you reinsert the SmartKey in the starter switch Setting interior lighting delayed shut off Press button or E to select Use this function to set whether and how long you would like the interior lighting to remain lit during darkness after you have removed the SmartKey from the starter switch gt Move the selection marker with button or E to the Lighting submenu gt Press button EAN or Keg repeatedly until the message Int light delay off appears in the multifunction display The selection marker is on the current setting Int light delay off P54 32 2376 31 the desired lamp on time period You can select e 0 sec the delayed shut off feature is deactivated e 5 sec 10 sec 15 sec or 20 sec the interior lighting de layed shut off feature is activated with the desired lamp on period Vehicle submenu Access the Vehicle submenu via the Settings menu Use the Vehicle submenu to make general vehicle settings The following function is available Function Page Setting automatic locking 153 Controls in detail Control system Setting automatic locking Use this function to activate or deactivate the automatic central locking With the automatic central locking system activated the vehicle is centrally locked at vehicle speeds of approximately 9 mph 15 km h gt Move the selection marker with button or E to the Vehicle submenu gt Press button J or
144. ass and treble functions are called up by pressing the button Settings for bass and treble are stored separately for the AM and FM wavebands weather band CD mode and telephone mode Bass gt Press button repeatedly until BASS appears in the display Controls in detail Audio system P82 60 4450 31 gt Press or soft key to increase or decrease tone level accordingly or gt Press RES soft key briefly to reset bass tones to their center level The radio switches back to the standard radio menu eight seconds after the last soft key is pressed Controls in detail Audio system Adjusting treble gt Press button repeatedly until TREBLE appears in the display P82 60 4451 31 gt Press or soft key to increase or decrease tone level accordingly or gt Press RES soft key briefly to reset treble tones to their center level The radio switches back to the standard radio menu eight seconds after the last soft key is pressed Sound system You can either program the sound settings manually gt page 203 or choose settings via preset sound characteristics You can select from among the following settings STANDARD conventional stereo sound SURROUND the sound is set for better three dimensional acoustic character istics SPEECH the sound is optimized for the spoken word Press button repeatedly until STANDARD SURROUND or SPEECH appears in the display
145. ator warning lamps in the driver s field of vision including the tachometer speedo meter engine temperature display and fuel gauge Kickdown Depressing the accelerator past the point of resistance shifts the transmis sion down to the lowest possible gear This very quickly accelerates the vehicle and should not be used for normal acceleration needs Kilopascal kPa gt page 328 Lock button Button on the door which indicates whether the door is locked or unlocked Pushing the lock button down on an individual door from inside will lock that door Technical terms Maintenance System U S vehicles Maintenance service indicator in the multifunction display that informs the driver when the next vehicle mainte nance service is due The Maintenance System in your vehicle tracks distance driven and the time elapsed since your last maintenance service and calls for the next maintenance service accord ingly Maximum tire inflation pressure gt page 328 Maximum load rating gt page 328 Maximum loaded vehicle weight gt page 328 Memory function Used to store three individual seat steering wheel and mirror positions for each SmartKey Technical terms MON Motor Octane Number The Motor Octane Number for gasoline as determined by a standardized method It is an indication of a gasoline s ability to resist undesired ocs Occupant Classification System The system automatically turns t
146. atory test wheel Sustained high tem perature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and ex cessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Mo tor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law A The temperature grade for this tire is estab lished for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed underin flation or excessive loading either sepa rately or in combination can cause excessive heat build up and possible tire failure Warning Tire ply material A a005 Plies in sidewall Plies under tread For illustration purposes only Actual data on tires is specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in above illustration This marking tells you about the type of cord and number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread Tire and loading terminology Accessory weight The combined weight in excess of those standard items which may be replaced of automatic transmission power steering power brakes power windows power seats radio and heater to the extent that these items are available as factory installed equipment whether installed or not Air pressure The amount of air inside the tire pressing outward on
147. atteries is the preferred method of disposal Many states require sellers of batteries to accept old batteries for recycling Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system The windshield washer reservoir is located in the engine compartment S pm Bess Q Washer fluid reservoir cap Fluid for the windshield washer system and the headlamp cleaning system is supplied from the windshield washer reservoir It has a capacity of e 3 2 US qt 3 0 I in vehicles without headlamp cleaning system e 6 4 US qt 6 0 I in vehicles with headlamp cleaning system During all seasons add MB Windshield Washer Concentrate S to water Premix the windshield washer fluid in a suitable container gt Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield Washer Concentrate and water or commercially available premixed windshield washer solvent antifreeze depending on ambient temperatures Always use washer solvent antifreeze where temperatures may fall below the freezing point Failure to do so could result in damage to the washer system reservoir Only use washer fluid which is suitable for plastic lenses Improper washer fluid can damage the plastic lenses of the headlamps Operation Engine compartment AN Washer solvent antifreeze is highly flamma ble Do not spill washer solvent antifreeze on hot engine parts because it may ignite and burn You could be seriously burned Warning For more information
148. ave the cause determined and remedied by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center The electrical fuses are located in different fuse boxes Main fuse box in passenger compartment gt page 413 Fuse box in engine compartment gt page 414 e Fuse box in cargo compartment gt page 415 Aids for changing fuses Fuse chart The fuse chart is found in the main fuse box in the passenger compartment gt page 413 The amperages of the fuses are also given there Spare fuses Spare fuses are found in the vehicle tool kit in the cargo compartment gt page 415 Fuse extractor The fuse extractor is found in the vehicle tool kit in the cargo compartment gt page 415 Practical hints Fuses Main fuse box in passenger Opening fuse box compartment gt Open the driver s door The main fuse box is located in the passen gt Pull fuse box cover Q open with a ger compartment on the driver s side of screw driver or similar tool see arrow the cockpit gt Remove fuse box cover 1 rearward Closing fuse box gt Attach fuse box cover in the front gt Fold fuse box cover in until it engages Q Main fuse box cover Practical hints Fuses Fuse box in engine compartment The fuse box is located in the engine d compartment on the driver s side Screws Retainer Removing cover Opening fuse box gt With a dry cloth remove any moisture Twist screws 2
149. avoid personal injury during a colli sion or sudden maneuver exercise care when transporting cargo Never drive vehicle with tailgate open Deadly carbon monoxide CO gases may enter vehicle interior resulting in uncon sciousness and death Controls in detail Loading Cargo tie down rings The four cargo tie down rings are located in the cargo compartment Cargo tie down rings gt Carefully secure cargo by applying even load on all rings with rope of suffi cient strength to hold down the cargo Always follow loading instructions gt page 256 257 Controls in detail Useful features Storage compartments Glove box Warning A To help avoid personal injury during a colli sion or sudden maneuver exercise care when stowing objects in the vehicle Put lug gage or cargo in the cargo compartment if possible Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the seat backs Unlocking Always use partition net when transporting Glove box lid release Locking cargo Partition net cannot secure hard or Glove box heavy objects Locking the glove box Parcel nets cannot secure hard or heavy Opening the glove box gt Insert mechanical key gt page 382 objects gt Pull lid release Q into the glove box lock and turn it to Keep compartment lids closed This will help The glove box lid opens downward position to prevent stored objects from being thrown about and injuring vehicle occupants
150. be checked Only use seat belts which have been approved by Mercedes Benz Do not make any modifications to the seat belts This can lead to unintended activation of the ETDs or to failure Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may severely weaken them In a crash they may not be able to provide adequate protection Have all work carried out only by qualified technicians Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Warning A USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY e Seat belts can only work when used properly Never wear seat belts in any other way than as described in this section as that could result in serious injuries in case of an accident e Each occupant should wear their seat belt at all times because seat belts help reduce the likelihood of and potential severity of injuries in accidents includ ing rollovers The integrated restraint system includes SRS driver air bag passenger front air bag side impact air bags head protection window curtain air bags for side windows ETD seat belt emergency tensioning device and front seat knee bolsters The system is designed to enhance the protection offered to properly belted occupants in certain frontal front air bags and ETD and side side impact and window curtain air bags and ETD impacts which exceed preset deployment thresholds Never wear the shoulder belt under your arm against your neck or off your shoul der In a frontal crash your body would move too far
151. be triggered Always sit nearly upright properly use the seat belts and use an appropriately sized infant or toddler restraint or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child Failure to follow these instructions can result in severe injuries to you or other occupants If you sell your vehicle it is important that you make the buyer aware of this safety information Be sure to give the buyer this Operator s Manual Warning VAN Accident research shows that the safest place for children in an automobile is in the rear seat It should be noted that with respect to both front and rear side impact air bags there is a possibility for a side impact air bag related injury if occupants especially children are not properly seated or restrained when next to a side impact air bag which needs to deploy rapidly in a side impact in order to do its job To help avoid the possibility of injury please follow these guidelines 1 Occupants especially children should never place their bodies or lean their heads in the area of the door where the side impact air bag inflates This could result in serious injuries or death should the side impact air bag be deployed 2 Always sit nearly upright properly use the seat belts and for children 12 years old and under use an appropriately sized infant or toddler restraint or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child 3 Always wear seat belts proper
152. before turning the SmartKey in the starter switch Hold on to the wiper when folding the wiper arm back If released the force of the impact from the tensioning spring could crack the windshield Window cleaning gt Fold wiper arms forward A For safety reasons switch off wipers and remove SmartKey from starter switch before cleaning the windshield Otherwise the wiper motor could suddenly turn on and cause injury Warning gt Use a window cleaning solution on all glass surfaces An automotive glass cleaner is recommended Fold the windshield wiper arms back onto the windshield before turning the SmartKey in the starter switch Hold on to the wiper when folding the wiper arm back If released the force of the impact from the tensioning spring could crack the windshield Light alloy wheels Mercedes Benz approved Wheel Care should be used for regular cleaning of the light alloy wheels If possible clean wheels once a week with Mercedes Benz approved Wheel Care using a soft bristle brush and a strong spray of water Follow the instructions on container i Only use acid free cleaning materials Acid may cause corrosion or damage the clear coat Instrument cluster Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or mild detergent for delicate fabrics as a washing solution Wipe with a cloth moist ened in lukewarm solution Do not use scouring agents Steering wheel and gear selector lever Wipe with
153. brake pedal defeats the purpose of the ABS and significantly reduces braking effectiveness The Antilock Brake System ABS regulates the brake pressure so that the wheels do not lock during braking This allows you to maintain the ability to steer your vehicle The ABS is functional above a speed of ap proximately 5 mph 8 km h independent of road surface conditions On slippery road surfaces the ABS will respond even to light brake pressure The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster gt page 24 comes on when you switch on the ignition It goes out when the engine is running Safety and Security Driving safety systems Braking At the instant one of the wheels is about to lock up a slight pulsation can be felt in the brake pedal indicating that the ABS is in the regulating mode gt Keep firm and steady pressure on the brake pedal while experiencing the pulsation Continuous steady brake pedal pressure yields the advantages provided by the ABS namely braking power and ability to steer the vehicle The pulsating brake pedal can be an indication of hazardous road conditions and functions as a reminder to take extra care while driving Emergency brake maneuver gt Keep continuous full pressure on the brake pedal A The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the veh
154. case the central locking system does not release the fuel filler flap you can open it manually v vV v YV Warning VAN gt If you operate the emergency release button be careful of the sharp edges so that Open the tailgate Press button Q Fold down trim panel Reach inside through opening in direction of arrow Turn release knob clockwise arrow The fuel filler flap can now be opened RA a you do not injure yourself Tool Manually unlocking the transmission gt Insert a tool e g flat blade gear selector lever screwdriver into the opening In the case of power failure the transmis gt Perform the following two steps sion gear selector lever can be manually simultaneously unlocked e g to tow the vehicle gt Press tool forward in the gt Slide out the swiveling cup holder direction of arrow gt page 260 gt Move gear selector lever from position P Remove tool 4 from the opening The gear selector lever is locked again when moving it to position P Practical hints Opening closing in an emergency YV Opening closing in an emergency Power tilt sliding sunroof You can open or close the tilt sliding sunroof manually should an electrical malfunction occur The tilt sliding sunroof drive is located behind the lens of the interior overhead light P68 00 3102 31 P68 00 3103 31 A gt Slide both locking tabs in direction Turn crank
155. cation Label can be found on the driver s door B pillar see Technical data gt page 420 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The total weight of the vehicle all occupants all cargo and the trailer tongue load gt page 312 must never exceed the GVWR Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The to tal allowable weight that can be carried by a single axle front or rear To assure that your vehicle does not ex ceed the maximum permissible weight limits GVWR and GAWR for front and rear axle have the loaded vehicle including driver passengers and all cargo and if ap plicable trailer fully loaded weighed on a suitable commercial scale Trailer tongue load The tongue load of any trailer is an impor tant weight to measure because it affects the load you can carry in your vehicle If a trailer is towed the tongue load must be added to the weight of all occupants riding and any cargo you are carrying in the vehicle The tongue load typically is ten percent of the trailer weight and every thing loaded in it Your Mercedes Benz has been designed primarily to carry passengers and their cargo Mercedes Benz does not recom mend trailer towing with your vehicle Recommended tire inflation pressure A Warning Follow recommended tire inflation pressures Do not underinflate tires Underinflated tires wear excessively and or unevenly adversely affect handling and fuel economy and are more likely to
156. caution Avoid spinning of a drive wheel This may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Operation Driving instructions Tire speed rating Regardless of the tire speed rating local speed limits should be obeyed Use prudent driving speeds appropriate to prevailing conditions A Even when permitted by law never operate a vehicle at speeds greater than the maxi mum speed rating of the tires Warning Exceeding the maximum speed for which tires are rated can lead to sudden tire failure causing loss of vehicle control and possibly resulting in an accident and or personal injury and possible death for you and for others Operation Driving instructions Your vehicle is factory equipped with H rated tires which have a speed rating of 130 mph 210 km h An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehicle from exceeding the tire speed rating i For information on speed rating for winter tires see Winter tires gt page 332 For additional general information on tire speed markings on tire sidewall see Tire speed rating gt page 320 288 Winter driving instructions The most important rule for slippery or icy roads is to drive sensibly and to avoid abrupt acceleration braking and steering maneuvers Do not use the cruise control system under such conditions When the vehicle is in danger of skidding
157. cedes Benz Center will be glad to demonstrate the proper proce dures We continuously strive to improve our product and ask for your understanding that we reserve the right to make changes in design and equipment Therefore infor mation illustrations and descriptions in this Operator s Manual might differ from your vehicle Optional equipment is also described in this manual including operating instruc tions wherever necessary Since they are special order items the descriptions and illustrations herein may vary slightly from the actual equipment of your vehicle If there are any equipment details that are not shown or described in this Operator s Manual your authorized Mercedes Benz Center will be glad to inform you of correct care and operating procedures The Operator s Manual and Maintenance Booklet are important documents and should be kept with the vehicle Service and warranty information The Service and Warranty Information Booklet contains detailed information about the warranties covering your Mercedes Benz including e New Car Limited Warranty e Emission System Warranty e Emission Performance Warranty e California Maine Massachusetts and Vermont Emission Control System Warranty California Maine Massachusetts and Vermont only e State Warranty Enforcement Laws Lemon Laws Important notice for California retail buyers and lessees of Mercedes Benz automobiles Under Calif
158. celed The last speed set is stored for later use Moving the gear selector lever to position N while driving also cancels cruise control However the gear selector lever should not be moved to position N while driving except to coast when the vehicle is in danger of skidding e g on icy roads i The last stored speed is canceled when you turn off the engine Setting a higher speed gt Lift cruise control lever to position and hold it up until the desired speed is reached gt Release cruise control lever The new speed is set Depressing the accelerator pedal does not deactivate cruise control After brief acceleration e g for passing cruise control will resume the last speed set Setting a lower speed gt Depress cruise control lever to position 2 and hold it down until the desired speed is reached gt Release cruise control lever The new speed is set i When you use the cruise control lever to decelerate the transmission will automatically downshift if the engine s braking power does not brake the vehicle sufficiently Fine adjustment in 1 mph Canada 1 km h increments Faster gt Briefly tip cruise control lever in direction of arrow Q Slower gt Briefly tip cruise control lever in direction of arrow Controls in detail Driving systems Setting to last stored speed Resume function A The speed stored in memory should only be set aga
159. ch off ignition i You cannot disarm the tow away alarm while the ignition is switched on gt D Safety and Security Anti theft systems gt gt gt Press switch Q Indicator lamp in switch comes on briefly gt Exit and lock your vehicle with the SmartKey The tow away alarm remains disarmed until you lock your vehicle again Canceling the alarm To cancel the alarm gt Press the or button on the SmartKey or gt Insert the SmartKey in the starter switch Controls in detail Good visibility Controls in detail Locking and unlocking In the Controls in detail section you will find detailed information on how to oper ate the equipment installed on your vehi cle If you are already familiar with the basic functions of your vehicle this section will be of particular interest to you To quickly familiarize yourself with the ba sic functions of the vehicle refer to the Getting started section of this manual The corresponding page numbers are giv en at the beginning of each segment For more information on locking and unlocking see Getting started gt page 32 and gt page 55 SmartKey Your vehicle comes supplied with two SmartKeys each with remote control and a removable mechanical key The locking tabs for the mechanical key portion of the two SmartKeys are a different color to help distinguish each SmartKey unit The SmartKey provide
160. child on the front passenger seat until the system has been repaired A child in a rear facing child restraint on the front passenger seat will be seriously injured or even killed if the front passenger front air bag inflates If you have to place a child ina forward facing child restraint on the front passenger seat move the seat as far back as possible use the proper child restraint recommended for the age size and weight of the child and secure child restraint with the vehicle s seat belt according to the child seat manufacturer s instructions For children larger than the typical 12 month old child the front passenger air bag may or may not be activated gt page 75 Warning VAN Infants and small children should never share a seat belt with another occupant During an accident they could be crushed between the occupant and seat belt A child s risk of serious or fatal injuries is significantly increased if the child restraints are not properly secured in the vehicle and or the child is not properly secured in the child restraint Children too big for a toddler restraint must ride in seats using regular seat belts Posi tion shoulder belt across chest and shoul der not face or neck A booster seat may be necessary to achieve proper belt positioning for children from 41 Ibs until they reach a height where a lap shoulder belt fits properly without a booster When the child restraint is not in use remove i
161. cident Keep in mind that objects placed in the cup holder may come loose during braking vehicle maneuvers or in an accident and be thrown around in the vehicle interior Objects thrown around in the vehicle interior may cause an accident and or serious personal injury Underneath the swiveling cup holder is another stationary cup holder You can only use this when the swiveling cup holder is pulled out and completely turned outward Sliding out the swiveling cup holder gt Push button Q The cup holder slides upward Hi Turning the swiveling cup holder inward and sliding it in No objects should be in the swiveling cup holder when the swiveling cup holder is slided upward Otherwise the swiveling cup holder or the objects could be damaged Turning the swiveling cup holder outward gt Turn the cup holder in the direction of arrow 3 until it engages gt Turn the cup holder in the direction of arrow 4 until it engages a Po No objects should be in the stationary gt Turn the cup holder in the direction of cup holder when the swiveling cup arrow 2 until it engages holder is turned inward and pushed in Otherwise the swiveling cup holder or You can now use both cup holders the objects could be damaged Controls in detail Useful features Cup holder in rear seat armrest Warning A In order to help prevent spilling liquids on vehicle occupants only use containers that fit int
162. ck search 161 Phone number Dialing 160 Redialing 161 Plastic and rubber parts Cleaning 342 Playing CDs 220 Poly V belt drive 442 Layout 421 Positions memory function Recalling from memory 114 Storing into memory 114 Potential problems associated with underinflated and overinflated tires 316 Power assistance 283 Power seat Adjusting backrest tilt 38 Adjusting head restraint height 38 Adjusting head restraint tilt 39 Adjusting seat cushion tilt 38 Adjusting seat height 38 Memory function 113 Removing installing front head restraints 108 Seat fore and aft adjustment 38 Power tilt sliding sunroof 243 Power train 442 Power washer 338 Power windows 239 Blocking of rear door window operation 82 Side windows 239 Synchronizing 242 Practical hints Qa Collapsible wheel chock 379 Quick search First aid kit 377 Phone book Fuses 412 Lamp in center console 350 Lamps in instrument cluster 344 Minispare wheel 380 Symbol messages 362 Text messages 354 Towing the vehicle 408 Vehicle jack 377 378 Vehicle status messages in the display 352 Vehicle tool kit 377 Premium unleaded gasoline 432 Problems While driving 54 With vehicle 17 Product information 9 Production options weight 329 Program mode 129 Program mode selector switch 442 Automatic shift program automatic transmission 168 PSI 329 R Radio Selecting stations 136 Radio operation 207 Radio see Radio operation Radio transmitter control and op
163. cket 3 back into the lamp and turn it clockwise Parking and standing lamp bulb gt v v vV YV Press the clamp on housing cover 2 and remove it Pull out bulb socket with the bulb Pull the bulb out of bulb socket Press the new bulb into bulb socket Press bulb socket back into the lamp Align housing cover 2 and press until it engages Side marker lamp 2 10 3126 31 gt Carefully slide the lamp towards the rear in direction of arrows Remove the front end first gt Turn the bulb socket with the bulb counterclockwise and remove it Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket Insert the new bulb into the bulb socket gt Place the bulb socket back into the lamp and turn it clockwise gt Toreinstall the lamp set the rear end in the bumper and let the front end engage Replacing bulbs for rear lamps Tail lamp unit Before you start to replace a bulb for a rear lamp do the following first gt Turn the exterior lamp switch to position QJ gt page 116 gt Open the tailgate gt page 101 P68 00 3100 31 Latch Trim panel gt Press latch Q on the corresponding side gt Fold down trim panel 2 Practical hints Replacing bulbs Tab gt Press tabs 8 together in direction of arrows and remove the bulb carrier Practical hints Replacing bulbs P82 10 3129 31 Bulb carrier Brake lamp bulb Turn signal lamp bulb
164. connec tors seals or other rubber parts Tar stains Quickly remove tar stains before they dry and become more difficult to remove A tar remover is recommended Paintwork painted body components Mercedes Benz approved Paint Care should be applied when water drops on the paint surface do not bead up normally every three to five months depending on climate and washing detergent used Mercedes Benz approved Paint Cleaner should be applied if the paint surface shows signs of embedded dirt i e loss of gloss Do not apply any of these products or wax if your vehicle is parked in the sun or if the hood is still hot Use the appropriate MB Touch Up Stick for quick and provisional repairs of minor paint damage i e chips from stones vehicle doors etc Engine cleaning Prior to cleaning the engine compartment make sure to protect electrical compo nents and connectors from the intrusion of water and cleaning agents Corrosion protection such as MB Anticor rosion Wax should be applied to the engine compartment after every engine cleaning Before applying all control linkage bushings and joints should be lubricated The poly V belt and all pulleys should be protected from any wax Vehicle washing Do not use hot water or wash your vehicle in direct sunlight Only use a mild car wash detergent such as Mercedes Benz approved Car Shampoo Thoroughly spray the vehicle with a dif fused jet of water Di
165. cording to accident statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seat ing position Thus we strongly recommend that children be placed in the rear seats whenever possible Regardless of seating position children 12 years old and under must be seated and properly secured in an appropriate infant or toddler restraint or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child For additional information see Children in the vehicle gt page 70 A child s risk of serious or fatal injuries is significantly increased if the child restraints are not properly secured in the vehicle and or the child is not properly secured in the child restraint Getting started Adjusting Manual seat adjustment VA y A ss Seat fore and aft adjustment Seat cushion tilt Seat backrest tilt Seat height Seat fore and aft adjustment Lift handle Q Slide seat to the desired position v gt Allow handle to reengage gt Check for proper engagement before driving Adjust seat to a comfortable seating position that still allows you to reach the accelerator brake pedal safely The posi tion should be as far rearward as possible consistent with ability to properly operate controls When moving the seat make sure that there are no items in the footwell or behind the seat Otherwise you could damage the seat Seat cushion tilt
166. ctical hints Towing the vehicle Mercedes Benz recommends that the vehicle be transported with all wheels off the ground using flatbed or appropriate wheel lift dolly equipment This method is preferable to other types of towing Use flatbed or wheel lift dolly equip ment with the SmartKey in the starter switch turned to position 0 Do not tow with sling type equipment Towing with sling type equipment over bumpy roads will damage radiator and supports To prevent damage during transport do not tie down vehicle by its chassis or suspension parts Switch off the tow away alarm gt page 93 and deactivate the auto matic central locking gt page 153 408 When circumstances do not permit the recommended towing methods the vehicle may be towed with all wheels on the ground or front wheels raised except vehicles with 4MATIC only so far as necessary to have the vehicle moved to a safe location where the recommended towing methods can be employed Do not tow start the vehicle H Vehicles with 4MATIC Do not tow with one axle raised Doing so could damage the transfer case which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty All wheels must be on or off the ground Observe instructions for towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground If the vehicle is towed with the front axle raised not permissible for vehicles with 4MATIC the engine must be shut off SmartKey in starter switch position
167. d Example B gt Locate the heading Vehicle Capacity Weight on your vehicle s placard Step 2 gt Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle Step 3 gt Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilo grams or XXX lbs Step 4 gt The resulting figure equals the avail able amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if the XXX amount equals 1400 Ibs and there will be five 150 lbs passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs 1400 750 5 x150 650 Ibs Step 5 gt Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4 Step 6 if applicable gt If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be trans ferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle gt page 312 The following table shows examples on how to calculate total and cargo load capacities with varying seating configura tions and number and size of occupants The following examples use a load limit of 1500 Ibs This is for illustration purposes only Make sure you are using the actual load limit for your vehicle stated on the vehicle s placard gt page 30
168. d off the following lamps will switch on after you have removed the SmartKey from the starter switch e Parking lamps e Tail lamps e License plate lamps e Side marker lamps e Front fog lamps If you do not open a door after removing the SmartKey from the starter switch the lamps will switch off automatically after approximately 60 seconds Controls in detail Control system i You can reactivate this function within ten minutes by opening a door gt Move the selection marker with button or E to the Lighting submenu gt Press button EAN or ed repeatedly until the message Hdlamp delay off appears in the multifunction display The selection marker is on the current setting Hdlamp delay off 60 sec 45 sec 30 sec P54 32 2375 31 gt Press button or E to select the desired lamp on period You can select e 0 sec the delayed shut off feature is deactivated e 15 sec 30 sec 45 sec or 60 sec select the desired lamp on period Turn the exterior lamp switch to position EGR before turning off the engine gt page 116 The headlamps delayed shut off feature is activated You can temporarily deactivate the delayed shut off feature gt Before exiting the vehicle turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 0 gt Then turn it to position 2 and back to position 0 The delayed shut off feature is deactivated It will reactivate
169. d above the SRS may not be operational deployed when needed in an accident Practical hints What to do if Lamp in center console Problem Possible cause Suggested solution The front passenger front air bag off The system is malfunctioning Have the system checked as soon as indicator lamp illuminates and possible by an authorized remains illuminated with the weight of Mercedes Benz Center a typical adult or someone larger than a small individual on the front passenger seat gt Also note any messages in the multifunction display and follow corrective steps gt page 354 Warning A If the Fe indicator lamp illuminates and remains illuminated with the weight of a typical adult or someone larger than a small individual on the front passenger seat do not have any passenger use the front passenger seat until the system has been repaired Practical hints What to do if Problem Possible cause Suggested solution The front passenger front air bag off The system is malfunctioning gt Make sure that there is nothing be indicator lamp does not illuminate tween seat cushion and child seat and and or does not remain illuminated check installation of the child seat with the weight of a typical 12 month old child in a standard child restraint or less on the front passenger seat gt Make sure that no objects applying supplemental weight onto the seat are present gt Ifthe front passenger front
170. d after approximately 30 minutes Controls in detail Climate control Air conditioning The air conditioning is operational while the engine is running and cools the interior air to the temperature set by the operator i Condensation may drip out from under neath the vehicle This is normal and not an indication of a malfunction A If you turn off the cooling function the vehicle will not be cooled when weather conditions are warm The windows can fog up more quickly Window fogging may impair visibility and endanger you and others Warning Controls in detail Climate control Deactivating It is possible to deactivate the air condi tioning cooling function of the climate control system The air in the vehicle will then no longer be cooled or dehumidified Climate control panel design A gt Press button gt page 177 The indicator lamp on the button comes on The cooling function switches off after a short delay Climate control panel design B gt Press button gt page 177 The indicator lamp on the button goes out The cooling function switches off after a short delay Activating Moist air can fog up the windows You can dehumidify the air with the air condition ing Climate control panel design A gt Press button gt page 177 The indicator lamp on the button goes out Climate control panel design B gt Press button gt page 177 The indicator la
171. d cooling given on the following pag es Otherwise the windows could fog up impairing visibility and endangering you and others i Severe conditions e g strong air pollution may require replacement of the filter before its scheduled interval A clogged filter will reduce the air volume to the interior If the vehicle interior is hot ventilate the interior before driving off see Opening Summer opening feature gt page 245 Keep the air intake grille in front of the windshield free of snow and debris Deactivating the climate control system Deactivating gt Set airvolume control Q gt page 177 to position 0 i When the air conditioning is switched off the outside air supply and circula tion are also switched off Only choose this setting for a short time Otherwise the windows could fog up Reactivating gt Setairvolume control C gt page 177 to any speed Setting the temperature Use temperature controls 2 and 3 gt page 177 to separately adjust the air temperature on each side of the passenger compartment You should raise or lower the temperature setting in small incre ments preferably starting at 72 F 22 C a When operating the climate control system in automatic mode you will only rarely need to adjust the tempera ture air volume and air distribution Controls in detail Climate control Increasing gt Turn temperature control or
172. d in any way Moreover the specified service jobs must be carried out regularly according to Mercedes Benz servicing requirements For details refer to the Maintenance Booklet Operation Driving instructions Warning A Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to your health All exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide and inhaling it can cause unconsciousness and lead to death Do not run the engine in confined areas such as a garage which are not properly ventilated If you think that exhaust gas fumes are entering the vehicle while driving have the cause determined and corrected immediately If you must drive under these conditions drive only with at least one window fully open at all times Coolant temperature During severe operating conditions and stop and go city traffic the coolant temperature may rise close to approximately 248 F 120 C The engine should not be operated with the coolant temperature above 248 F 120 C Doing so may cause serious engine damage which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Warning A e Driving when your engine is badly overheated can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire You could be seriously burned e Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns and can occur just by opening the hood Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam com ing from it Turn off the engine get out of the ve
173. d in the order of the calls received When you have selected a number press button The call will be made Accepting an incoming call If the telephone is active in the background reception symbol is visible in the display the audio source is muted when an incom ing call is received A ringing tone can be heard and the caller s telephone number or the name under which the telephone number has been saved in the telephone book appears in the display If the caller s number is not relayed CALL will appear in the display gt Press button The call is accepted Muting a call It is possible to mute a call the caller is then no longer able to hear you e Mute on gt Press MUT soft key gt MIC MUTE will appear in the display e Mute off gt Press MUT soft key again Terminating a call gt Press button The current call is terminated and the muted audio source becomes active again Controls in detail Audio system Accepting a second incoming call If you receive another call during an already active call you can accept the second call and switch between the two e Accepting a second call gt Place new call by entering telephone number manually i You will be notified of the second call acoustically but you will not see this in the display You are connected to the second caller the first caller is kept on hold Controls in detail Audio system e Switching bet
174. d there was no voice connection to the Response Center established then the Tele Aid system could not initiate an Information call e g the relevant cellular phone network is not available The message Call failed appears in the multifunction display Controls in detail Useful features Information calls can be terminated using the button on the multifunction steering wheel or the re spective button for ending a telephone call on the audio system or COMAND head unit If the indicator lamps do not start flash ing after pressing one of the buttons or remain illuminated in red at any time the Tele Aid system has detected a malfunction or the service is not currently active and may not initiate a call Visit your Mercedes Benz Center and have the system checked or contact the Response Center at 1 800 756 9018 in the USA or 1 888 923 8367 in Canada as soon as possible 271 Controls in detail Useful features Upgrade scenario An emergency call is possible even if other services are active If the indicator lamp continues to flash or the system does not reset contact the Response Center at 1 800 756 9018 in the USA or 1 888 923 8367 in Canada or Mercedes Benz Customer Assistance at 1 800 FOR MERCedes 1 800 367 6372 in the USA or Customer Service at 1 800 387 0100 in Canada 272 i The indicator lamp in the respective button flashes until the call is con cluded Calls can only be ter
175. d when someone opens e a door e the tailgate e the hood The alarm system will also be triggered when e someone attempts to raise the vehicle gt page 93 e opening the vehicle with the mechanical key Safety and Security Anti theft systems i The alarm will stay on even if the activating element a door for example is immediately closed i If the alarm stays on for more than 30 seconds a call to the Response Center is initiated automatically by the Tele Aid system gt page 266 provid ed Tele Aid service was subscribed to and properly activated and that neces sary cellular service and GPS coverage are available Safety and Security Anti theft systems Arming the alarm system The indicator lamp is in the switch for the tow away alarm in the center console Indicator lamp gt Lock the vehicle with the SmartKey The turn signal lamps flash three times to indicate that the alarm system is activated Indicator lamp begins to flash after approximately 30 seconds after arming the alarm system i If the turn signal lamps do not flash three times one of the following elements may not be properly closed e a door e the tailgate e the hood Close the respective element and lock the vehicle again Disarming the alarm system gt Unlock your vehicle with the SmartKey The turn signal lamps flash once to indicate that the alarm system is deactivated i
176. dio source may become available for your vehicle model Feature description is based on preliminary information at time of printing Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center for availability You can adjust the volume gt page 203 the sound settings gt page 203 and the volume distribution gt page 205 for the AUX input Calling up AUX mode gt Press and hold button until AUX appears in the display Canceling AUX mode gt Press any audio source button Radio operation Selecting radio mode gt Press button Calling up wavebands You can choose from among the FM AM and WB wavebands Weather band gt page 211 iJ FM waveband AM waveband 87 7 107 9 MHz 530 1710 KHz Controls in detail Audio system Calling up wavebands for radios without SAT gt or Press FM or AM soft key to switch between FM and AM The FM and AM wavebands are called up one after another Press WB soft key The weather band menu is called up The waveband currently selected appears in the upper left hand corner of the display 207 Controls in detail Audio system Calling up wavebands for radios with SAT gt Press FM AM or WB soft key repeatedly until desired waveband has been selected The FM AM and WB wavebands are called up one after another The waveband currently selected appears in the upper left hand corner of the display Selecting a station The foll
177. display If the battery is disconnected the days of disconnection will not be included in the count shown by the maintenance service indicator To arrive at the true maintenance service deadline you will need to subtract these days from the days shown in the maintenance service indicator Do not confuse the maintenance service indicator with the engine oil level indicator BEd Operation Maintenance Resetting the maintenance service indicator In the event that the maintenance service on your vehicle is not carried out by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center you can have the maintenance service indicator reset The automotive maintenance facility carrying out the maintenance service will find the information for resetting the maintenance service indicator in the maintenance relevant information for your vehicle Such information is available from either your authorized Mercedes Benz Center or directly from Mercedes Benz i If the maintenance service indicator was inadvertently reset have an authorized Mercedes Benz Center correct it Only reset if the proper maintenance service has been performed Resetting the system without performing the proper service as called for by the maintenance service indicator will result in engine damage and or other vehicle damage not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Y Vehicle care Cleaning and care of the vehicle A Many cleaning products can be haza
178. djustment manual gt Make sure the steering wheel is Steering wheel adjustment electrical PA ses aia by HA CUP The stalk for steering wheel adjustment is a own and in and out betore driving located on the steering column lower left Warning A Only adjust the steering wheel with the vehicle at a standstill and make sure the steering wheel is securely locked in place before driving off Handle Driving without the steering wheel adjust gt To unlock the steering column pull ment locked may cause an unexpected gt mii handle Q out to its stop limit steering wheel movement which could Adjusting steering column in or out gt Move steering wheel to the desired cause the driver to lose control of the l Adjusting steering column up or down position vehicle Make sure the steering wheel is gt Switch on ignition gt page 33 securely locked by trying to move it up and gt To lock the steering column push down and in and out before driving off handle all the way in until it engages or gt Open the drivers door The steering wheel is once again locked into position Adjusting steering column in or out gt Move stalk forward or back in the direction of arrow Q until a comfort able steering wheel position is reached with your arms slightly bent at the elbow Adjusting steering column up or down gt Move stalk up or down in the direction of arrow Make sure your
179. during Closing the glove box Unlocking the glove box an accident F i i gt Push lid up to close gt Turn mechanical key in the glove box lock to position Q Armrest storage compartments Handle Button passenger side Button driver s side Opening storage compartment gt Pull handle and lift armrest Closing storage compartment gt Press armrest down until it engages into place Opening telephone compartment gt Press button on driver s side or button on passenger side and lift armrest Closing telephone compartment gt Press armrest down until it engages into place Controls in detail Useful features Changing inclination of armrest Handle gt Pull up on armrest Lowering armrest gt Pull handle Q to lower armrest Controls in detail Useful features Armrest in the rear passenger compartment gt Pull the top of the armrest out and fold it down Cup holders in front of seat armrest Warning A In order to help prevent spilling liquids on vehicle occupants only use containers that fit into the cup holder Use lids on open containers and do not fill containers to a height where the contents especially hot liquids could spill during braking vehicle maneuvers or in an accident When not in use keep the cup holder closed An open cup holder may cause injury to you or others when contacted during braking vehicle maneuvers or in an ac
180. e plate 379 Practical hints Where will I find Minispare wheel The Minispare wheel is located in the storage compartment underneath the cargo compartment floor Removing the Minispare wheel gt Lift up cargo compartment floor cover Storage box gt Remove storage box Q Retaining screw Minispare wheel gt Loosen retaining screw 2 by turning it counterclockwise gt Remove Minispare wheel 3 Storing the Minispare wheel gt Store Minispare wheel 3 in the storage compartment underneath the cargo compartment floor gt Fasten retaining screw 2 by turning it clockwise gt Reinstall storage box Q Warning A The dimensions of the Minispare wheel are different from those of the road wheels As a result the vehicle handling characteristics change when driving with a Minispare wheel mounted The Minispare wheel should only be used temporarily and should be replaced with a regular road wheel as quickly as possible Practical hints Where will I find In the case of a flat tire you may Minispare wheel bolts temporarily use the Minispare wheel when Wheel bolts must be used when observing the following restrictions mounting the Minispare wheel or other steel rims The use of any wheel bolts other than wheel bolts 2 for the 2 as Minispare wheel or other steel rims will e Drive to the nearest tire repair facility ar i
181. e the window will stop and open slightly Remove the obstruction pull the switch again past the resistance point and release If the window still does not close when there is no obstruction then pull and hold the switch again The side window will then close without the obstruction sensor function Warning A Driver s door only If within five seconds you again pull the switch past the resistance point and release the automatic reversal will not function Stopping windows gt Press or pull respective switch again Controls in detail Power windows Opening and closing the windows with the SmartKey The tilt sliding sunroof gt page 245 will also be opened or closed when the power windows are operated with the SmartKey Warning A Never operate the windows or tilt sliding sunroof if there is the possibility of anyone being harmed by the opening or closing pro cedure In the event that the procedure causes potential danger the procedure can be immediately halted by releasing the transmit button on the SmartKey To reverse direction of movement press button for opening or for closing Controls in detail Power windows gt Aim transmitter eye at the driver s door handle Opening Summer opening feature gt Press and hold button after unlocking the vehicle The windows and tilt sliding sunroof begin to open after approximately one second gt Release the button to stop
182. e Distance appears in the multifunction display The calculated range based on the current fuel tank level appears in the multifunction display Distance 312 mi P54 32 2391 31 TEL menu Warning A A driver s attention to the road must always be his her primary focus when driving For your safety and the safety of others we recommend that you pull over to a safe location and stop before placing or taking a telephone call If you choose to use the telephone while driving please use the hands free device and only use the telephone when weather road and traffic conditions permit Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a cellular telephone while driving a vehicle Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph approximately 50 km h your vehicle is covering a distance of 44 feet approximately 14 m every second Controls in detail Control system e If the telephone is off the message Answering a call PHONE OFF appears in the multifunction display Never operate radio transmitters equipped with a built in or attached antenna i e with When your telephone is ready to receive out being connected to an external antenna calls you can answer a call at any time In from inside the vehicle while the engine is e If the telephone is on the multifunction display you will then see running Doing so could lead to a malfunc the message j The telephone will then search for a tion of the v
183. e cruise control if the road traffic and weather conditions make it advisable to travel at a steady speed e The use of cruise control can be danger ous on winding roads or in heavy traffic because conditions do not allow safe driving at a steady speed e The use of cruise control can be danger ous on slippery roads Rapid changes in tire traction can result in wheel spin and loss of control e Deactivate cruise control when driving in fog The Resume function should only be oper ated if the driver is fully aware of the previ ously set speed and wishes to resume this particular preset speed 247 Controls in detail Driving systems Sets current or higher speed Sets current or lower speed Cancels cruise control Resumes at last set speed Setting current speed gt Accelerate or decelerate to the desired speed Briefly lift Q or depress the cruise control lever The current speed is set Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal Cruise control is activated i On uphill or downhill grades cruise control may not be able to maintain the set speed Once the grade eases the set speed will be resumed Canceling cruise control There are several ways to cancel cruise control gt or Step on the brake pedal Cruise control is canceled The last speed set is stored for later use Briefly push the cruise control lever to position Cruise control is can
184. e engine compartment to catch fire You could be seriously burned e Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns and can occur just by opening the hood Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam com ing from it Turn off the engine get out of the vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until the engine has cooled down During severe operating conditions e g stop and go traffic the coolant tempera ture may rise close to 248 F 120 C The engine should not be operated with the coolant temperature above 248 F 120 C Doing so may cause serious en gine damage which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Trip odometer gt Make sure you are viewing the trip odometer and main odometer in the multifunction display gt page 129 gt Ifitis not displayed press button or on the multifunction steering wheel gt page 130 until the trip odometer appears in the multifunction display gt Press and hold the reset button in the instrument cluster gt page 125 until the trip odometer is reset Tachometer The red marking on the tachometer gt page 24 denotes excessive engine speed Avoid driving at excessive engine speeds as it may result in serious engine damage that is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty To help protect the engine the fuel supply is interrupted if the engine is operated within the red marking Controls in detail I
185. e the SmartKey from the starter switch Have any passenger exit the vehicle at a safe distance from the roadway i Open door only when conditions are safe to do so Mounting the Minispare wheel Preparing the vehicle Prepare the vehicle as described on gt page 398 gt Take the wheel wrench the wheel bolts and the jack out of the storage compartment behind the left trim panel gt page 377 Take the Minispare wheel out of the storage compartment underneath the cargo compartment floor gt page 380 Lifting the vehicle gt Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by blocking wheels with wheel chocks or other sizable objects One wheel chock is included with the vehicle tool kit gt page 378 When changing wheel on a level surface gt Place the wheel chock in front of and another sizable object behind the wheel that is diagonally opposite to the wheel being changed When changing wheel on a hill gt Place the wheel chock and another sizable object on the downhill side blocking both wheels of the other axle Warning A The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up the vehicle at the jack take up brackets built into both sides of the vehicle To help avoid personal injury use the jack only to lift the vehicle during a wheel change Never get beneath the vehicle while it is supported by the jack Keep hands and feet away from the area under the lifted vehicle Always
186. e the seat belt buckle while the vehicle is in motion since the special seat belt retractor will be deactivated A statement by the child restraint man ufacturer of compliance with this stan dard can be found on the instruction label on the restraint and in the instruc tion manual provided with the restraint When using any infant or toddler re straint or booster seat be sure to care fully read and follow all manufacturer s instructions for installation and use Please read and observe warning labels affixed to the inside of the vehicle and to infant or child restraints Safety and Security Occupant safety Warning VAN According to accident statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seat ing position Thus we strongly recommend that children be placed in the rear seats whenever possible Regardless of seating position children 12 years old and under must be seated and properly secured in an appropriate infant or child restraint recom mended for the size and weight of the child The infant or child restraint must be properly secured with the vehicle s seat belt the seat belt and top tether strap or lower anchors and top tether strap fully in accordance with the child seat manufacturer s instruc tions gt D Safety and Security Occupant safety a4 Children can be killed or seriously injured by an inflating air bag Note the f
187. e used in conjunction with low beam headlamps Consult your State or Province Motor Vehicle Regulations regarding permis sible lamp operation i Fog lamps cannot be switched on with the exterior lamp switch in position W For switching on the fog lamps turn the exterior lamp switch to position first Controls in detail Lighting Front fog lamps gt Switch on the low beam headlamps gt page 116 gt Pull out the exterior lamp switch to first stop The front fog lamps switch on The green indicator lamp in the exterior lamp switch comes on gt page 116 gt Push in the exterior lamp switch The front fog lamps switch off The green indicator lamp in the exterior lamp switch goes out Controls in detail Lighting Rear fog lamp driver s side only Combination switch High beam gt Turn the exterior lamp switch to position BBY or BG gt page 116 gt Switch on the front fog lamps gt page 119 The combination switch is located on the left of the steering column gt Push the combination switch in direction of arrow Q to switch on the high beam gt Pull out the exterior lamp switch to second stop The rear fog lamp switches on The high beam headlamp indicator lamp E in the instrument cluster comes on gt page 24 The yellow indicator lamp in the exterior lamp switch comes on gt page 116 gt Pull the combination switch in direction of arrow to
188. each square inch of the tire Air pressure is expressed in pounds per square inch psi or kilopascal kPa or bars Operation Tires and wheels Aspect ratio Dimensional relationship between tire section height and section width expressed in percentage Bar Another metric unit for air pressure There are 14 5038 pounds per square inch psi to 1 bar there are 100 kilopascals kPa to 1 bar Bead The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim Cold tire inflation pressure Tire inflation pressure when your vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours or driven no more than one mile 1 6 km 327 Operation Tires and wheels Curb weight The weight of a motor vehicle with stan dard equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel oil and coolant and if so equipped air conditioning and additional optional equipment but without passen gers and cargo DOT Department of Transportation A tire branding symbol which denotes the tire meets requirements of the U S Department of Transportation GAWR Gross Axle Weight Rating The GAWR is the maximum permissible axle weight The gross vehicle weight on each axle must never exceed the GAWR for the front and rear axle indicated on the certification label located on the driver s door B pillar GVW Gross Vehicle Weight The GVW comprises the weight of the vehicle including fuel tools spa
189. eather upholstery 341 Light alloy wheels 340 MB Tex upholstery 342 Plastic and rubber parts Rear window 53 Seat belts 341 Steering wheel 341 Upholstery 341 Windows 340 Windshield 52 Wiper blades 340 Wood trims 342 342 Cleaning tires 306 Climate control 176 Clock 25 129 145 146 Closing Cup holder in rear seat armrest Glove box 258 Hood 297 Tailgate 101 Tilt sliding sunroof Tilt sliding sunroof inanemergency 385 Tilt sliding sunroof with SmartKey 245 Windows 239 240 Windows with SmartKey 241 Cloth upholstery Cleaning 342 Cockpit 22 439 Cockpit Management and Data System see COMAND Cold tire inflation pressure 327 Collapsible wheel chock 379 COMAND 439 COMAND see separate operating instructions 262 243 Combination switch 120 High beam flasher 49 Rear window wiper 53 Turn signals 50 Windshield wipers 50 Control and operation of radio transmitter 290 Control system 129 440 AUDIO menu 135 Convenience submenu 154 Display digital speedometer 135 Display outside temperature 135 Functions 130 133 Instrument cluster submenu 143 145 Lighting submenu 149 Menus 132 133 Multifunction display 129 Multifunction steering wheel 130 NAV menu 138 Selecting radio system 136 Selecting satellite radio system 136 Settings menu 140 Standard display menu 134 Submenu Time Date 145 Submenus 131 133 TEL menu 158 Trip computer menu 156 Vehicle status message memory menu 138 Vehicle sub
190. ed down Tab Eyelets on roof gt Pull out upper blind partition net by tab Q until it engages gt Fold the backrest forward gt page 254 Pull out upper blind fully Engage it into eyelets on the roof 2 Luggage cover Twin reel roller blind Closing Twin reel roller blind Guide rail P u luggage N Dae by kandile C gt Retract the partition net and luggage until it locks into position cover Opening gt Press handle down and release The luggage cover retracts automati cally With the luggage cover rolled up fold the lip down Controls in detail Loading Removing gt Fold the backrest forward gt page 254 gt Slide twin reel roller blind Q to left and remove Installing gt Fold the backrest forward gt page 254 gt Place twin reel roller blind into right and left guide rails gt Slide towards right to the end stop Controls in detail Loading Split rear bench seat To expand the cargo compartment you can fold down the left and right rear seat backrests The two sections can be folded down separately AN When expanding the luggage compartment always fold the seat cushions fully forward and always use the partition net when trans porting cargo Warning Unless you are transporting cargo the back rests must remain properly locked in the up right position In an accident during hard braking or sud
191. ehicle s electronic system pos network During this time the multi sibly resulting in an accident and or function display is empty TEL personal injury As soon as the telephone has found a G You can use the functions in the TEL menu network the message READY appears INCOMING to operate your telephone provided it is in the multifunction display connected to a hands free system and ee CALL switched on TEL gt Switch on the telephone and Audio or READY he U COMAND gt Press button Gage You have answered the call The duration of the call appears in the multifunction display gt Press button or on the steering wheel repeatedly until the message TEL appears in the multifunction display r P F P54 32 2392 31 Which messages will appear in the multifunction display depends on whether your telephone is switched on or off This standby message indicates that your telephone is ready for use and you can operate it using the control system Controls in detail Control system Ending a call gt Press button N You have ended the call The standby message appears in the multifunction display Dialing a number from the phone book If your telephone is ready to receive calls you may select and dial a number from the phone book at any time gt Press button or repeatedly until the message TEL appears in the multifunction display gt Press button ENN or RA The control system
192. eing played is displayed i If a button is not pressed within four seconds the radio will return to the standard display Storing stations gt gt Tune in desired station Press and hold desired station button to E until a brief signal tone is heard The frequency is stored on the selected station button The radio saves the current station at the memory preset selected The memory preset selected appears in the status line e g S3 There are ten presets available An existing entry is overwritten in the memory list when a new entry is given Calling up the ESN information menu gt Press INF soft key gt Press ESN soft key The twelve digit electronic serial number ESN of the SAT tuner installed in your vehicle is displayed gt Press RET soft key to exit the menu CD mode Safety precautions Warning A The single CD player and the CD changer are Class 1 laser products There is a danger of invisible laser radiation if the housing is opened or damaged Do not open the housing The single CD player and the CD changer do not contain any parts that can be serviced by the user For safety reasons have any service work which may be necessary performed only by qualified personnel Controls in detail Audio system Warning A In order to avoid distraction which could lead to an accident the driver should insert CDs with the vehicle at a standstill and operate the audio sys
193. el at any way in jeopardy when in the vehicle e g smoke or fire in the vehicle vehicle in a dangerous road location please do not wait for voice contact after you have pressed the emergency button Carefully leave the vehicle and move to a safe loca tion The Response Center will automatically contact local emergency officials with the vehicle s approximate location if they receive an automatic SOS signal and cannot make voice contact with the vehicle occu pants Controls in detail Useful features Roadside Assistance button Located below the center armrest cover is the Roadside Assistance button Bag gt Press and hold button for longer than two seconds A call to a Mercedes Benz Roadside Assistance dispatcher will be initiated The button will flash while the call is in progress The message Connecting call will appear in the multifunction display and the audio system is muted When the connection is established the message Call connected appears in the multifunction display The Tele Aid system will transmit data generating the vehicle identification number model color and location subject to availability of cellular and GPS signals A voice connection between the Roadside Assistance dispatcher and the occupants of the vehicle will be established gt Describe the nature of the need for assistance Controls in detail Useful features The Mercedes Benz Roadside Assistance dispatcher will
194. el with the control system When checking the oil level e the vehicle must be parked on level ground e with the engine at operating tempera ture the vehicle must have been stationary for at least five minutes with the engine turned off with the engine not at operating tem perature yet the vehicle must have been stationary for at least 30 minutes with the engine turned off To check the engine oil level via the multifunction display do the following gt Switch on ignition gt page 33 The standard display gt page 129 should appear in the multifunction display gt Press button R or Ba on the steering wheel until the following message is seen in the multifunction display Engine oil level Measurement in Progress Vehicle must be level for correct measurement P54 32 2398 31 One of the following messages will subsequently appear in the indicator Engine oil level OK Add 1 0 for max Canada Add 1 5 for max Canada Add 2 0 for max Canada qt engine oil oil level 1 0 1 qts engine oil oil level 1 5 1 qts engine oil oil level 22 0 1 i If you want to interrupt the checking procedure press the BA or EN button on the multifunction steering wheel gt If necessary add engine oil For adding engine oil see gt page 300 More information on engine oil can be found in the Technical data section gt page 429 and
195. eleased the force of the impact from the tensioning spring could crack the windshield Do not allow the wiper arms to contact the windshield glass without a wiper blade inserted Make certain that the wiper blades are properly installed Improperly installed wiper blades may cause windshield damage For your convenience we recommend that you have this work carried out by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Practical hints Flat tire A The dimensions of the Minispare wheel are different from those of the road wheels As a result the vehicle handling characteristics change when driving with a Minispare wheel mounted Adapt your driving style accord ingly The Minispare wheel is for temporary use only When driving with spare wheel mounted ensure proper tire inflation pressure and do not exceed a vehicle speed of 50 mph 80 km h Warning Drive to the nearest Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible to have the Minispare wheel replaced with a regular road wheel Never operate the vehicle with more than one Minispare wheel mounted Preparing the vehicle gt v v v YV Park the vehicle as far as possible from moving traffic on a hard surface Turn on the hazard warning flasher gt page 122 Turn the steering wheel so that the front wheels are in the straight ahead position Set the parking brake gt page 55 Move the gear selector lever to P Turn off the engine gt page 57 Remov
196. election marker is on the month setting Date Set MM m 23 72004 Q P54 32 2371 31 gt Press button or E to set the month Setting the date day This function can only be seen with audio system fi Vehicles with COMAND For information on setting the date refer to the separate COMAND operating instructions Move the selection marker with button or E to the Time Date submenu gt Press button EAN or RA repeatedly until the message Date Set day appears in the multifunction display v The selection marker is on the day setting Date Set day 0142004 P54 32 2370 31 gt Press button or E to set the day Setting the date year This function can only be seen with audio system i Vehicles with COMAND For information on setting the date refer to the separate COMAND operating instructions gt Move the selection marker with button or EJ to the Time Date submenu gt Press button EAN or Keg repeatedly until the message Date Set YY appears in the multifunction display The selection marker is on the year setting Date Set YY 0123 0 P54 32 2372 31 gt Press button or E to set the year Controls in detail Control system Lighting submenu Access the Lighting submenu via the Settings menu Use the Lighting submenu to change the lamp and lighting settings on your vehicle The following functions are available
197. ement interval published in the Maintenance Booklet is only applicable if MB 325 0 anticorrosion antifreeze solution or other Mercedes Benz approved products of equal specification see Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet are used to renew the coolant concentration or bring it back up to the proper level To provide important corrosion protection the solution must be at least 45 anticorrosion antifreeze equivalent to freeze protection to approx 22 F 30 C Technical data Fuels coolants lubricants etc If you use a solution that is more than 55 anticorrosion antifreeze freeze protection to approx 49 F 45 C the engine temperature will increase due to the lower heat transfer capability of the solution Therefore do not use more than this amount of anticorrosion antifreeze If the coolant level is low water and MB 325 0 anticorrosion antifreeze should be used to bring it up to the proper level have cooling system checked for signs of leakage Please make sure the mixture is in accordance with label instructions The water in the cooling system must meet minimum requirements which are usually satisfied by normal drinking water If you are not sure about the water quality consult an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Technical data Fuels coolants lubricants etc Anticorrosion antifreeze Failure to use such anticorrosion anti Before the start of the winter season or freeze cool
198. epeatedly refer to the separate COMAND Time synchronization with 145 until thie Lissa Tame la operating instructions REEI Uii w Head Unit appears in the Sane theme ours aie multifunction display gt Move the selection marker with The selection marker is on the current button or Egil to the Time Date Setting the time minutes 146 setting submenu Selecting time display mode 147 gt Press button BaN or R repeatedly Selecting automatic time change 147 et a until the message Time Hours appears Daylight Saving Time DST wehead Unit in the multifunction display be summer Standard time winter D Setting the date month 147 ma Setting the date day 148 Setting the date year 149 P54 32 2578 31 gt Press button or E to select the desired setting Controls in detail Control system gt The selection marker is on the hour setting P54 32 2366 31 gt Press button or E to set the hour Setting the time minutes The selection marker is on the minute This function can only be seen with audio setting system fi Vehicles with COMAND For information on setting the time refer to the separate COMAND operating instructions gt Move the selection marker with button or FJ to the Time Date submenu gt Press button EAN or RA repeatedly until the message Time Minutes appears in the multifunction display P54 32 2367 31 gt Press button or E to set the minutes Se
199. er come on If a lamp in the instrument cluster fails to come on when the ignition is switched on have it checked and replaced if necessary If a lamp in the instrument cluster re mains on after starting the engine or comes on while driving refer to Lamps in instrument cluster gt page 344 3 Starting position Getting started Unlocking i When you switch on the ignition the indicator and warning lamps except low beam headlamp indicator lamp high beam headlamp indicator lamp and turn signal indicator lamps unless activated in the instrument cluster come on This indicates that the respective systems are operational The indicator and warning lamps except low beam headlamp indicator lamp high beam headlamp indicator lamp and turn signal indicator lamps if activated should go out when the engine is running i The SmartKey can only be removed from the starter switch with the gear selector lever in position P If the SmartKey cannot be turned in the starter switch the battery may not be sufficiently charged e Check the battery and charge it if necessary gt page 403 e Geta jump start gt page 406 To prevent accelerated battery discharge and a possible dead battery always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch when the engine is not in operation V Adjusting Warning A All seat head restraint steering wheel and rear view mirror adjustments as well as fas tening of
200. er compart ment needs to be quickly heated or cooled down Warning A Never operate the side windows and the tilt sliding sunroof if there is the possibility of anyone being harmed by the closing pro cedure In the event that the closing procedure causes potential danger the closing of the side windows can be immediately halted by pressing or pulling the respective window switch The closing of the tilt sliding sunroof can be immediately halted by moving the tilt sliding sunroof switch in the overhead control panel in any direction The closing of the side windows and tilt sliding sunroof can be reversed by again pressing and holding the button J Controls in detail Automatic climate control Deactivating gt Press button gt page 187 The indicator lamp on the button goes out If you keep button EE pressed the side windows an tilt sliding sunroof will return to their previous position Controls in detail Automatic climate control Air conditioning The air conditioning is operational while the engine is running and cools the interior air to the temperature set by the operator i Condensation may drip out from under neath the vehicle This is normal and not an indication of a malfunction Warning VAN If you turn off the cooling function the vehicle will not be cooled when weather conditions are warm The windows can fog up more quickly Window fogging may impair vis
201. eration 290 Range distance to empty Calling up 158 Reading lamp 123 Rear bench seat Foldable 254 Rear door window Blocking operation 82 Rear fog lamp 389 Bulb 389 Indicator lamp 116 Switching on 120 Rear lamp bulbs Replacing 395 Rear lamps Messages in display 371 374 Rear lamps see Tail lamps Reconnecting Replacing Rear outer seats Vehicle battery 405 Backup lamp bulbs 396 Adjusting head restraint height 108 Recovery services Brake lamp bulbs 396 Rear passenger compartment For stolen vehicle 273 Bulbs 388 Adjustable air vents 185 198 Refrigerant Fog lamp bulb rear 396 Rear seat ashtray 263 Air conditioning 431 Front lamp bulbs 389 391 Rear seat head restraints 108 Refueling 293 Fuses 413 Adjusting 108 Regular checks 295 High beam bulbs 392 Adjusting tilt 110 Reinstalling vehicle battery 404 High beam bulbs Folding back 109 Remote control xenon type headlamps 393 Installing 110 SmartKey 96 License plate lamp bulbs 396 Outer seats 110 Remote door unlock Low beam bulbs 391 Placing upright 109 With Tele Aid 273 Parking lamp bulbs front 392 394 Removing 110 Removing Parking lamp bulbs rear 396 Rear view mirrors see Mirrors Parcel net in cargo compartment 251 Rear lamp bulbs 389 395 Rear window defroster 175 Twin reel roller blind 253 Side marker lamp bulbs front 394 Rear window wiper 53 Vehicle battery 404 Side marker lamp bulbs rear 396 Intermittent wiping 53 Wheel 400 Standing lamp bulbs front 392 394 Wiping rear wind
202. erefore only use approved engine oils and oil filters required for vehicles with Maintenance System U S vehicles or FSS Canada vehicles For a listing of approved engine oils and oil filters refer to the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet or contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Using engine oils and oil filters of specification other than those expressly required for the Maintenance System U S vehicles or FSS Canada vehicles or changing of oil and oil filter at change intervals longer than those called for by the Maintenance System U S vehicles or FSS Canada Vehicles will result in engine damage not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Please follow Maintenance System U S vehicles or FSS Canada vehicles recommendations for scheduled oil changes Failure to do so will result in engine damage not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Engine oil additives Do not blend oil additives with engine oil They may damage the engine Damage or malfunctions resulting from blending oil additives are not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Air conditioning refrigerant R 134a HFC refrigerant and special PAG lubricating oil are used in the air conditioning system Never use R 12 CFC or mineral based lubricating oil Otherwise damage to the system will occur Technical data Fuels coolants lubricants etc Brake fluid During vehicle operation the boili
203. ers or combine them into one call Note that the features described here are depending on availability from your mobile phone service provider e Placing accepting a second call gt Place new call by entering telephone number manually gt Press button You are connected to the second caller the first caller is kept on hold or b gt Controls in detail Audio system gt gt gt Press button to accept a e Terminating a call TDMA or CDMA network phones second call PMs button Using your Mercedes Benz specified i The current call is terminated You mobile telephone a number of functions You will be notified of the second call are again connected with the caller and operating steps can be performed and acoustically but you will not see this in previously placed on hold displayed in the audio system display the display e Combining two calls Further operating instructions not covered here can be found in the operating instruc gt Press EM and buttons You are connected with the second ES tions for the multifunction steering wheel caller the first caller is kept on hold The calls are combined into one and the mobile telephone ari call e Switching between calls a If your audio system is set up for telephone gt Press and buttons e Terminating a combined call operation the symbol will appear in the display This switches between the calls gt Press butto ii The non active call is kept on hold The connec
204. ery checked When the voltage is above this value again the BAS is operational again gt Continue driving with added caution Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident gt Continue driving with added caution gt Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident Practical hints What to do if Display message ESP unavailable See Operator s Manual Possible cause The ESP was deactivated because of a malfunction or interrupted power supply The ABS might not be operational The brake system is still functioning normally but without the ESP available If the yellow ESP warning lamp flashes while driving and this message appears the electronic traction system has switched off to prevent overheating of the drive wheel brakes The self diagnosis has not been completed yet The brake system is still functioning normally but without the ESP available The charging voltage has fallen below ten volts The ESP has switched off The battery might not be charged sufficiently Possible solution gt Continue driving with added caution p gt Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident
205. es wear unevenly adversely affect handling and fuel economy and are more likely to fail from being overheated Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit or vehicle capacity weight as indicated on the placard on the driver s door B pillar Overloading the tires can overheat them possibly causing a blowout Potential problems associated with underinflated and overinflated tires Underinflated tire inflation pressure Underinflated tires can e cause excessive and uneven tire wear e adversely affect fuel economy e lead to tire failure from being overheated e adversely affect handling characteristics Warning A Follow recommended tire inflation pressures Do not underinflate tires Underinflated tires wear excessively and or unevenly adversely affect handling and fuel economy and are more likely to fail from being overheated Overinflated tire inflation pressure Overinflated tires can e adversely affect handling characteristics e cause uneven tire wear e be more prone to damage from road hazards e adversely affect ride comfort e increase stopping distance Warning A Follow recommended tire inflation pressures Do not overinflate tires Overinflated tires can adversely affect handling and ride comfort wear unevenly increase stopping distance and result in sudden deflation blowout because they are more likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris potholes etc
206. fication exhaust emission standards Engine number engraved on engine VIN visible lower edge of windshield Vacuum line routing diagram label When ordering parts please specify vehicle identification and engine numbers Technical data Layout of poly V belt drive V Layout of poly V belt drive C 240 all models P13 22 2040 31 Automatic belt tensioner Power steering pump Air conditioning compressor Crankshaft Coolant pump Generator alternator Idler pulley Technical data Engine Model C 240 203 261 C 240 4MATIC 203 281 Engine 112 Mode of operation 4 stroke engine gasoline injection No of cylinders 6 Bore 3 54 in 89 90 mm Stroke 2 68 in 68 20 mm Total piston displacement 158 5 cu in 2597 cm Compression ratio 10 5 1 Output acc to SAE J 1349 168 hp 5500 rpm 125 kW 5500 rpm Maximum torque acc to SAE J 1349 177 b ft 4500 rpm 240 Nm 4500 rpm Maximum engine speed 6200 rpm Firing order 1 4 3 6 2 5 Poly V belt 2380 mm The quoted data apply only to the standard vehicle See an authorized Mercedes Benz Center for the corresponding data of all special bodies and special equipment 2 Premium fuel required Performance may vary with fuel octane rating Y Rims and Tires Only use tires and rims which have been specifically developed for your vehicle and tested and approved by Mercedes Benz Other tires and rims can have detrimental effects such as
207. firmly set parking brake and block wheels before raising vehicle with jack Do not disengage parking brake while the vehicle is raised Be certain that the jack is always vertical plumb line when in use especially on hills Always try to use the jack on level surface Make sure the jack arm is fully seated in the jack take up bracket Al ways lower the vehicle onto sufficient ca pacity jackstands before working under the vehicle Practical hints Flat tire P40 10 3340 31 On wheel to be changed loosen but do not yet remove the wheel bolts approximately one full turn with wrench Practical hints Flat tire The jack take up brackets are located directly behind the front wheel housings and in front of the rear wheel housings P40 10 3349 31 Take up bracket Jack gt Place jack on firm ground gt Position jack under take up bracket so that it is always vertical plumb line as seen from the side even if the vehicle is parked on an incline F DAT as P40 00 2040 31 gt Jack up the vehicle until the wheel is a maximum of 1 2 in 3 cm from the ground Never start engine while vehicle is raised Warning A The jack is intended only for lifting the vehicle briefly for wheel changes It is not suited for performing maintenance work under the vehicle e Never start the engine when the vehicle is raised e Never lie down under the raised vehicle Removing the wheel
208. for rear lamps E Weights 428 Technical data cceeseeeeees 417 Fuels coolants lubricants etc 429 PartS S rviCe mensie nukta s 418 Capacities cccscsicciesscesteaecavessaent ent 429 Warranty Coverage eeeeeeseeeeeeees 419 EM SING ONS intenni 431 Loss of Service and Warranty Engine oil additives 0 431 Information Booklet c60 419 Air conditioning refrigerant 431 Identification labels eee 420 Brake fluid ss cccccsciecsisstesssecesssasendes 431 Layout of poly V belt drive 421 Premium unleaded gasoline 432 C 240 all models ee eee 421 Fuel requirements esceeeees 432 EM SING ciris onena A 422 Gasoline additives 0000000000 433 Rims ANA Tires sesseeessesessesssesesresesses 423 Flexible Fuel Vehicles 6 433 SAME SIZE tires 424 Coola Eini 435 Minispare wheel neeesser 425 Windshield washer and Electrical SySteM eee eeeeeeeeeee 426 headlamp cleaning system 437 Main Dimensions ccccccseseeeeeees 427 Vv Product information Please observe the following in your own best interest We recommend using genuine Mercedes Benz parts as well as conversion parts and accessories explicitly approved by us for your vehicle model We have tested these parts to determine their reliability safety and special suitability for Mercedes Benz vehicles We are unable to make an assessmen
209. g gt page 406 the gear selector lever will remain locked in position P For informa tion on manually unlocking the transmission gear selector lever see gt page 384 Installing towing eye bolt P88 20 2548 31 Cover on right side of rear bumper Practical hints Towing the vehicle Removing cover gt Press mark on cover Q or in direction of arrows gt Lift cover off to reveal threaded hole for towing eye bolt The towing eye bolt is supplied with the tool kit located behind the left hand trim panel in cargo compartment gt Screw towing eye bolt in to its stop and tighten with lug wrench Reinstalling cover gt Fit cover or and snap into place Practical hints Fuses The electrical fuses in your vehicle serve to stop the supply of electricity to a device that is malfunctioning This helps to prevent damage to the other vehicle electronics The following aids are available to help you change fuses gt page 413 e Fuse chart e Spare fuses e Fuse extractor AN Only use fuses approved for Mercedes Benz with the specified amperage for the system in question Otherwise a short circuit could result and cause a fire Warning EB Only install fuses that have been tested and approved by Mercedes Benz and that have the specified amperage rating Otherwise electrical parts or systems could be damaged Never attempt to repair or bridge a blown fuse H
210. g Release parking brake by pulling on handle Q The warning lamp USA only or Canada only in the instrument cluster goes out Driving gt gt Depress the brake pedal Move gear selector lever to position D orR i Wait for the gear selection process to complete before setting the vehicle in motion Release the brake pedal Carefully depress the accelerator Once the vehicle is in motion the auto matic central locking system engages and the locking knobs drop down i You can open a locked door from the inside Open door only when conditions are safe to do so You can deactivate the automatic locking using the control system gt page 153 Simultaneously depressing the accelerator pedal and applying the brake reduces engine performance and causes premature brake and drivetrain wear If you hear a warning signal when driv ing off you have forgotten to release the parking brake Release the parking brake After a cold start the automatic transmis sion shifts at a higher engine revolution This allows the catalytic converter to reach its operating temperature earlier A On slippery road surfaces never downshift in order to obtain braking action This could result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehi cle control Your vehicle s ABS will not pre vent this type of loss of control Warning Place the gear selector lever in position P or R only when the vehicle is stopped i
211. ge is available Telematics A combination of the terms tele communications and informatics Tightening torque Force times lever arm e g a lug wrench with which threaded fasteners such as wheel bolts are tightened TIN Tire Identification Number gt page 329 Tire load rating gt page 329 Tire ply composition and material used Vehicle capacity weight page 329 Tire speed rating page 330 Traction Tread page 330 page 330 Treadwear indicators page 330 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards page 330 gt page 330 Vehicle maximum load on the tire gt page 330 VIN Vehicle Identification Number The number set by the manufacturer and placed on the body to uniquely identify each vehicle produced A ABS 85 439 ABS control 85 Indicator lamp 25 Malfunction indicator lamp 344 Messages in display 358 Accelerator position automatic transmission 169 Accessory weight 327 Accident Incase of 54 Activating Air conditioning cooling 184 196 Air recirculation mode 182 193 Anti theft alarm system 92 Automatic climate control 187 Central locking control system 153 Charcoal filter 195 Climate control 177 Climate control system 179 Defrosting 181 Automatic climate control 192 Easy entry exit feature 154 ESP 89 Exterior headlamps 49 Exterior lamps 117 Exterior rear view mirror parking position 173 Hazard warning flasher 122
212. ger than the typical 12 month old child the front passenger front air bag may or may not be activated gt page 75 Deployment of the driver front air bag does not mean that the front passenger front air bag also should have deployed The Occupant Classification System gt page 73 may have determined e that the seat was empty or occupied by the weight up to or less than that of a typical 12 month old child seated in a standard child restraint both instances where the system suppresses deployment of the front passenger front air bag even though the impact met the cri teria and was of sufficient severity to deploy the driver front air bag that the seat was occupied by a small individual such as a young teenager or a small adult or a child weighing more than the weight of a typical 12 month old child in a standard child restraint instances where the system may suppress deployment of the front passenger front air bag even though the impact met the criteria and was of sufficient severity to deploy the driver front air bag Safety and Security Occupant safety The indicator lamp is located in the center console Front passenger front air bag off indicator lamp The indicator lamp will be illuminated except with the SmartKey removed or in starter switch position 0 Safety and Security Occupant safety Warning VAN If the EY indicator lamp and the indicator lamp are lit at the same ti
213. gt or Press 4 or 11 softkey repeatedly until the desired sound setting has been reached The sound is set accordingly Press RES soft key briefly The sound setting is reset depending on the sound source activated e Radio mode STANDARD e CD AUX mode SURROUND e Telephone SPEECH The radio switches back to the standard radio menu eight seconds after the last soft key is pressed Controls in detail Audio system Returning sound functions to factory Vehicles with sound system settings The sound setting is reset depending gt Press button to call up settings on the sound source activated menu in the display e Radio mode STANDARD e CD AUX mode SURROUND e Telephone SPEECH P82 60 4470 31 gt Press www or soft key The radio switches back to the standard radio menu four seconds The volume is distributed accordingly after the last soft key is pressed between the front and rear of the P82 60 4452 31 vehicle gt Press RES soft key briefly the respec Adjusting volume distribution i N 3 or tive sound function is reset to its center Call up fader and balance functions by gt Press RES soft key briefly Ai pressing the REJ button or The fader is reset to its center level gt Press and hold RES soft key until RESET Fader The radio switches back to the appears in the display gt Press REJ button repeatedly until standard radio menu eight seconds i i fter the last soft key i d
214. gt Briefly press the gear selector lever to the left in the D direction The transmission will shift from the current gear to the next lower gear as permitted by the shift program This action simulta neously limits the gear range of the transmission gt page 165 Warning A On slippery road surfaces never downshift in order to obtain braking action This could result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control Your vehicle s ABS will not prevent this type of loss of control i To avoid overrevving the engine when the gear selector lever is moved to the D direction the transmission will not shift to a lower gear if the engine s max speed would be exceeded Upshifting gt Briefly press the gear selector lever to the right in the D direction The transmission will shift from the current gear to the next higher gear as permitted by the shift program This action simul taneously extends the gear range of the transmission Canceling gear range limit gt Press and hold the gear selector lever in the D direction until D reappears in the multifunction display The transmission will shift from the current gear range directly to gear range D Shifting into optimal gear range gt Press and hold the gear selector lever in the D direction The transmission will automatically select the gear range suited for optimal acceleration and deceleration This will involve shifting down one or more gears
215. gt Turn handwheel 2 forward or back ward until your upper legs are lightly supported Seat backrest tilt gt Switch on ignition gt page 33 gt Press switch 3 in direction of arrow until your arms are slightly angled when holding the steering wheel Seat height gt Switch on ignition gt page 33 gt Press switch in direction of arrow until your legs are lightly supported I is C Release button Raising gt Manually adjust the height of the head restraint by pulling it upward Lowering gt To lower head the restraint push release button and push down on the head restraint Warning A For your protection drive only with properly positioned head restraints Adjust head restraint so that the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at eye level This will reduce the poten tial for injury to the head and neck in the event of an accident or similar situation Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head restraints Head restraints are intend ed to help reduce injuries during an acci dent i Adjust the head restraint in such a way that it is as close to the head as possible Getting started Adjusting Head restraint tilt Mal Manually adjust the angle of the head restraint gt Push or pull on the lower edge of the head restraint cushion For more information see Seats gt page 105 Getting started Adjusting
216. h release button and pull out head restraint Installing rear seat head restraints gt Insert head restraint and push it down until it engages gt Push button and adjust head restraint to desired position Multicontour seats This multicontour seat has a movable seat cushion and inflatable air cushions built into the backrest to provide additional lumbar and side support The seat cushion movement backrest cushion height and curvature can be continuously varied with switches on the side of the seat after switching on ignition Controls in detail Seats gt Switch on ignition gt page 33 Seat cushion depth gt Adjust the seat cushion depth to the length of your upper leg using switch Q Backrest contour gt Adjust the contour of the backrest to the desired position using switches 2 and Backrest side bolsters Seat cushion depth Backrest bottom Backrest center Backrest side bolster adjustment gt Adjust the backrest side bolsters so that they provide good lateral support using switch Controls in detail Seats Seat heating The red indicator lamps in the switch Switching on seat heating show the heating level selected The switches for the front seats are gt Press switch twice located in the center console Level Three red indicator lamps in the 3 Three indicator lamps on switch come on After approximately five minutes
217. h the tailgate closed as exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle interior i Do not place the SmartKey in the open cargo compartment You may lock yourself out i If the vehicle was previously centrally locked the tailgate lid will lock auto matically when closed The turn signals will flash three times to confirm lock ing Automatic central locking The doors and the tailgate automatically lock when the ignition is switched on and the wheels are turning at vehicle speeds of approximately 9 mph 15 km h or more You can open a locked door from the inside Open door only when conditions are safe to do so i The doors unlock automatically after an accident if the force of the impact exceeds a preset threshold To prevent the vehicle door locks from locking deactivate the automatic central locking when the vehicle e is pushed or towed e is on a test stand You can deactivate the automatic locking using the control system see Setting au tomatic locking gt page 153 Locking and unlocking from the inside You can lock or unlock the doors and the tailgate from inside using the central lock ing or unlocking switch This can be useful for example if you want to lock the vehicle before starting to drive You cannot lock or unlock the fuel filler flap with the central locking or unlocking switch Warning A When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch ta
218. he front passenger front air bag on or off based on the classified occupant size category determined by weight sensor Power train Collective term designating all components used to generate and transmit motive power to the drive axles including detonation knocking The average of readings from the seat SAT both the MON Motor Octane Nu nber PREN z s clutch torque converter RON R Occupant distribution and gt RON esearch Octane Nun ber eee A gt 329 e transmission is posted at the pump also known as gt page ANTI KNOCK INDEX Overspeed range e transfer case Engine speeds within the red marking e drive shaft Multifunction display Display field in the instrument cluster used to present information provided by the control system of the tachometer dial Avoid this engine speed range as it may result in serious engine damage that is not e axle shafts axles covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Poly V belt drive Drives engine components alternator AC compressor etc from the engine e differential Production options weight Multifunction steering wheel 8 gt page 329 Steering wheel with buttons for operating the control system Program mode selector switch Used to switch the automatic trans mission between standard operation S and comfort operation C Normal occupant weight gt page 329 PSI Pounds per square inch gt page 329 Recommended tire inflation pressure gt
219. he battery is located in the engine compartment on the right hand side The terminals for jump starting are located in front of the battery gt Make sure the two vehicles do not touch gt Turn off all electrical consumers Apply parking brake Shift gear selector lever to position P Practical hints gt Q Positive terminal of charged battery Positive under hood terminal in front of discharged battery gt Negative under hood terminal in front of discharged battery Negative terminal of charged battery Jump starting Connect negative terminal of the charged battery with negative under hood terminal 3 in front of the discharged battery with the jumper cables Clamp cable to charged battery first Start the engine of the disabled vehicle You can now again turn on the electrical consumers Do not turn on the lights under any circumstances Remove the jumper cables first from negative terminals 3 and and then from positive terminals 2 and You can now turn on the lights gt Connect positive terminal of the charged battery with positive under hood terminal in front of the discharged battery with the jumper cables Clamp cable to charged battery Q first gt gt Start engine of the vehicle with the charged battery and run at idle speed Have the battery checked at the near est authorized Mercedes Benz Center Do not tow start the vehicle 407 Pra
220. he gear selector lever in position P to secure the vehicle Effect The SmartKey can only be removed from the starter switch with the gear selector lever in position P With the SmartKey removed the gear selector lever is locked in position P If the vehicle s electrical system is malfunctioning the gear selector lever could remain locked in position P gt page 384 Reverse gear Place gear selector lever in position R only when vehicle is stopped Effect Neutral No power is transmitted from the engine to the drive axle When the brakes are released the vehicle can be moved freely pushed or towed To avoid damage to the trans mission never engage N while driving If the ESP is deactivated or malfunctioning Move gear selector lever to N only if the vehicle is in danger of skidding e g on icy roads Drive The transmission shifts automatically All five forward gears are available Coasting the vehicle or driving for any other reason with gear selector lever in N can result in transmission damage that is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Warning A Getting out of your vehicle with the gear selector lever not fully engaged in position P is dangerous Also position P alone is not intended to or capable of preventing your vehicle from moving possibly hitting people or objects Always set the parking brake in addition to shifting to position P gt page 55 When pa
221. he lifted vehicle Always i torage position Towing eye bolt firmly st parking Drake and block wheels a before raising vehicle with jack gt Remove vehicle jack from its Wheel wrench i PEATSE Do not disengage parking brake while the compartment e Alignment bolt vehicle is raised Be certain that the jack is gt Push crank handle up always vertical plumb line when in use especially on hills Always try to use the jack on level surface Make sure the jack arm is e Fuse extractor fully seated in the jack take up bracket Always lower the vehicle onto sufficient capacity jackstands before working under e Collapsible wheel chock the vehicle e Vehicle jack e Spare wheel bolts e Spare fuses e A pair of gloves 378 x P40 10 2774 31 Operational position gt Turn crank handle clockwise until it engages operational position Before storing the vehicle jack in its compartment e It should be fully collapsed e The handle must be folded in storage position Setting up the collapsible wheel chock The collapsible wheel chock serves to additionally secure the vehicle e g while changing the wheel wy amp yp A P40 10 2776 31 Tilt the plates upward 2 Fold the lower plate outward Insert the plate Practical hints Where will I find Tilt both plates upward Q Fold the lower plate outward 2 Guide the tabs of the lower plate all the way into the openings of the bas
222. he reservoir e for warm coolant is approx 0 6 in 1 5 cm higher gt Add coolant as required gt Replace and tighten cap For more information on coolant see Coolants gt page 435 Operation Engine compartment Battery Your vehicle s battery is located in the engine compartment on the right hand side gt page 403 The battery should always be sufficiently charged in order to achieve its rated service life Refer to Maintenance Booklet for battery maintenance intervals If you use your vehicle mostly for short distance trips you will need to have the battery charge checked more frequently When replacing the battery always use batteries approved by Mercedes Benz If you do not intend to operate your vehicle for an extended period of time consult an authorized Mercedes Benz Center about steps you need to observe o gt gt Observe all safety instructions and precautions when handling automotive batteries Risk of explosion Keep flames or sparks away from battery Do not smoke Battery acid is caustic Do not allow it to come into contact with skin eyes or clothing In case it does immediately flush affected area with clear water and seek medical help if necessary Wear eye protection Keep children away Follow the instructions in this Operator s Manual ee Batteries contain materials that can harm the environment if disposed of improperly Recycling of b
223. hicle and do not stand near the vehicle until the engine has cooled down V At the gas station Refueling Warning A Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous It burns violently and can cause serious injury Whenever you are around gasoline avoid inhaling fumes and skin contact extinguish all smoking materials Never allow sparks flame or smoking materials near gasoline Warning A Flexible Fuel Vehicles only identified by a label reading Premium gasoline or E85 only on fuel filler flap Ethanol fuel E85 and its vapors are highly flammable poisonous and burn easily Etha nol fuel can cause serious injuries if ignited or if you come into contact with it or inhale fumes of it Avoid inhalation of ethanol fumes and skin contact with ethanol Extin guish all open flames before refueling Never smoke or create sparks close to ethanol Operation At the gas station The fuel filler flap is located on the right hand side of the vehicle towards the rear Locking unlocking the vehicle with the SmartKey automatically locks unlocks the fuel filler flap To open the fuel filler flap To insert the fuel filler cap Tire inflation pressure table gt Turn the engine off by turning the SmartKey to position 0 gt Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch DD Operation At the gas station gt gt gt Open the fuel filler flap by pushing at the point indicated by arrow Q The fuel fi
224. hints gt page 348 and gt page 360 Switching off the ESP Warning A The ESP should not be switched off during normal driving other than in the circum stances described below Disabling of the system will reduce vehicle stability in stan dard driving maneuvers To improve the vehicle s traction turn off the ESP in driving situations where it would be advantageous to have the drive wheels spin and thus cut into surfaces for better grip such as starting out on slippery surfaces and in deep snow in conjunction with snow chains in sand or gravel Turn on the ESP immediately if the aforementioned circumstances do not apply anymore When you switch off the ESP the ESP does not stabilize the vehicle the engine output is not limited which allows the drive wheels to spin and thus cut into surfaces for better grip the traction control will still brake a spinning wheel the ESP continues to operate when you are braking e When the ESP is switched off and one or more drive wheels are spinning the ESP warning lamp in the speed ometer flashes However the ESP will then not stabilize the vehicle Safety and Security Driving safety systems The switch is located on the center console Warning A When the ESP warning lamp is illuminated continuously the ESP is switched off Adapt your speed and driving to the prevail ing road conditions and to the non operating status of the ESP A
225. ibility and endanger you and others Deactivating It is possible to deactivate the air condi tioning cooling function of the automatic climate control system The air in the vehicle will then no longer be cooled or dehumidified Automatic climate contro panel design A gt Press button gt page 187 The indicator lamp on the button comes on The cooling function switches off after a short delay Automatic climate contro panel design B gt Press button gt page 187 The indicator lamp on the button goes out The cooling function switches off after a short delay Activating Moist air can fog up the windows You can dehumidify the air with the air condi tioning Automatic climate contro panel design A gt Press button gt page 187 again The indicator lamp on the button goes out The cooling function is switched on Automatic climate contro panel design B gt Press button gt page 187 again The indicator lamp on the button comes on The cooling function is switched on The air conditioning uses the refrigerant R134a This refrigerant is free of CFCs which are harmful to the ozone layer If the air conditioning cannot be turned on again this indicates that the air conditioning is losing refrigerant The compressor has turned itself off Have the air conditioning checked at the nearest authorized Mercedes Benz Center Residual heat and ventilation available on a
226. icle brakes and tires or the traction af forded The ABS cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydroplaning Only a safe atten tive and skillful driver can prevent acci dents The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck less or dangerous manner which could jeop ardize the user s safety or the safety of others Warning For more information see Practical hints gt page 344 and gt page 358 BAS The Brake Assist System BAS operates in emergency situations If you apply the brakes very quickly the BAS automatically provides full brake boost thereby poten tially reducing the braking distance Apply continuous full braking pressure until the emergency braking situation is over The ABS will prevent the wheels from locking When you release the brake pedal the brakes function again as normal The BAS is then deactivated Warning A If the BAS is malfunctioning the brake sys tem is still functioning normally but without the additional brake boost available that BAS would normally provide in an emergen cy braking maneuver Therefore the braking distance may increase Warning VAN The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction
227. ight load tire C D E designates load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure DOT Tire Identification Number TIN U S tire regulations require each new tire manufacturer or tire retreader to mold a TIN into or onto a sidewall of each tire produced The TIN is a unique identifier which facili tates efforts by tire manufactures to notify purchasers in recall situations or other safety matters concerning tires and gives purchasers the means to easily identify such tires The TIN is comprised of Manufacturer s identification mark Tire size Tire type code and Date of manufacture DOT Manufacturer s identification mark Tire size Tire type code at the option of the tire manufacturer Date of manufacture For illustration purposes only Actual data on tires is specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in above illustration DOT Department of Transportation A tire branding symbol Q gt page 322 which denotes the tire meets require ments of the U S Department of Transpor tation Manufacturer s identification mark The manufacturer s identification mark 2 gt page 322 denotes the tire manufacturer New tires have a mark with two symbols Retreaded tires have a mark with four sym bols For more information on retreaded tires see gt page 304 Tire size The code 8 gt page 322
228. ilable at any Mercedes Benz Center Practical hints Replacing SmartKey batteries SmartKey gt Insert mechanical key in side gt Using a lint free cloth insert new opening and push grey slide batteries 3 under contact spring Replacement batteries Lithium type with the plus side facing up CR 2025 or equivalent Battery compartment is unlatched gt Return battery compartment 2 into gt Pull battery compartment 2 out of the y P housing until it locks into place R h hanical k S gt Remove the mechanicalkey housing in direction of arrow gt 382 iP page gt Slide mechanical key Q back into the SmartKey gt Remove the batteries gt Check the operation of the SmartKey P80 35 2194 31 Mechanical key P80 35 2107 31 Battery compartment Battery Contact spring 387 Practical hints Replacing bulbs Safe vehicle operation depends on proper exterior lighting and signaling It is there fore essential that all bulbs and lamp assemblies are in good working order at all times Correct headlamp adjustment is extremely important Have headlamps checked and readjusted at regular intervals and when a bulb has been replaced See an authorized Mercedes Benz Center for headlamp adjustment 388 If the headlamps or front fog lamps are fogged up on the inside as a result of high humidity driving the vehicle a distance with the lights on should c
229. ill driving Cruise control 248 Upholstery Cleaning 341 Upshifting 164 Useful features 258 Ashtrays 262 Cigarette lighter 264 Electrical outlet 264 Interior storage spaces 258 Tele Aid 266 Telephone 265 V Vacuum line routing diagram label 420 Vehicle Individual settings 140 142 Locking 103 Locking in an emergency 383 Lowering 402 Performance in cold weather 434 Performance in hot weather 434 Service battery 403 Towing 408 Unlocking 103 Unlocking in an emergency 382 With flexible fuel 433 Vehicle battery 403 Vehicle capacity weight 330 Vehicle care 337 Cloth upholstery 342 Cup holders 341 Engine cleaning 339 Gear selector lever 341 Hard plastic trim items 341 Headlamps 339 Instrument cluster 340 Leather upholstery 341 Light alloy wheels 340 MB Tex upholstery 342 Ornamental moldings 339 Paintwork 338 Plastic and rubber parts 342 Power washer 338 Seat belts 341 Side markers 339 Steering wheel 341 Tail lamps 339 Tar stains 338 Turn signals 339 Upholstery 341 Vehicle washing 339 Window cleaning 340 Wiper blades 340 Wood trims 342 Vehicle Identification Number see VIN Vehicle jack 378 Vehicle lighting Checking 295 Vehicle loading terminology 327 Vehicle maximum load on the tire 330 Vehicle status message memory 138 Calling up 138 Clearing 139 Vehicle status messages Displaying 139 Vehicle tool kit 377 Alignment bolt 378 Collapsible wheel chock 378 Fuse extractor 378 Gloves 378 Jack 378 Spare fuses 378 S
230. in if prevailing road conditions per mit Possible acceleration or deceleration differences arising from returning to preset speed could cause an accident and or seri ous injury to you and others Warning gt Briefly push cruise control lever to position The cruise control resumes the last set speed gt Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal Controls in detail Loading Roof rack Warning A Only use roof racks approved by Mercedes Benz for your vehicle model to avoid damage to the vehicle Follow manu facturer s installation instructions gt Attach the roof rack only to the roof rails gt Secure the roof rack according to manufacturer s instructions for installation Load the roof rack in such a way that the vehicle cannot be damaged while driving Make sure e you can fully raise the tilt sliding sunroof e you can fully open the tailgate Parcel net in cargo compartment There is a parcel net located on left side of the cargo compartment Dependent on the equipment of your vehicle there is another parcel net located on right side of the car go compartment Warning A The parcel net is designed only to carry light loads Do not place heavy or fragile objects or ob jects having sharp edges in the parcel net In an accident during hard braking or sud den maneuvers they could be thrown around inside the vehicle and cause injury to vehicle occupants P68
231. in this manual e the Technical data section in this manual e traffic rules and regulations e motor vehicle laws and safety standards Warning A Various warning labels are attached to your vehicle These warning labels are intended to make you and others aware of various risks You should not remove any of these warning labels unless explicitly instructed to do so by information on the label itself Removal of any of these labels may cause you and others to be unaware of certain risks which may result in an accident and or personal injury Introduction Problems with your vehicle Y Problems with your vehicle If you should experience a problem with your vehicle particularly one that you believe may affect its safe operation we urge you to immediately contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center to have the problem diagnosed and corrected if required If the matter is not handled to your satisfaction please discuss the problem with the Mercedes Benz Center management or if necessary contact us at one of the following addresses In the USA Customer Assistance Center Mercedes Benz USA LLC One Mercedes Drive Montvale NJ 07645 0350 In Canada Customer Relations Department Mercedes Benz Canada Inc 98 Vanderhoof Avenue Toronto Ontario M4G 4C9 Introduction Reporting safety defects For the USA only The following text is published as required of manufacturers under Title 49 Code of U S Federal Reg
232. indicates the tire size Tire type code The code gt page 322 may at the option of the manufacturer be used as a descriptive code for identifying significant characteristics of the tire Date of manufacture The date of manufacture gt page 322 identifies the week and year of manufac ture The first two figures identify the week starting with 01 to represent the first full week of the calendar year The second two figures represent the year For example 3202 represents the 32nd week of 2002 Operation Tires and wheels Maximum tire load Maximum tire load rating For illustration purposes only Actual data on tires is specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in above illustration The maximum tire load is the maximum weight the tires are designed to support Operation Tires and wheels Warning A Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit or vehicle capacity weight as indicated on the placard located on the driver s door B pillar Overloading the tires can overheat them possibly causing a blowout Overloading the tires can also result in handling or steering problems or brake failure For more information on tire load rating gt page 319 For information on calculating total and cargo load capacities gt page 310 Maximum tire inflation pressure Always follow the recommended tire inflation pressure gt page 313 for
233. ing Checking the batteries gt Press button or all Battery check lamp comes on briefly to indicate that the SmartKey batteries are in order i If battery check lamp does not come on briefly during check then the SmartKey batteries are discharged Replace the batteries gt page 387 You can obtain the required batteries at any authorized Mercedes Benz Center i If the batteries are checked within signal range of the vehicle pressing the or button will lock or unlock the vehicle accordingly Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Loss of SmartKey or mechanical key If you lose a SmartKey or mechanical key you should do the following gt Have the SmartKey deactivated by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center gt Report the loss of the SmartKey or the mechanical key immediately to your car insurance company gt If necessary have the mechanical lock replaced Your authorized Mercedes Benz Center will be glad to supply you with a replace ment Opening the doors from the inside You can open a locked door from the inside Open door only when conditions are safe to do so Locking knob Inside door handle i If the vehicle has previously been locked from the outside with the SmartKey opening a door from the inside will trigger the anti theft alarm system To cancel the alarm do one of the following e Press button or on the SmartKey e Insert the Sma
234. ing A Do not pull the release lever while the vehicle is in motion Otherwise the hood could be forced open by passing air flow Opening The hood lock release lever is located to the left of the steering wheel under the dashboard Hood lock release lever Pull lever Q downwards The hood is unlocked and handle will extend out of the radiator grille To avoid damage to the windshield wipers or hood never open the hood if the wiper arms are folded forward away from the windshield Handle for opening the hood gt Pull handle to its stop out of the radiator grille gt Pull up on the hood do not pull up on the handle and then release it The hood will be automatically held open at shoulder height by gas filled struts Warning A To help prevent personal injury stay clear of moving parts when the hood is open and the engine is running Make sure the hood is properly closed before driving When closing the hood use extreme caution not to catch hands or fingers The radiator fan may continue to run for approximately 30 seconds or even restart after the engine has been turned off Stay clear of fan blades Warning A If you see flames or smoke coming from the engine compartment or if the coolant tem perature display indicates that the engine is overheated do not open the hood Move away from vehicle and do not open the hood until the engine has cooled If necessary call the fi
235. ing a preset deployment threshold e independently of the front air bags The side impact air bags and window curtain air bags are not deployed in impacts which do not exceed the system s deployment threshold Seat belts When the engine is started the seat belt telltale illuminates to remind you and your passengers to fasten your seat belts If the driver s seat belt is not fastened before the engine is started the seat belt telltale illuminates and a warning chime sounds for approximately six seconds when the engine is started The use of seat belts and infant and child restraint systems is required by law in all 50 states the District of Columbia the U S territories and all Canadian provinces Even where this is not the case all vehicle occupants should have their seat belts fastened whenever the vehicle is in motion For more information see Fastening the seat belt gt page 43 i For information on infants and children traveling with you in the vehicle and restraint systems for infants and children see Children in the vehicle gt page 70 Warning VAN Always fasten your seat belt before driving off Always make sure all of your passengers are properly restrained even those sitting in the rear and pregnant women Failure to wear and properly fasten and position your seat belt greatly increases your risk of injuries and their likely severity in an accident You and your
236. ing for transport 93 Towing eye bolt vehicle tool kit Installing 411 Towing the vehicle 408 Traction 168 330 Transmission gear selector lever Unlocking manually 384 Transmission see Automatic transmission Traveling abroad 290 Tread 330 Tread depth 306 Tread depth tires Treadwear indicators Trim panel Closing 415 Opening 415 Trip computer 156 Trip odometer Resetting 127 Trunk see Cargo compartment Turn signal lamps front Messages in display 374 Replacing bulbs 389 Turn signal lamps in mirrors Messages in display 374 Turn signal lamps rear Messages in display 374 Replacing bulbs 389 332 330 Turn signals 50 Additional in mirrors Cleaning lenses 339 Front bulbs 389 Indicator lamps 25 Rear bulbs 389 Turning inward Swiveling cup holder in front of seat armrest 261 Turning off Engine 57 Turning outward Swiveling cup holder in front of seat armrest 261 Twin reel roller blind Installing 253 Luggage cover and partition net Removing 253 389 252 U Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards Units Setting speedometer units 143 Setting temperature units 143 Unlocking 32 96 Centrally from inside 103 Driver s door in an emergency 382 Fuel filler flap 293 Global 98 Glove box 258 In an emergency 382 Selective settings 98 Tailgate in an emergency 382 Transmission gear selector lever manually 384 Vehicle in an emergency 273 With the SmartKey 32 330 Upgrade scenario Tele Aid 272 Uph
237. ing the integrated remote control The indicator lamp Q flashes the first Step 1 gt Switch on ignition gt page 33 Step 2 gt If you have previously programmed an integrated signal transmitter button and wish to retain its programming proceed to step 3 Otherwise press and hold the two outer signal transmit ter buttons 2 and and release them only when the indicator lamp begins to flash after approximately 20 seconds do not hold the button for longer than 30 seconds This proce dure erases any previous settings for all three channels and initializes the memory If you later wish to program a second and or third hand held trans mitter to the remaining two signal transmitter buttons do not repeat this step and begin directly with step 3 276 control transmitter of the device you wish to train approximately 2 to 5 in 5 to12 cm away from the surface of the integrated remote control located on the interior rear view mirror keeping the indicator lamp in view Step 4 gt Using both hands simultaneously press the hand held transmitter button and the desired integrated signal transmitter button or Do not release the buttons until completing step 5 The indicator lamp on the integrated remote control will flash first slowly and then rapidly time the signal transmitter button is programmed If this button has already been programmed the indicator lamp wil
238. ing wheel 39 Adjusting air distribution and volume 180 Adjusting sound functions 203 Adjusting the volume 203 Aids for changing fuses 413 Airbags 61 Children 62 Front 65 Passenger 65 Safety guidelines 64 Side impact 66 Window curtain 66 Air conditioning cooling 183 Turning off 184 196 Turning on 184 196 Air conditioning refrigerant 431 Air distribution Adjusting 180 190 Air pressure see Tire inflation pressure Air recirculation mode 182 193 Activating 182 193 Deactivating 183 194 Air vents rear passenger compartment Adjustable 185 198 Air volume Adjusting 180 191 Alarm Audible 83 91 Canceling 92 94 Visual 91 Alarm system Anti theft 91 Tow away 93 Alignment bolt vehicle tool kit Anticorrosion antifreeze 436 Antiglare Manual 171 Antilock Brake System see ABS Anti theft alarm system Arming 92 Canceling alarm 92 Disarming 92 400 439 Anti theft systems 91 Anti theft alarm system 91 Immobilizer 91 Tow away alarm 93 Aquaplaning see Hydroplaning Armrest Changing inclination of Storage spaces 259 Armrest in rear passenger compartment 260 Ashtrays 262 Aspect ratio 327 ATF 300 AUDIO menu 135 Selecting radio station 136 Selecting satellite radio station 259 136 Audio system 199 Audio and telephone operation Button and soft key operation CD operation 217 Operating and display elements Operating safety 199 Operation 202 Radio operation Switching off 203 Switching on 2
239. int so that the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at eye level This will reduce the poten tial for injury to the head and neck in the event of an accident or similar situation Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head restraints Head restraints are intend ed to help reduce injuries during an acci dent Do not interchange head restraints from front and rear seat Tilt the backrest to the rear for easier removal and installation of the head restraints Controls in detail Seats Front seat head restraints manual seat 1 _ C Release button Removing front seat head restraints gt Pull head restraint to its highest position gt Push release button Q and pull out head restraint Installing front seat head restraints gt Insert head restraint and push it down until it engages gt Push release button Q and adjust head restraint to desired position 107 Controls in detail Seats Front seat head restraints power seat Installing front seat head restraints Head restraint height rear outer seats y gt Press switch Q upwards and hold for about five seconds gt Push head restraint down until it engages gt Adjust head restraint to desired position gt page 38 F N Rear seat head restraints A D y o_ f P91 16 2157 31 1 16 2245 31 Head restraint switch Release button gt Switch on ignition gt page 33
240. ion see Children in the vehicle gt page 70 A child s risk of serious or fatal injuries is significantly increased if the child restraints are not properly secured in the vehicle and or the child is not properly secured in the child restraint Getting started Driving Warning A Never let more people ride in the vehicle than there are seat belts available Be sure everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly restrained with a separate seat belt Never use a seat belt for more than one person at a time Warning A Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat backrest in an excessively reclined position as this can be dangerous You could slide under the seat belt in a collision If you slide under it the belt would apply force at the ab domen or neck That could cause serious or even fatal injuries The seat backrest and seat belt provide the best restraint when the wearer is in a nearly upright position and the belt is properly positioned on the body Warning A Read and observe the additional warning notices printed in the Safety and Security section gt page 64 and gt page 66 Latch plate Release button Buckle With a smooth motion pull the belt from the belt outlet Place the shoulder portion of the belt across the top of your shoulder and the lap portion across your hips Push latch plate into buckle until it clicks If necessary tighten the lap portion to
241. ion buttons left side of radio panel are referred to as buttons The four keys below the display panel are referred toas Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch automatically switch off again after Switching on approx 30 minutes If your vehicle is equipped with a telephone the display may prompt you soft keys to position 1 or 2 gt Ifthe audi t to enter your PIN GSM network or H S ANTIO SYSLOM YAS OaS ya code TDMA or CDMA network Do not press directly in the display removed the SmartKey from the starter face Otherwise the display will be switch the audio system will damaged automatically come back on as you i turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 or gt Press button Switching off gt Remove SmartKey from starter switch or gt Press button i Should excessively high temperatures occur while the audio system is being operated the display will dim If tem peratures continue to rise HIGH TEMP will appear in the display after which the audio system will be switched off for a cooling down period Adjusting the volume gt Turn rotary control of button The volume will increase or decrease depending on the direction turned i If your vehicle equipment includes a Mercedes Benz specified mobile telephone you can adjust its volume separately from the volume of the audio system while the telephone is being used Adjusting sound functions The b
242. ion is switched on gt Place the gear selector lever out of position R Switching off hazard warning flasher The respective front fog lamp goes out gt Press hazard warning flasher switch 1 again i If the hazard warning flasher has been activated automatically press hazard warning flasher switch once to switch it off Hazard warning flasher switch Interior lighting Activating automatic control gt Press rocker switch to center The controls are located in the overhead ve position control panel Interior lamps are switched on in darkness even when you unlock the vehicle E open a door G2 e open the tailgate remove the SmartKey from the starter switch P82 20 2574 31 The interior lamps are switched off after a preset time see Setting interior lighting delayed shut off gt page 153 Rear interior lights Right front reading lamp Rocker switch for automatic control system Left front reading lamp If the door remains open the interior lamps switch off automatically after approximately five minutes when the SmartKey is removed or in starter switch position 0 An interior lamp switched on manually does not go out automatically Controls in detail Lighting Deactivating automatic control gt Press the f symbol on rocker switch The interior lighting remains switched off even when you unlock the vehicle e open
243. ion switch to the is in an excessively reclined position selected memory position Doing so could cause damage to front D e gt Press memory button Q or rear seats pa gt isa ce sea gt oe gt Turn memory position switch to the ie a gece en selected memory position Via eas three seconds ue Memory button gt Press and hold memory position Memory position switch All settings are stored to the selected switch until the seat steering wheel Switch on igniti 33 position and exterior rear view mirrors have gt Switch on ignition gt page 33 completely moved to the stored or positions gt Open the respective door and insert ri the SmartKey in the starter switch Releasing he memon pos nion switch stops movement to the stored positions immediately Storing exterior rear view mirror parking position S as For easier parking you can adjust the passenger side exterior rear view mirror so that you can see the right rear wheel as soon as you engage reverse gear R For information on activating the parking position see Activating exterior rear view mirror parking position gt page 173 i You can store a parking position for the passenger side exterior rear view mirror for each SmartKey y i C Memory button 2 Adjustment button Passenger side exterior rear view mirror button gt Stop the vehicle gt Switch on ig
244. ir volume control Left side temperature control Right side temperature control Air distribution control Rear window defroster AC cooling on off ACOFF or A C Air distribution and air volume automatic mode Air recirculation Defrosting 177 Controls in detail Climate control The climate control is operational when ever the engine is running You can oper ate the climate control system in either the automatic or manual mode The system cools or heats the interior depending on the selected interior temperature and the current outside temperature Warning A When operating the climate control the air that enters the passenger compartment through the air vents in the footwell can be very hot or very cold depending on the set temperature This may cause burns or frost bite on unprotected skin in the immediate area of the air vents Always keep sufficient distance between unprotected parts of the body and the footwell air vents If necessary change the air flow using the air distribution controls to direct the air away from the foot well air vents gt page 180 178 Nearly all dust particles pollutants and odors are filtered out before outside air en ters the passenger compartment through the air distribution system The air conditioning will not engage no cooling if mode ACOFF is activated or mode A C is deactivated gt page 183 Warning A Follow the recommended settings for heat ing an
245. ired numerical key to FR The stored entries are selected according to the alphabetical order of the initial letters e g for S Schneider press button four times Press and hold button QW or BA The system jumps from one initial letter to the next in ascending or descending order Press and hold button QW or B until desired initial letter has been reached Controls in detail Audio system gt Press button WW or Bg gt When you have selected a number gt Press MEM soft key or press repeatedly until desired entry has press button button WN or BA beeri reached The call will be made gt Press RCV soft key received calls Las ee igi a e Viewing the telephone number of a The number of received calls and Seen OTOBI WI phone book entry then the call last received appear sub entries 5 0 gt Press NUM soft key gt Select desired telephone number Several sub entries can be stored for with button WN or BA each main entry name These entries The telephone number of the phone are marked by a corresponding book entry appears in the display abbreviation that appears in the upper Returning calls received left hand corner of the display The following abbreviations for sub entries are possible gt Search for desired entry briefly in the display The letter R and the number of the memory position appear in the upper left hand corner of the display The numbers are stored in the order of the calls received
246. is no danger of anyone being harmed by the closing procedure Warning The opening closing procedure of the tilt sliding sunroof can be immediately halted by releasing the switch or if the switch was moved past the resistance point and released by moving the switch in any direction The tilt sliding sunroof is made out of glass In the event of an accident the glass may shatter This may result in an opening in the roof In a vehicle rollover occupants not wearing their seat belts or not wearing them properly may be thrown out of the opening Such an opening also presents a potential for injury for occupants wearing their seat belts properly as entire body parts or portions of them may protrude from the passenger compartment gt D Controls in detail Power tilt sliding sunroof ial When leaving the vehicle always remove the i Opening and closing the power SmartKey from the starter switch take it You can also open or close the tt elding sunroof with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave tilt sliding sunroof using the SmartKey To open close raise or lower the children unattended in the vehicle or with summer opening convenience closing tilt sliding sunroof move the sunroof access to an unlocked vehicle Unsuper feature gt page 245 switch to resistance point in the vised use of vehicle equipment can cause an required direction of arrows A to You can close and reopen the accident and or serio
247. is the possibility activated for the air recirculation When the outside temperature is of anyone being harmed by the closing mode to be activated automatically Bo 41 F 5 C only switch w air procedure The indicator lamp on the button Feettculauor huge oy short periods to In the event that the closing procedure is not lit when the air recirculation prevent window fogging causes potential danger the closing of the mode is automatically switched on Window fogging may impair visibility and side windows can be immediately halted by After approx 30 minutes outside air is endanger you and others pressing or pulling the respective window added to the air inside the vehicle switch The closing of the tilt sliding Activating sunroof can be immediately halted by If you have turned off the air moving the tilt sliding sunroof switch in conditioning gt page 196 or the out gt Press button R gt page 187 the overhead control panel in any direction side temperature is below 41 F 5 C The indicator lamp on the button The closing of the side windows and e a fearedlabin made MLSE comes on tilt sliding sunroof can be reversed by Site lron outoinatically again pressing and holding the button R Controls in detail Automatic climate control Deactivating gt Press button gt page 187 The indicator lamp on the button goes out i If you keep button REY pressed the side windows and tilt sliding sunroof will return
248. ise the transfer case can be damaged which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Because of the ESP s automatic operation the engine must be shut off SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or 1 when the parking brake is being tested on a brake test dynamometer Active braking action through ESP may otherwise seriously damage the front or rear axle brake system Operational tests with the engine running can only be conducted on a two axle dynamometer i At highly demanding operating condi tions the electronic traction system may temporarily switch off to prevent overheating of the drive wheel brakes The message unavailable See Operator s Manual will then appear in the multifunction display while the ESP warning lamp is flashing The ESP is still functioning normally V Anti theft systems Immobilizer The immobilizer prevents unauthorized persons from starting your vehicle Activating gt Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch Deactivating gt Switch on ignition gt page 33 i Starting the engine will also deactivate the immobilizer In case the engine cannot be started yet the vehicle s battery is charged the system is not operational Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center or call 1 800 FOR MERCedes in the USA or 1 800 387 0100 in Canada Anti theft alarm system Once the alarm system has been armed a visual and audible alarm is triggere
249. it is dangerous to replace the bulb or repair the lamp and its components We recommend that you have such work done by a qualified technician Notes on bulb replacement Only use 12 volt bulbs of the same type and with the specified watt rating Switch lights off before changing a bulb to prevent short circuits Always use a clean lint free cloth when handling bulbs Your hands should be dry and free of oil and grease If the newly installed bulb does not come on visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Have the LEDs and bulbs for the following lamps replaced by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center e Additional turn signals in the exterior rear view mirrors e High mounted brake lamp e Xenon lamps e Front fog lamps j Have the headlamp adjustment checked regularly Replacing bulbs for front lamps _ Before you start to replace a bulb for a front lamp do the following first gt Turn the exterior lamp switch to position J gt page 116 gt Open the hood gt page 296 except for side marker lamps P82 10 3579 31 Halogen headlamp Bulb socket for turn signal lamp bulb Bulb socket for low beam bulb Bulb socket for high beam bulb Bulb socket for parking and standing lamp bulb P82 00 2212 31 Housing cover for low beam headlamp Housing cover for high beam head lamp parking and standing lamp Practical hints Replacing bulbs Low beam bulb
250. its original position to switch off the high beam gt Pushin the exterior lamp switch to first stop The rear fog lamp switches off Combination switch The high beam headlamp indicator The yellow indicator lamp in the High beam lamp E in the instrument cluster exterior lamp switch goes out High beam flasher goes out The front fog lamps remain lit High beam flasher gt Pull the combination switch briefly in direction of arrow Cornering fog lamps All models with Bi Xenon headlamps The cornering fog lamps improve illumina tion of the road into which you are turning Cornering fog lamps will operate with the engine running and with e the exterior lamp switch in position gt page 116 or e the exterior lamp switch in position W gt page 116 or e the daytime running lamp mode activated gt page 118 i Cornering fog lamps will only come on in low ambient lighting conditions The cornering fog lamps function is not available at a vehicle speed above 25 mph 40 km h Driving forward Switching on cornering fog lamps gt Depending on whether you are turning left or right switch on the left or right turn signal gt page 50 The respective front fog lamp comes on and illuminates the road into which you are turning Controls in detail Lighting i The cornering fog lamps will come on automatically depending on the steer ing angle even if you did not switch o
251. ke it with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsuper vised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and or serious personal injury Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Depending on production date your vehicle is equipped with either switch design A or B The switches are located in the center console Switch design B Central locking switch Central unlocking switch Switch design A Central locking switch Central unlocking switch Controls in detail Locking and unlocking i Locking You can open a locked door from the gt Press central locking switch Q inside Open door only when conditions If all doors are closed the vehicle are safe to do so locks If the vehicle was previously centrally locked using the SmartKey it will not Unlocking unigok pee ihe central imigoking gt Press central unlocking switch switch 2 hicl locks If the vehicle was previously locked MS VENDIR UMGRKR with the central locking switch Q e while in the selective remote con trol mode only the door opened from the inside is unlocked e while in the global remote control mode the vehicle is unlocked completely when a door is opened from the inside V Seats For information on seat adjustment see Adjusting gt page 35 Easy entry exit feature This feature allows for easier entry
252. l injury gt Move the selection marker with button or E to the Convenience submenu gt Press button EAN or Keg repeatedly until the message Easy entry feature appears in the multifunction display The selection marker is on the current setting Easy entry feature Steer Column St col t seat P54 32 2385 31 Press button or E to change the easy entry exit setting The following settings are available for the easy entry exit feature Off The easy entry exit feature is deactivated Steer Column Only the steering column is moved St col seat Both the steering column and the seat are moved Controls in detail Control system Setting key dependency Use this function to set whether the memory settings for the seats the steering wheel and the mirrors should be stored separately for each SmartKey gt page 113 gt Move the selection marker with button or E to the Convenience submenu gt Press button J or RA repeatedly until the message Key dependency appears in the multifunction display The selection marker is on the current setting Key dependency D On Off P54 32 2386 31 PD Controls in detail Control system gt gt gt Press button or E to set key dependency On or Off Setting parking position for exterior rear view mirror Use the Mirror set parking aid function to select whether the passenger side exterior rear
253. l only start flashing after 20 seconds Step 5 gt When the indicator lamp Q flashes rapidly release both buttons Step 6 gt Press and hold the just trained integrated signal transmitter button and observe the indicator lamp Q If the indicator lamp stays on constantly programming is complete and your device should activate when the integrated signal transmitter button is pressed and released i If the indicator lamp Q flashes rapidly for about two seconds and then turns to a constant light continue with programming steps 8 through 12 as your garage door opener may be equipped with the rolling code feature Step 7 gt To program the remaining two buttons repeat the steps above starting with step 3 Rolling code programming To train a garage door opener or other rolling code devices with the rolling code feature follow these instructions after completing the Programming portion steps 1 through 6 of this text A second person may make the following training procedures quicker and easier Step 8 gt Locate training button on the garage door opener motor head unit Exact location and color of the button may vary by garage door opener brand Depending on manufacturer the training button may also be referred to as learn or smart button If there is difficulty locating the transmitting button refer to the garage door opener operator s manual
254. lace de ployed air bags and repair any malfunc tioning air bags to make sure that the vehicle will continue to provide supple mental crash protection for occupants Safety guidelines for the seat belt emergency tensioning device and air bag Warning A e Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly stressed in an accident must be replaced and their anchoring points must also be checked Only use belts installed or supplied by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center e Air bags and emergency tensioning devices ETDs are designed to function on a one time only basis An air bag or ETD that is deployed must be replaced e Do not pass belts over sharp edges They could tear e Donot make any modification that could change the effectiveness of the belts e Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may severely weaken them In a crash they may not be able to provide adequate protection No modifications of any kind may be made to any components or wiring of the SRS This includes changing or removing any component or part of the SRS the installation of additional trim material badges etc over the steering wheel hub passenger front air bag cover door trim panels or door frame trims and installation of additional electrical electronic equipment on or near SRS components and wiring Keep area between air bags and occupants free from objects e g packages purses umbrellas etc Do not hang items such as coat hangers
255. lamps Exterior lamp switch Standing lamps right turn left one stop Sea Standing lamps left turn left two stops Indicator lamp for front fog lamps Indicator lamp for rear fog lamp i With the SmartKey removed from the starter switch and the driver s door open a warning sounds if the parking lamps or low beam headlamps are switched on The message Switch off lights appears in the multifunction display Manual headlamp mode The low beam headlamps and the parking lamps can be switched on and off with the exterior lamp switch Automatic headlamp mode The following lamps switch on and off automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light e Low beam headlamps e Tail and parking lamps e License plate lamps e Side marker lamps Warning A If the exterior lamp switch is set to M e the headlamps may switch off unexpect edly when the system senses bright ambient light for example light from oncoming traffic e the headlamps will not be automatically switched on under foggy conditions To minimize risk to you and to others activate headlamps by turning exterior lamp switch to when driving or when traffic and or ambient lighting conditions require you to do so In low ambient lighting conditions only switch from position to with the vehicle at a standstill Switching from EUR to will briefly switch off the head lamps Doing so while driving in low ambient lighting c
256. lay messages submenu Available languages Status line display gt Press button EAN or RA repeatedly e German until the message Language appears in e English the multifunction display e French i The selection marker is on the current Outside temp setting e Italian Language z Spanish P54 32 2363 31 amp Selecting display speed display or per Press putton or Mall to select the desired setting deutsch outside temperature for status indicator The selected display is then shown frangais gt Move the selection marker with a Ine tie lower ei play button or E tothe Instr cl The other display now appears in the submenu menu of the standard display P54 32236231 B Press button EAN or R repeatedly e Digital speedometer until the message Status line or display appears in the multifunction display e Outside temperature Controls in detail Control system Time Date submenu Time synchronizing with head unit Setting the time hours Access the Time Date submenu via the This function can only be seen on vehicles This function can only be seen with audio Settings menu Use the Time Date with COMAND and navigation module system submenu to change the instrument cluster gt Move the selection marker with display settings button or MJ to the Time Date Vehicles with COMAND The following functions are available submenu For information on setting the time Function Page gt Press button EN or R r
257. le 0 08 398 Vehicle status messages in the Mounting the Minispare wheel 398 multifunction display 006 392 Battery sisssccssesccccdcscssentcoscesconcanvevseeesees 403 Where will find sis sirisser 377 Disconnecting the battery 404 First aid Kitye cs scscseccteceecersssnventsves 377 Removing the battery 404 Vehicle tool kit cece eects 377 Charging and reinstalling Minispare wheel cccceeseeeees 380 the battery eeeeseseceeesereees 404 Unlocking locking in an emergency 382 Reconnecting the battery 405 Unlocking the vehicle 045 382 Jump starting ccceeeceseceseeseeeeeeees 406 Locking the vehicle ccceeee 383 Towing the vehicle 408 Fuel Tier flaps cc s csesscsecsscestveaconte 384 Installing towing eye bolt 411 Manually unlocking the FUSE Sopena 412 transmission gear selector lever 384 Aids for changing fuses 413 Opening closing in an emergency 385 Main fuse box in passenger Power tilt sliding sunroof 385 COMPAFTMENE eeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 413 Replacing SmartKey batteries 386 Fuse box in engine SMArtKey oo ee eeeeeeeeceseeeseeceeeees 387 COMpartMent ceceesseesseeeeeeeees 414 Replacing bulbs wo eee eee 388 Fuse box in cargo BUD Siria Ea 388 COMPALtMENt eeeeeeesseceseteeeees 415 Replacing bulbs for front lamps Replacing bulbs
258. lear up the fogging Substitute bulbs will be brought into use when lamps malfunction Observe the messages in the multifunction display gt page 352 P54 00 2419 31 Practical hints Replacing bulbs Front lamps Lamp Type Rear lamps Lamp Type E E Lamp Type igh beam high beam Additional turn signal LED AE hig H7 65 W High mounted brake LED amne Bi Xenon headlamp amp Halogen headlamp High beam flasher H7 55 W Brake lamp P21W Tunn signal lemne TIA Parking and standing W5W Turn signal lamp PY 21W Bi Xenon headlamp lamp Turn signal lamp 2357 A Backup lamp P21W EEE Front fog lamp HB4 51 W License plate lamps C5W Low beam H7 55 W Front fog lamp with H7 55 W Rear fog lamp drivers P 21 4 W Bi Xenon headlamp cornering fog lamp side only tail parking Low and high beam D2S 35 W Side marker lamp Ww5W standing and side 1 Vehicles with Bi Xenon headlamps Low beam marker lamp and high beam use the same D2S 35W lamp Do not replace the Xenon bulbs yourself See an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Practical hints Replacing bulbs A Bulbs and bulb sockets can be very hot Allow the lamp to cool down before changing a bulb Warning Keep bulbs out of reach of children Halogen lamps contain pressurized gas A bulb can explode if you e touch or move it when hot e drop the bulb e scratch the bulb Wear eye and hand protection Because of high voltage in Xenon lamps
259. lecting time display mode gt Move the selection marker with button or ERM to the Time Date submenu gt Press button EAN or Keg repeatedly until the message Clock display appears in the multifunction display The selection marker is on the current setting Clock display 12h P54 32 2368 31 gt Press button or E to set the 12h or 24h time display mode Selecting automatic time change Daylight Saving Time DST summer Standard time winter gt Move the selection marker with button or MJ to the Time Date submenu gt Press button EAN or Beg repeatedly until the message Change over Summer Winter time appears in the multifunction display The selection marker is on the current setting Change over Summer Winter time Automatic Manual P54 32 2369 31 Controls in detail Control system gt Press button or E to select if the changeover between summer and winter time should be automatic or manual Setting the date month This function can only be seen with audio system i Vehicles with COMAND For information on setting the date refer to the separate COMAND operating instructions gt Move the selection marker with button or E to the Time Date submenu gt Press button EAN or RA repeatedly until the message Date Set MM appears in the multifunction display bb 147 gt D Controls in detail Control system The s
260. legs can move freely and that all the displays incl malfunc tion and indicator lamps on the instru ment cluster are clearly visible i The memory function gt page 113 lets you store the setting for the steering wheel together with the settings for the seat position and exterior rear view mirrors Mirrors Adjust the interior and exterior rear view mirrors before driving so that you have a good view of the road and traffic condi tions A In the case of an accident liquid electrolyte may escape the mirror housing if the mirror glass breaks Warning Electrolyte has an irritating effect Do not allow the liquid to come into contact with eyes skin clothing or respiratory system In case it does immediately flush affected area with water and seek medical help if necessary Electrolyte drops coming into contact with the vehicle paint finish can only be completely removed while in their liquid state and by applying plenty of water Getting started Adjusting Interior rear view mirror gt Manually adjust the interior rear view mirror For more information see Rear view mir rors gt page 171 Exterior rear view mirrors AN Warning Exercise care when using the passen ger side exterior rear view mirror The mirror surface is convex outwardly curved surface for a wider field of view Objects in mirror are closer than they appear Check your interior rear view mirror o
261. lit rear bench seat 254 SRS 68 443 Indicator lamp 25 349 Message in display 361 Standing lamps front Replacing bulbs 389 Standing lamps rear Replacing bulbs 389 Standing water Driving instructions 289 Starter switch 23 33 Positions 33 Starting difficulties 47 Starting position 33 Starting the engine 46 Station satellite radio Selecting 214 Steering column Height adjustment electrical 41 Height adjustment manual 40 Length adjustment electrical 41 Length adjustment manual 40 Steering gear oil Message in display 375 Steering wheel Adjusting 39 Buttons 26 Cleaning 341 Electrical adjustment 40 Manual adjustment 40 Stolen vehicle Recovery services 273 Stopping Tilt sliding sunroof 245 Windows 241 Storage compartments Cargo compartment 251 Glove box 258 Storage spaces Cup holder in rear seat armrest 261 Cup holders in front of seat armrest 260 Storing Station satellite radio 216 Storing memory function Positions into memory 114 Storing tires 306 Submenus Convenience 154 For settings 131 In control system 133 Instrument cluster 143 145 Lighting 149 Resetting functions in control system 141 Selecting 141 Settings menu 141 Time Date 145 Switching off Audio system 203 Automatic central locking control system 153 Cornering fog lamps 121 122 Delayed exterior lamps 151 Engine 57 ESP 88 Hazard warning flasher 122 Headlamps 56 Seat heating 112 Switching on Audio sy
262. ll attempt to determine more precisely the nature of the emergency provided they can speak to an occupant of the vehicle The Tele Aid system is available if e it has been activated and is operational Activation requires a subscription for monitoring services connection and cellular air time e the relevant cellular phone network and GPS signals are available and pass the information on to the Response Center i Location of the vehicle on a map is only possible if the vehicle is able to receive signals from the GPS satellite network and pass the information on to the Response Center A If the indicator lamp in the SOS button is flashing continuously and there was no voice connection to the Response Center established then the Tele Aid system could not initiate an emergency call e g the rele vant cellular phone network is not available The message Call failed appears in the multifunction display for approximately ten seconds Warning Should this occur assistance must be summoned by other means Initiating an emergency call manually Oe P82 95 2369 31 Cover SOS button gt Briefly press on cover Q The cover will open gt Press SOS button 2 briefly The indicator lamp in SOS button will flash until the emergency call is concluded gt Wait for a voice connection to the Response Center gt Close cover Q after the emergency call is concluded Warning VAN If you fe
263. ller flap springs open Turn fuel cap counterclockwise and hold on to it until possible pressure is released Take off cap and set it in direction of arrow 2 in the recess on fuel filler flap To prevent fuel vapors from escaping into open air fully insert filler nozzle unit Only fill your tank until the filler nozzle unit cuts out do not top up or overfill Warning A Overfilling of the fuel tank may create pressure in the system which could cause a gas discharge This could cause the gas to spray back out when removing the fuel pump nozzle which could cause personal injury gt Replace fuel cap by turning it clockwise You will hear when fuel cap is tightened gt Close fuel filler flap i Only use premium unleaded gasoline with a minimum Posted Octane Rating of 91 average of 96 RON 86 MON Information on gasoline quality can normally be found on the fuel pump More information on gasoline can be found in the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet Flexible Fuel Vehicles are identified by a label reading Premium gasoline or E85 only on fuel filler flap For more information see Flexible Fuel Vehicles gt page 433 i Leaving the engine running and the fuel cap open can cause the malfunc tion indicator lamp USA only or the malfunction indicator lamp Canada only to illuminate For more information see Practical hints gt page 346 and gt page 347
264. lon polyester and others Operation Tires and wheels Tire speed rating Part of tire designation indicates the speed range for which a tire is approved Traction Force exerted by the vehicle on the road via the tires The amount of grip provided Tread The portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road Treadwear indicators Narrow bands sometimes called wear bars that show across the tread of a tire when only ve in 1 6 mm of tread remains Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards A tire information system that provides consumers with ratings for a tire s traction temperature and treadwear Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers using government testing procedures The ratings are molded into the sidewall of the tire Vehicle capacity weight Rated cargo and luggage load plus 68 kilograms 150 lbs times the vehicle s designated seating capacity Vehicle maximum load on the tire Load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of the maximum loaded vehicle weight and dividing it by two Rotating tires Warning A Rotate front and rear wheels only if the tires are of the same dimension If your vehicle is equipped with mixed size tires different tire dimensions front vs rear tire rotation is not possible Tire rotation can be performed on vehicles with tires of the same dimension all around If your vehicle is equipped with
265. lways remove the SmartKey from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave possible children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsuper Deactivating override switch vised use of vehicle equipment may cause gt Slide override switch to the left an accident and or serious personal injury The rear door windows can be operated again using the respective switch located in the rear doors For more information see Power win 4 e dows gt page 239 Deactivating override switch Activating override switch Override switch Safety and Security Panic alarm YV Panic alarm An audible alarm and flashing exterior Activating i lamps will operate for approximately USA only 1 2 2 minutes gt Press and hold button 1 for at least This device complies with Part 15 of one second the FCC Rules Operation is subject to he followi itions Deactivating the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful gt Press button Q again interference and or 2 this device must accept any inter ference received including interfer ence that may cause undesired operation gt Insert SmartKey in starter switch P80 35 2110 31 Any unauthorized modification to this Deon device could void the user s authority i to operate the equipment Canada only Only vehicles equipped with an anti theft alarm sy
266. ly If you believe that even with the use of these guidelines it would be safer for your rear seat occupants to have the rear mounted side impact air bags deactivated then deactivation can be accomplished upon your written request to do so at an authorized Mercedes Benz Center at an additional cost Please contact your local authorized Mercedes Benz Center or call our Customer Assistance Center at 1 800 FOR MERCedes 1 800 367 6372 for details Safety and Security Occupant safety i Air bags are designed to deploy only in certain frontal impacts front air bags and in side impacts side impact and head protection window curtain air bags which exceed preset thresholds Only during these events will they provide their supplemental protection The driver and passengers should always wear their seat belts Otherwise it is not possible for air bags to provide their supplemental protection Safety and Security Occupant safety In case of other types of impacts and impacts below air bag deployment thresholds air bags will not deploy The driver and passengers will then be protected to the extent possible by a properly fastened seat belt A properly fastened seat belt is also needed to provide the best possible protection in a rollover We caution you not to rely on the presence of the air bags in order to avoid wearing your seat belt It is important to your safety and that of your passengers that you rep
267. me automatic mode 187 Controls in detail Automatic climate control fi Feature availability is based on prelimi nary information at time of printing The automatic climate control may not be available as optional equipment on all models The automatic climate control is operation al whenever the engine is running You can operate the climate control system in ei ther the automatic or manual mode The system cools or heats the interior depend ing on the selected interior temperature and the current outside temperature 188 Warning A When operating the automatic climate control the air that enters the passenger compartment through the air vents in the footwell can be very hot or very cold depending on the set temperature This may cause burns or frostbite on unprotected skin in the immediate area of the air vents Always keep sufficient distance between unprotected parts of the body and the foot well air vents If necessary change the air flow using the air distribution controls to direct the air away from the footwell air vents gt page 190 Nearly all dust particles pollutants and odors are filtered out before outside air enters the passenger compartment through the air distribution system The air conditioning will not engage no cooling if the mode ACOFF is activated or mode A C is deactivated gt page 196 Warning A Follow the recommended settings for heating and cooling given on
268. me there is a malfunction in the Occupant Classification System The front passenger front air bag will be deactivated in this case In order to ensure proper operation of the air bag system and OCS e Have the system checked as soon as possible by qualified technicians Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center e Sit properly belted in a nearly upright position with your back against the seat backrest e Do not lean on the armrests or lift your self from the seat by using the handle over the door as this may cause the OCS to be unable to correctly approximate the occupant weight category e Only have the seat repaired or replaced by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center e Read and observe all warnings in this chapter Self test Occupant Classification System After turning the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 1 or 2 the indicator lamp located in the center console illuminates If an adult occupant is properly sitting on the front passenger seat and the system senses the occupant as being an adult the indicator lamp will illuminate and go out after approximately six seconds If the seat is not occupied and the system senses the front passenger seat as being empty the indicator lamp will illuminate and not go out Warning VAN If the indicator lamp should not illuminate the system is not functioning You must see an authorized Mercedes Benz Center before seating any child on
269. menu 153 Controller Area Network see CAN system Convenience submenu 154 Activating easy entry exit feature 154 Setting key dependency 155 Setting parking position for exterior rear view mirror 156 Coolant 301 Adding 301 Anticorrosion antifreeze quantity 435 Capacities 429 Checking level 301 Messages in display 364 366 Temperature 292 Temperature gauge 126 Coolant level Checking 295 301 Coolant temperature gauge 25 Coolants 435 Cornering fog lamps 121 Replacing bulbs 389 Switching off 121 122 Switching on 121 122 Cruise control 247 440 Canceling 248 Driving downhill 248 Driving uphill 248 Fine adjustment 249 Message in display 367 Setting current speed 248 Setting speeds 249 Cruise control lever 247 Cruising range fuel 434 Cup holder In rear seat armrest 261 Cup holders Cleaning 341 In front of seat armrest 260 Curb weight 328 Customer Assistance Center see CAC D Exterior lamps 117 Digital clock 129 Date day Exterior lamps delayed shut off 151 Digital speedometer 135 Setting 148 Hazard warning flasher 122 Direction of rotation tires 307 Date month Setting 147 Date year Setting 149 Daytime running lamp mode 118 Setting 150 Deactivating Headlamps 56 Immobilizer 91 Interior lighting delayed shut off 153 Rear window defroster 175 Residual heat 197 Seat heating 112 Tow away alarm 93 Discharged battery Jump starting 406 Disconnecting Vehicle battery
270. meter main 129 Oil level see Engine oil level Oil see Engine oil Fuel filler flap manually 384 Glove box 258 Hood 296 Power tilt sliding sunroof inanemergency 385 Side windows 239 Tailgate 101 Tilt sliding sunroof 243 385 Tilt sliding sunroof with SmartKey 245 Windows 239 Windows with SmartKey 241 Telephone 158 199 224 Vehicle outside the USA and Canada 13 Operating safety Audio system 199 Operator s Manual 10 Ornamental moldings 339 Outer seats Rear seat head restraints 108 110 Outside temperature 135 Outside temperature indicator 127 Overdue maintenance service 335 Overhead control panel 29 Overspeed range 442 P Paintwork 338 Panic alarm 83 Panic button on SmartKey 83 Parcel net In cargo compartment 250 In front passenger footwell 262 Parking 55 285 Parking brake 47 55 Engaging 55 Message in display 363 Releasing 47 Parking lamps Messages in display 373 Parking lamps front Replacing bulbs 389 Parking lamps rear Replacing bulbs 389 Parking position Exterior rear view mirrors 115 156 173 Partition net 252 Parts service 418 PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp see Front passenger front air bag off indicator lamp Passenger compartment 289 Interior lighting 123 Interior rear view mirror 41 Main fuse boxin 413 Parcel net in front passenger footwell 262 Passenger safety see Occupant safety Pedals 283 Performance In cold weather 434 In hot weather 434 Phone book Loading 160 Qui
271. minated by a Response Center or Customer Assistance Center representative except Roadside Assistance and Information calls which can also be terminated by pressing button on the multifunction steering wheel or the respective button for ending a telephone call on the audio system or COMAND head unit i When a Tele Aid call has been initiated the audio system or the COMAND system audio is muted and the selected mode radio or CD pauses The optional cellular phone if installed switches off If you must use this phone the vehicle must be parked Disconnect the coiled cord and place the call The COMAND navigation system if engaged will continue to run The display in the instrument cluster is available for use and spoken commands are only available by press ing the RPT button on the COMAND unit A pop up window will appear in the COMAND display to indicate that a Tele Aid call is in progress Remote door unlock In case you have locked your vehicle unin tentionally e g SmartKey inside vehicle and the reserve SmartKey is not handy gt Contact the Mercedes Benz Response Center at 1 800 756 9018 in the USA or 1 888 923 8367 in Canada You will be asked to provide your pass word which you provided when you completed the subscriber agreement Then return to your vehicle and pull the tailgate recessed handle for a minimum of 20 seconds until the SOS button is flashing The message Connecting call
272. mp on the button comes on The air conditioning uses the refrigerant R134a This refrigerant is free of CFCs which are harmful to the ozone layer If the air conditioning cannot be turned on again this indicates that the air conditioning is losing refrigerant The compressor has turned itself off Have the air conditioning checked at the nearest authorized Mercedes Benz Center Rear passenger compartment adjustable air vents The air conditioning for the rear passenger compartment is controlled via the climate control panel gt page 177 i The temperature at the center air vents for the rear passenger compartment and is the same as at the dashboard center air vents Controls in detail Climate control The air vents for the rear passenger Adjusting air distribution compartment are located in the rear gt Push the slide for the left center center console vent Q or right center vent 3 to the left right up or down The air flow is directed in the corre J sponding direction i For draft free ventilation push slides Q and upward L w Adjusting air volume Left center air vent gt Turn thumbwheel up or down Thumbwheel for air volume control for center air vents Right center air vent The air volume is increased or decreased detail a e be 4 i e S Automatic climate control Item Left side defroster vent fixed Left side
273. mpletely reset to factory sets while driving Setting locator lighting With the locator lighting feature activated and the exterior lamp switch in position Ag the following lamps will switch on when the vehicle is unlocked with the SmartKey during darkness e Parking lamps e Tail lamps e License plate lamps e Side marker lamps e Front fog lamps The locator lighting switches off when the driver s door is opened If you do not open a door after unlocking with the SmartKey the lamps will switch off automatically after approximately 40 seconds gt Move the selection marker with button or E to the Lighting submenu Press button Xj or R repeatedly until the message Surround lighting appears in the multifunction display The selection marker is on the current setting Surround lighting Or Off P54 32 2374 31 Press button or E to switch the locator lighting function On Turn the exterior lamp switch to position W when exiting the vehicle gt page 116 The locator lighting feature is activated Controls in detail Control system Setting night security illumination Headlamps delayed shut off Use this function to set whether and how long you would like the exterior lamps to illuminate during darkness after exiting the vehicle and all doors closed With the delayed shut off feature activated and the exterior lamp switch in position A9 before the engine is turne
274. ms may have failed e Coolant temperature display e Tachometer e Cruise control display You are attempting to drive with one or more doors open Practical hints What to do if Possible solution Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Continue driving with added caution Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Have the electronic systems checked by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Have the electronic systems checked by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Close the doors Practical hints What to do if Display symbol Display message Possible cause Suggested solution USA only The engine oil level is too low gt Add engine oil gt page 300 and check At next gas station the engine oil level gt page 298 add 1 0 qt engine oil Canada only At next gas station add 1 0 1 engine oil Engine oil leve There is no oil in the engine There isa Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt as Stop engine off danger of engine damage soon as possible gt Turn off the engine gt Add engine oil gt page 300 and check the engine oil level gt page 298 Engine oil level You have added too much engine oil gt Have oil siphoned or drained off Reduce oil level There is a risk of damaging the engine or Observe all legal requirements with the catalytic converter respect to its disposal Change engine oil It may be that there is water inthe engine Have the engi
275. n 17 mm Tire T 125 90 R16 98M Must not be used with snow chains Technical data Rims and Tires Technical data Electrical system Model Generator alternator Starter motor Battery Spark plugs Electrode gap Tightening torque C 240 all models 14V 120 A 12 V 1 7 kW 12 V 100 Ah Bosch F 8 DPP 332 NGK PFR 5 R 11 0 039 in 1 0 mm 15 22 lb ft 20 30 Nm YV Main Dimensions Model Overall vehicle length Overall vehicle width Overall vehicle height Wheelbase Track front Track rear C 240 all models 179 0 in 4546 mm 68 0 in 1728 mm 57 8 in 1467 mm 106 9 in 2715 mm 59 3 in 1505 mm 58 1 in 1476 mm Technical data Main Dimensions Technical data Weights Roof load max 220 Ib 100 kg Technical data Fuels coolants lubricants etc V Fuels coolants lubricants etc Capacities Vehicle components and their respective Please refer to the Factory Approved lubricants must match Therefore only use Service Products pamphlet or inquire at products tested and approved by your Mercedes Benz Center Mercedes Benz Model Capacity Fuels coolants lubricants etc Engine with oil filter C 240 7 9 US qt 7 5 Approved engine oils C 240 4MATIC 7 4 US qt 7 0 I Automatic transmission 8 5 US qt 8 0 I MB Automatic Transmission Fluid Rear axle 1 2 US qt 1 1 Hypoid gear oil SAE 85 W 90 Front axle C 240 4MATIC 0 5 US qt 0 46 I Hypoid gear oil SAE 85 W
276. n either turn signal If the cornering fog lamps came on automatically they will also go out automatically depending on the steering angle Switching off cornering fog lamps The combination switch for the turn signal resets automatically after major steering wheel movements This will switch off the cornering fog lamps if they were activated by switching on the left or right turn signal If the turn signal should stay on after mak ing the turn the turn signal and cornering fog lamp can be switched off by returning the combination switch to its original posi tion Controls in detail Lighting Driving rearward Hazard warning flasher Switching on hazard warning flasher Switching on cornering fog lamps The hazard warning flasher can be e Pa Ara warning Hasher f f switch Q gt PI th v select r i switched on at all times even with the ACE LIE Bes Cree enced SmartKey removed from the starter All turn signals are flashing position R switch iJ The inverse front fog lamp comes on automatically depending on the steering direction and steering angle The hazard warning flasher switches on With the hazard warning flasher automatically when an air bag deploys activated and the combination switch The hazard warning flasher switch is set for either left or right turn only the Switching off cornering fog lamps located on the upper part of the center respective turn signals will operate console when the ignit
277. n order to avoid damaging the transmission Do not run cold engine at high engine speeds Running a cold engine at high engine speeds may shorten the service life of the engine A It is dangerous to shift the gear selector lever out of P or N if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal Warning For more information on driving see Driv ing instructions gt page 283 Switching on headlamps For more information on headlamps see Lighting gt page 116 Low beam headlamps The exterior lamp switch is located on the dashboard to the left of the steering wheel Exterior lamp switch Q Off Low beam headlamps on Getting started Driving gt Turn exterior lamp switch to position By The low beam headlamp indicator lamp in the instrument cluster comes on gt page 24 High beam The combination switch is located on the left of the steering column Combination switch High beam High beam flasher Getting started Driving gt Pushcombination switch in direction of arrow Q The high beam headlamp indicator lamp E in the instrument cluster comes on gt page 24 Turn
278. n support For example a load rating of 91 corre sponds to a maximum load of 1356 lbs 615 kg the tire is designed to support See also Maximum tire load gt page 323 where the maximum load as sociated with the load index is indicated in kilograms and Ibs Warning VAN The tire load rating must always be at least half of the GAWR gt page 328 of your vehi cle Otherwise tire failure may be the result which may cause an accident and or seri ous personal injury to you or others Always replace rims and tires with the same designation manufacturer and type as shown on the original part Warning A Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit or vehicle capacity weight as indicated on the placard located on the driver s door B pillar Overloading the tires can overheat them possibly causing a blowout Overloading the tires can also result in handling or steering problems or brake failure Operation Tires and wheels For additional information on tire load rating see Load identification gt page 321 i Tire load rating gt page 318 and Tire speed rating gt page 318 are also referred to as service descrip tion Operation Tires and wheels Tire speed rating Summer tires e At the tire manufacturer s option any m tire with a speed capability above Hrn 143 moh 240 kh can include a PP P Q up to 100 mph 160 km h ZR in the
279. n switch to the next highest wiper speed e have the windshield wipers checked at the nearest authorized Mercedes Benz Center Rear window wiper gt Switch on ignition gt page 33 The combination switch is located on the i left of the steering column The rear window wiper engages automatically if the gear selector lever is moved to position R with the windshield wipers switched on Activating intermittent wipe gt Turn switch Q to position Deactivating intermittent wipe gt Turn switch to position Combination switch Rear window wiper switch Wiping rear window with washer fluid Intermittent wiping Rear window wiper off Wiping rear window with washer fluid Getting started Driving Wiping with washer fluid gt Turn switch Q to position or The rear window wiper operates with washer fluid Hold switch in position or until the rear window is clean For information on filling up the washer reservoir see Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system gt page 303 Getting started Driving Problems while driving The engine runs erratically and misfires e An ignition cable may be damaged e The engine electronics may not be op erating properly e Unburned gasoline may have entered the catalytic converter and damaged it Give very little gas Have the problem repaired by an au thorized Mercedes Benz Cente
280. nction Visit workshop Possible cause The ABS has detected a malfunction and has switched off The ESP and the BAS are also deactivated The brake system is still functioning normally but without the ABS available The ABS or the ABS display is malfunctioning Possible solution gt Continue driving with added caution Wheels may lock during hard braking reducing steering capability gt Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident gt Continue driving with added caution Wheels may lock during hard braking reducing steering capability gt Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident Display message BAS unavailable See Operator s Manual malfunction Visit workshop Display malfunction Visit workshop Possible cause The charging voltage has fallen below ten volts The BAS has switched off The battery might not be charged sufficiently The brake system is still functioning normally but without the BAS available The BAS has detected a malfunction and switched off The BAS or the BAS display is malfunctioning Practical hints What to do if Possible solution gt Continue driving with added caution gt If necessary have the generator and batt
281. nd child restraint systems We recommend all infants and children be properly restrained at all times while the vehicle is in motion All lap shoulder belts except the driver s seat belt have special seat belt retractors for secure fastening of child restraints To fasten a child restraint follow child restraint instructions for mounting Then pull the shoulder belt out completely and let it retract During seat belt retraction a ratcheting sound can be heard to indicate that the special seat belt retractor is activated The belt is now locked Push down on child restraint to take up any slack To deactivate release seat belt buckle and let seat belt retract completely The seat belt can again be used in the usual manner i Information on child seats with mount ing fittings for tether anchorages gt page 79 For information on LATCH type child seat mounts gt page 80 The use of infant or child restraints is required by law in all 50 states the District of Columbia the U S territo ries and all Canadian provinces Infants and small children should be seated in an appropriate infant or child restraint system properly secured by a lap shoulder belt or if so equipped a top tether anchorage point and a child restraint lower anchorage system that complies with U S Federal Motor Vehi cle Safety Standards 213 and 225 and Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 210 2 Warning VAN Never releas
282. nd the The foldable LATCH type anchors are backrest page R1 located between the seat cushion and the P91 40 2343 31 backrest The child seat must be firmly attached in the right and left side anchors Q With a child seat installed in the left rear seat the seat belt for the center seat occupied by a passenger must op erate freely Guide seat belt between its seat cushion mount and backrest mount along outside of right side child seat anchor Anchorage ring Hook Once the top tether anchorage hook is attached the child restraint itself can be secured Tighten the top tether strap according to the child restraint 7 manufacturer s instructions N si a 2661 31 For safety make sure the hook has Anchors attached to the ring beyond the Button safety catch as illustrated To fold anchors back gt Press down button on each anchor and return anchor Q to its catch i Non LATCH type child seats may also be used and can be installed using the vehicle s seat belt system Install child seat according to the manufacturer s instructions Warning A Children too big for a toddler restraint must ride in seats using regular seat belts Position shoulder belt across chest and shoulder not face or neck A booster seat may be necessary to achieve proper belt positioning for children from 41 Ibs until they reach a height where a lap shoulder belt fits properly without a b
283. nd to viscosity of the oil at different temper FSS Canada vehicles adjust settings atures The higher the temperature an Flexible Service System Cruise control oil can tolerate without becoming thin Maintenance service indicator in the Driving convenience system that or the lower the temperature it can multifunction display that informs the automatically maintains the vehicle tolerate without becoming viscous the driver when the next vehicle mainte speed set by the driver better the viscosity nance service is due FSS evaluates Curb weight ESP engine temperature oil level vehicle gt page 328 Electronic Stability Program a Bas S Ei Improves vehicle handling and DOT P amp maintenance service and calls for the Department of Transportation directional stability gt page 328 next maintenance service accordingly GAWR Gross Axle Weight Rating gt page 328 Gear range Number of gears which are available to the automatic transmission for shifting The automatic gear shifting process can be adapted to specific operating conditions using the gear selector lever GPS Global Positioning System Satellite based system for relaying geographic location information to and from vehicles equipped with special receivers Employs CD digital maps for navigation GVW Gross Vehicle Weight gt page 328 GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating gt page 328 Instrument cluster The displays and indic
284. ne oil checked Visit workshop oil Practical hints What to do if Display symbol Display message Possible cause Suggested solution Engine oil level The engine oil has dropped to a critical Check the engine oil level Visit workshop level gt page 298 and add oil as required gt page 300 gt If you must add engine oil frequently have the engine checked for possible leaks 0il sensor malfunction The measuring system is malfunctioning Have the measuring system checked Visit workshop by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center When the message At next gas station When this occurs the warning will first E H add 1 0 qt engine oil Canada 1 0 1 come on intermittently and then stay on if appears while the engine is runningandat the oil level drops further operating temperature the engine oil level The engine oil level warnings should not be ignored Extended driving with j s Visually check for oil leaks If no obvious oil the symbol displayed could result in nas dropped a the tin leaks are noted drive to the nearest serious engine damage that is not mum level service station where the engine oil should covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited be topped to the required level with an Warranty approved oil specified in the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet Practical hints What to do if Display symbol Display message Check gas cap See Operator s Manual Hood open Remove key
285. neeesereeenee Audio and telephone operation Operating safety eee eeeeeeeee Operating and display elements Button and soft key operation Operation arerin ai Radio operation ccceseseeeeeees Introduction to satellite radio GSM network phones 06 TDMA or CDMA network phones Emergency calls 911 oe Power WINCOWS ecescccceeeesrteeeeeeeees Opening and closing the WINDOWS sschatebebetieeneiiebs geatedaxtensdeces Synchronizing power windows Power tilt sliding sunroof Opening and closing the power tilt sliding SUNTOOF eeeeeeeeeeeee Synchronizing the power tilt sliding SUNTOOF eeeeeeeeeeee Driving SYStEMS eee eeeeeeeeeseeeeee 247 At the gas station ee eeeeeeeeee 293 Cruise Control 247 Operation ccc cceeeseeeeeeeneees 281 Refueling ccccccesesesecsesseseeeeseees 293 LOADING neiuna 250 The first 1000 miles 1500 km 282 Check regularly and before ROOF rack ooo eeeecceeseceesseeessseeeseeees 250 Driving instructions eee 283 a long tripe eeeeseeseeteeseeeseeseeeees 295 Parcel net in cargo Drive sensibly save fuel 283 Engine compartment seers 296 COMPALtMEN eeeeeeeeeeseestteeeees 250 Drinking and driving cece 283 OOO ats ohh wceediet tad eis 296 Storage compartment under POC AlS esi tivscctecivsansastesenececvessenrens 283 Engine Oilersiin 298 cargo c
286. ng point of the brake fluid is continuously reduced through the absorption of moisture from the atmosphere Under extremely strenu ous operating conditions this moisture content can lead to the formation of bubbles in the system thus reducing the system s efficiency Therefore the brake fluid must be replaced every two years preferably in the spring Only brake fluid approved by Mercedes Benz is recommended Your authorized Mercedes Benz Center will provide you with additional information Technical data Fuels coolants lubricants etc Premium unleaded gasoline To maintain the engine s durability and performance premium unleaded gaso line must be used If premium unleaded is not available and low octane fuel is used follow these precautions e Have the fuel tank only partially filled with unleaded regular and fill up with premium unleaded as soon as possible e Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt acceleration e Do not exceed an engine speed of 3000 rpm if the vehicle is loaded with a light load such as two persons and no luggage e Do not exceed Ta of maximum accelerator pedal position if the vehicle is fully loaded or operating in mountainous terrain Fuel requirements i Flexible Fuel Vehicles identified by a label reading Premium gasoline or E85 only on fuel filler flap are designed to operate on premium unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel E85 or any mixture of these two
287. ngine oils and oil filters required for vehicles with Maintenance System U S vehicles or FSS Canada vehicles For a listing of approved engine oils and oil filters refer to the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet in your vehicle More information on engine oil can be literature portfolio or contact an Filler cap found in the Technical data section authorized Mercedes Benz Center f gt page 429 and gt page 431 gt Unscrew filler cap Q from filler neck Excess oil must be siphoned or drained off It could cause damage to the engine and catalytic converter not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty gt Screw filler cap Q back on filler neck Using engine oils and oil filters of specification other than those expressly required for the Maintenance System U S vehicles or FSS Canada Be careful not to spill any oil when adding vehicles or changing of oil and oil filter Avoid environmental damage caused by oil at change intervals longer than those entering the ground or water called for by the Maintenance System U S vehicles or FSS Canada Vehicles will result in engine damage not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty gt Add engine oil as required Be careful Transmission fluid level not to overfill with oil The transmission fluid level does not need to be checked If you notice transmission fluid loss or gear shifting malfunctions have an authorized Mercede
288. nition gt page 33 Controls in detail Memory function Press button 3 The passenger side exterior rear view mirror is selected Adjust the exterior rear view mirror with button 2 so that you see the rear wheel and the road curb Press memory button Q Within three seconds press bottom of adjustment button 2 The parking position is stored if the mirror does not move i If the mirror does move repeat the above steps After the setting is stored you can move the mirror again Controls in detail Lighting For information on how to switch on the Exterior lamp switch EJ Off headlamps and use the turn signals see Daytime running lamp mode Switching on headlamps gt page 49 The exterior lamp switch is located on the gt page 118 and Turn signals gt page 50 dashboard to the left of the steering wheel EGE Automatic headlamp mode Daytime running lamp mode gt page 118 i If you drive in countries where vehicles drive on the other side of the road than the country where the vehicle is regis tered you must have the headlamps modified for symmetrical low beams Relevant information can be obtained at your authorized Mercedes Benz Sia Parking lamps also tail lamps license plate lamps side marker lamps instrument panel lamps AN U Low beam headlamps or high beam headlamps when the combination switch is pushed Center es ee forward and parking
289. nment free of commercials SIRIUS satellite radio uses a fleet of high power satellites to broadcast 24 hours per day coast to coast in the contiguous U S This diverse satellite delivered program ming is available for a monthly subscrip tion fee For more information and service availability call the SIRIUS Service Center gt page 217 or contact www siriusradio com i Additional satellite radio equipment and a subscription to a satellite radio service provider are required for the satellite radio operation described here Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center for details and availability for your vehicle Note that categories and channels shown in illustrations are dependent on programming content delivered by the service provider Programming content is subject to change Therefore channels and categories shown in illustrations and descriptions contained in this manual may differ from the channels and categories delivered by the service provider po Satellite radio service may be unavail able or interrupted from time to time for a variety of reasons such as envi ronmental or topographic conditions and other things beyond the service provider s or our control Service might also not be available in certain places e g in tunnels parking garages or within or next to buildings or near other technologies Program categories The channels are categorized Categories allow you to
290. nment bolt and push it on Insert wheel bolts and tighten them slightly Practical hints Flat tire P40 10 3343 31 gt Unscrew the alignment bolt install last wheel bolt and tighten slightly Warning A Only use genuine equipment Mercedes Benz wheel bolts Other wheel bolts may come loose Do not tighten the wheel bolts when the vehicle is raised Otherwise the vehicle could fall off the jack Lowering the vehicle gt Lower vehicle by turning crank counterclockwise until vehicle is resting fully on its own weight gt Remove the jack P40 10 3344 31 Wheel bolts gt Tighten the five wheel bolts evenly following the diagonal sequence illustrated Q to until all bolts are tight Observe a tightening torque of 80 lb ft 110 Nm Warning A Have the tightening torque checked after changing a wheel The wheels could come loose if they are not tightened to a torque of 80 Ib ft 110 Nm Before storing the jack it should be fully collapsed with handle folded in storage position gt page 378 gt Store the jack and the other vehicle tools in the storage compartment be hind the left trim panel gt page 378 V Battery The battery is located in the engine compartment on the right hand side Clamps Removing filter box gt Release clamps Q gt Remove filter box Installing filter box gt Insert filter box properly gt Secure it with clamps Q
291. not a dealer at Mercedes Benz USA LLC Customer Assistance Center One Mercedes Drive Montvale NJ 07645 0350 Introduction Operator s Manual Maintenance The Maintenance Booklet describes all the necessary maintenance work which should be performed at regular intervals Always have the Maintenance Booklet with you when you take the vehicle to your authorized Mercedes Benz Center for service The service advisor will record each service in the booklet for you Roadside Assistance The Mercedes Benz Roadside Assistance Program provides factory trained technical help in the event of a breakdown Calls to the toll free Roadside Assistance number 1 800 FOR MERCedes in the USA 1 800 387 0100 in Canada will be answered by Mercedes Benz Customer Assistance Representatives 24 hours a day 365 days a year For additional information refer to the Mercedes Benz Roadside Assistance Program brochure in your vehicle literature portfolio Change of address or ownership If you change your address be sure to send in the Change of Address Notice found in the Service and Warranty Informa tion Booklet or simply call the Mercedes Benz Customer Assistance Center in the USA at 1 800 FOR MERCedes or Customer Service in Canada at 1 800 387 0100 It is in your own interest that we can contact you should the need arise If you sell your Mercedes please leave all literature with the vehicle to make it
292. nroof does not open smoothly gt Switch on ignition gt page 33 Move and hold the sunroof switch in the direction of arrow gt page 243 until the tilt sliding sunroof is fully raised at the rear Hold the sunroof switch for approximately one second Check the Express open feature gt page 244 If the tilt sliding sunroof opens completely the tilt sliding sunroof is synchronized Otherwise repeat the above steps Y Driving systems The driving system of your vehicle is described on the following pages e Cruise control with which the vehicle can maintain a preset speed For information on the BAS ABS and ESP driving systems see Driving safety sys tems gt page 85 Cruise control Cruise control automatically maintains the speed you set for your vehicle Use of cruise control is recommended for driving at a constant speed for extended periods of time You can set or resume cruise control at any speed over 20 mph 30 km h The cruise control function is operated by means of the cruise control lever The cruise control lever is the uppermost lever on the left hand side of the steering column gt page 22 Controls in detail Driving systems A Cruise control is a convenience system de signed to assist the driver during vehicle op eration The driver is and must remain at all times responsible for the vehicle speed and for safe brake operation Warning Only us
293. nstrument cluster Outside temperature indicator Warning A The outside temperature indicator is not de signed to serve as an ice warning device and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose Indicated temperatures just above the freez ing point do not guarantee that the road sur face is free of ice The road may still be icy especially in wooded areas or on bridges 127 Controls in detail Instrument cluster The outside temperature is indicated in the multifunction display gt page 129 For information on how to select the unit of the indicated temperature i e degrees Celsius C or degrees Fahrenheit F see Selecting temperature display mode gt page 143 The temperature sensor is located in the front bumper area Due to its location the sensor can be affected by road or engine heat during idling or slow driving This means that the accuracy of the displayed temperature can only be verified by com parison to a thermometer placed next to the sensor not by comparison to external displays e g bank signs etc When moving the vehicle into colder ambi ent temperatures e g when leaving your garage you will notice a delay before the lower temperature is displayed A delay also occurs when ambient temper atures rise This prevents inaccurate tem perature indications caused by heat radiated from the engine during idling or slow driving Vv Control system The control system is ac
294. nter 911 using the number keypad on the audio head unit Press button for dialing to begin DIALING appears in the audio display while the telephone establishes the connection Wait until the emergency call center answers then describe the emergency i If no SIM card is in the mobile phone NO SERVICE appears in the audio display In that case you only can make an emergency call on the mobile phone itself without the use of the head unit TDMA CDMA network phones Placing a 911 emergency call using audio head unit with the phone locked gt Press button to switch to telephone operation CODE appears in the audio display Enter 911 using the number keypad on the audio head unit Press 0K soft key or button for dialing to begin DIALING appears in the audio display while the telephone establishes the connection Wait until the emergency call center answers then describe the emergency Placing a 911 emergency call using audio head unit with the phone unlocked gt Press button to switch to telephone operation Enter 911 using the number keypad on the audio head unit Press button for dialing to begin DIALING appears in the audio display while the telephone establishes the connection Wait until the emergency call center answers then describe the emergency Vv Power windows Opening and closing the windows The side windows are opened and closed electrically The
295. nth old child seated in a standard child restraint or as being a small individual such as a young teenager or a small adult the EJ indicator lamp will illuminate for approximately six seconds when the engine is started and then depending on occupant weight sensor readings from the seat remain illuminated or go out With the EJ indicator lamp illuminated the front passenger front air bag is deactivated With the EA indicator lamp out the front passenger front air bag is activated When the OCS senses that the front passen ger seat occupant is classified as an adult or someone larger than a small individual the approximately six seconds when the engine is started and then go out indicating that the front passenger front air bag is activated J indicator lamp will illuminate for If the J indicator lamp is illuminated the front passenger front air bag is deactivated and will not be deployed If the J indicator lamp is not illuminated the front passenger front air bag is activated and will be deployed e inthe event of certain frontal impacts e if impact exceeds a preset deployment threshold e independently of the side impact air bags If the front passenger front air bag is deployed the rate of inflation will be influenced by e the rate of relevant vehicle deceleration as assessed by the air bag control unit e front passenger s weight category as identified by the Occupant Classification S
296. nti theft alarm system is armed Warning A When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsuper vised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and or serious personal injury For more information see Locking and unlocking gt page 96 Safety and Security Safety and Security Occupant safety In this section you will learn the most important facts about the restraint system components of the vehicle e Seat belts gt page 66 e Child restraints gt page 79 e Lower anchors and tethers for children LATCH gt page 80 Supplemental Restraint System SRS with e Air bags gt page 61 e Air bag control unit with crash sensors e Emergency tensioning device ETD for seat belts gt page 69 Air bag system components with e X indicator lamp gt page 77 e Front passenger seat with Occupant Classification System OCS gt page 73 As independent systems their protective functions work in conjunction with each other i For information on infants and children traveling with you in the vehicle and restraint systems for infants and children see Children in the vehicle gt page 70 The SRS system conducts a self test when the ignition is switched on and in regular intervals while the engine i
297. nts section gt page 377 and gt page 398 Operation Winter driving Before the onset of winter have your vehicle winterized at an authorized Mercedes Benz Center This service includes Check of anticorrosion and antifreeze concentration Addition of cleaning concentrate to the water of the windshield and headlamp cleaning system Add MB Concentrate S to a premixed windshield washer solvent antifreeze which is formulated for below freezing temperatures gt page 437 Battery test Battery capacity drops with decreasing ambient temperature A well charged battery helps to make sure that the engine can be started even at low ambient temperatures Tire change Mercedes Benz recom mends M S rated radial ply tires with a minimum tread depth of approximately ty in 4 mm on all four wheels for the winter season Winter tires Always use winter tires at temperatures below 45 F 7 C and whenever wintry road conditions prevail Use of winter tires is the only way to achieve the maximum effectiveness of the ABS ESP and 4MATIC in winter operation For safe handling make sure that all mounted winter tires are of the same make and have the same tread design AN Winter tires with a tread depth under Ve in 4 mm must be replaced They are no longer suitable for winter operation Warning Always observe the speed rating of the winter tires installed on your vehicle If the maximum speed
298. nts and small children should be seated in a properly secured restraint system that complies with U S Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 225 and Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 210 2 You can store up to three different settings per SmartKey The following settings are stored when using the buttons on the driver s door e Driver s seat backrest and head restraint position e Steering wheel position e Exterior rear view mirror positions These key dependent memory settings can be deactivated if desired For informa tion on key dependent memory settings see Setting key dependency gt page 155 Controls in detail Memory function The following settings are not key dependent They are stored when using the buttons on the front passenger door e Front passenger seat backrest and head restraint position A Do not activate the memory function while driving Activating the memory function while driving could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle Warning Controls in detail Memory function The memory button and memory position Storing positions into memory Recalling positions from memory switch are located on the door EE Eee gt Adjust the seat steering wheel and H exterior rear view mirrors to the D h i n T desired position gt page 35 o not operate the power seats using e the memory button if the seat backrest gt Turn memory posit
299. o could lead to a malfunc tion of the vehicle s electronic system pos sibly resulting in an accident and or serious personal injury Warning Radio transmitters such as a portable tele phone or a citizens band unit should only be used inside the vehicle if they are con nected to an antenna that is installed on the outside of the vehicle The external antenna must be approved by Mercedes Benz Please contact an autho rized Mercedes Benz Center for informa tion on the installation of an approved external antenna Refer to the radio trans mitter operation instructions regarding use of an external antenna Controls in detail Useful features A Please do not forget that your primary re sponsibility is to drive the vehicle A driver s attention to the road must always be his her primary focus when driving For your safety and the safety of others we rec ommend that you pull over to a safe location and stop before placing or taking a tele phone call Warning If you choose to use the telephone while driving please use the hands free device and only use the telephone when road weather and traffic conditions permit Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a cellular telephone while driving a vehicle Only operate the COMAND Cockpit Man agement and Data System if road weather and traffic conditions permit Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph approximately 50 km h your vehicle
300. o the cup holder Use lids on open containers and do not fill containers to a height where the contents especially hot liquids could spill during braking vehicle maneuvers or in an accident When not in use keep the cup holder closed An open cup holder may cause injury to you or others when contacted during braking vehicle maneuvers or in an accident Keep in mind that objects placed in the cup holder may come loose during braking vehicle maneuvers or in an accident and be thrown around in the vehicle interior Objects thrown around in the vehicle interior may cause an accident and or serious personal injury Controls in detail Useful features Cup holder Opening cup holder gt Briefly press the front of cup holder Q The cup holder slides out slightly gt Pull out the cup holder until it stops Closing cup holder gt Slide cup holder in until it engages Parcel net in front passenger footwell A small convenience parcel net is located in the front passenger footwell It is for small and light items such as road maps mail etc A Do not place heavy or fragile objects or ob jects having sharp edges in the parcel net Warning In an accident during hard braking or sud den maneuvers they could be thrown around inside the vehicle and cause injury to vehicle occupants Ashtrays Center console ashtray Cover plate Sliding button Ashtray insert gt Briefly
301. ol 130 system Selecting the submenu or setting the volume Press button up to increase E down to decrease Telephone Press button to take a call to end a call Item Page Menu systems Press button for next menu m for previous menu Moving within a menu Press button Fa for next display for previous display Vv Center console Upper part OO Item Seat heating driver s side ESP control switch Hazard warning flasher switch switching on off Central locking switch Central unlocking switch Tow away alarm switch Anti theft alarm system indicator lamp Seat heating passenger side Page 112 87 122 103 103 93 92 112 At a glance Center console Item Front passenger front air bag off indicator lamp Audio system or COMAND see separate operating instructions Climate control Automatic climate control Rear window defroster Page 77 350 351 199 176 186 175 At a glance Center console Lower Part Ashtray Cigarette lighter Gear selector lever for automatic transmission Cup holders Armrest Program mode selector switch for automatic transmission V Overhead control panel any X Boe P82 00 2182 31 OOOO Item Rear interior lighting on off Power tilt sliding sunroof Right reading lamp on off Interior lighting control Hands free microphone for Tele Aid emergency call sys
302. ollowing important information when circumstances require you to place a child in the front passenger seat e Your vehicle is equipped with air bag technology designed to turn off the front passenger front air bag in your vehicle when the OCS senses the weight of a typical 12 month old child or less along with the weight of a standard appropriate child restraint on the front passenger seat e Achild in a rear facing child restraint on the front passenger seat will be seriously injured or even killed if the front passenger front air bag inflates in a collision which could occur under some circumstances even with the air bag technology installed in your vehicle The only means to completely eliminate this risk is to never place a child ina rear facing child restraint in the front seat We therefore strongly recommend that you always place a child ina rear facing child restraint in the back seat If you must install a rear facing child restraint on the front passenger seat because circumstances require you to do so make sure that the gJ indicator lamp is illuminated indicating that the front passenger air bag is deactivated Should the indicator lamp not illuminate or go out while the restraint is installed please check installation Periodically check the EA EEX indicator lamp while driving to make sure the gJ indicator lamp is illuminated If the J indicator lamp goes out or remains out do not transport a
303. omer Assistance Center Mercedes Benz customer service center which can help you with any questions about your vehicle and provide assistance in the event of a breakdown Technical terms CAN system Controller Area Network Data bus network serving to control vehicle functions such as door locking or windshield wiping depending on vehicle settings and or ambient conditions Cockpit All instruments switches buttons and indicator warning lamps in the passenger compartment needed for vehicle operation and monitoring Cold tire inflation pressure gt page 327 COMAND Cockpit Management and Data System Information and operating center for vehicle sound and communications systems including the radio and the navigation system as well as other optional equipment CD changer telephone etc Technical terms Control system Engine number ETD The control system is used to call up The number set by the manufacturer Emergency Tensioning Device vehicle information and to change and placed on the cylinder block to Device which deploys in certain frontal component settings Information and uniquely identify each engine and rear collisions exceeding the messages appear in the multifunction produced system s threshold to tighten the display The driver uses the buttons on z ar seat belts the multifunction steering wheel to Eng inpiollviecoey gt SRS Measurement for the inner friction navigate through the system a
304. ompartment air vents The air volume is controlled automati cally for the entire vehicle and the air distribution is controlled automatically Decreasing for each separate half of the vehicle gt Push temperature control Q and or 3 gt page 187 The automatic climate control system will correspondingly adjust the interior air temperature Controls in detail Automatic climate control Windshield fogged on the outside Adjusting air volume Adjusting automatically gt Press button BURR gt page 187 gt Switch the windshield wipers on Use button ERR for automatic mode or air gt page 51 volume controls or The indicator lamp on the button Switch to manual mode gt page 187 to adjust air volume comes on Turn air distribution control Q or manually The air volume is controlled automati to or gt page 187 Ne cally for the entire vehicle and the air Adjusting manually distribution is controlled automatically Seven blower speeds are available for each separate half of the vehicle gt Press air volume control or gt page 187 until the requested blower speed Is attained The indicator lamp on the button Egy goes out The automatic air distribution remains switched on Controls in detail Automatic climate control Defrosting Deactivating Maximum cooling MAXCOOL i gt Press button KA or If the left and right air distribution controls gt page 187 as well as the airflow
305. ompartment floor 251 Power assistance eee 283 Transmission fluid level 300 Retractable luggage cover and Brake S cos ciscssccsectessestsseserscssssessoreors 284 Coolant level cesesceeeeseeseeees 301 partition net sceseesescsersociccneeesene 252 Driving OTF scseccecscesesecessessorcceseseees 285 Battery rainei n 302 Split rear bench seat 254 Parking ccccicscsscasscessessesvecentvonsesteees 285 Windshield washer system and Loading instructions 256 TVE Sennen 286 headlamp cleaning system 303 Cargo tie down rings eeeeee 257 Hydroplaning eeseeceseeeseeneeeees 286 Tires and wheels cccccsssseseceeeseee 304 Useful features uieringe 258 TIPE TA CHON scceccsctsesiesthesetsesiersies 287 Important guidelines 0 304 Storage compartments 258 Tire speed rating ceeeeeeeeeee 287 Tire care and maintenance 305 SLAY Ss nenian 0500s 262 Winter driving instructions 288 Direction of rotation 0 307 Cigarette lighter eee 264 Standing water ee 289 Loading the vehicle 307 Electrical outlet eese 264 Passenger compartment 289 Recommended tire inflation Telephone ssice ieveesctsccsiasiesuseesonsons 265 Driving abroad eee 290 PIFOSSULE eeceeeecceeceesceeseeeeeeesees 313 Pele Ald ecc s32siieeletsetisceschecaceseas os 266 Control and operation of radio Checking tire inflation pressure 315
306. on pressure Spare tires will age and become worn over time even if never used and thus should be inspected and replaced when necessary Operation Tires and wheels Life of tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to e Driving style e Tire inflation pressure e Distance driven AN Tires and spare tire should be replaced after six years regardless of the remaining tread Warning Operation Tires and wheels Tread depth Do not allow your tires to wear down too far Adhesion properties on wet roads are sharply reduced at tread depths under 1 g in 3 mm Treadwear indicators TWI are required by law These indicators are located in six places on the tread circumference and become visible at a tread depth of approx imately eee in 1 6 mm at which point the tire is considered worn and should be replaced Recommended minimum tire tread depth e Summer tires in 3 mm e Winter tires ve in 4 mm A Warning Although the applicable federal motor safety laws consider a tire to be worn when the treadwear indicators TWI become visible at approximately Thig in 1 6 mm we recommend that you do not allow your tires ring tir to wear down to that level As tread depth Storing tires approaches We in 3 mm the adhesion H properties on a wet road are sharply Keep unmounted tires in a cool dry reduced place with as little exp
307. onditions may result in an acci dent Controls in detail Lighting The automatic headlamp feature is only an aid to the driver The driver is responsible for the operation of the vehicle s lights at all times gt Turn the exterior lamp switch to position W With the SmartKey in starter switch position 1 only the parking lamps will switch on and off automatically When the engine is running the low beam headlamps the tail and parking lamps the license plate lamps and the side marker lamps will switch on and off automatically 117 Controls in detail Lighting Daytime running lamp mode gt Turn the exterior lamp switch to position EJ or J When the engine is running the low beam headlamps are switched on In low ambient light conditions the following lamps will switch on additionally e Tail and parking lamps e License plate lamps e Side marker lamps For nighttime driving you should turn the exterior lamp switch to position to permit activation of the high beam head lamps i With the daytime running lamp mode activated and the exterior lamp switch in position JQ the high beam head lamps cannot be switched on The high beam flasher is available at all times Canada only The daytime running lamp mode is manda tory and therefore in a constant mode When the engine is running and you shift from a driving position to position N or P the low beam headlamps will swi
308. oolant temperature gauge 126 Driving safety Systems BD SOAS css edi eevehi andr n ne ravea 105 Trip odometer sssr 127 ABS aeeoeia ta ri 85 Easy entry exit feature 105 Tachometer 127 BAS niecne e 86 Removing and installing front Outside temperature indicator 127 ES Pesner e 87 seat head restraints 0 0 107 Control system c cesceceseceseceseeeeeeees 129 Four wheel electronic traction Rear seat head restraints 108 Multifunction display 068 129 system 4MATIC with the ESP 90 Multicontour seats s s s 111 Multifunction steering wheel 130 Anti theft Systems eeeeeeeeeseeeeeees 91 Seat heating oo eeeeeneeeseeees 112 MENUS eest eee 132 IMMODIIZET seisnes 91 Memory function 0 0 cece 113 Standard display menu 0 134 Anti theft alarm system 91 Storing positions into memory 114 AUDIO MENU hu cee eeeeeeceeeseeeeeeees 135 Tow away alarm oo eeeeseeeeneeeees 93 Recalling positions from memory 114 NAV M NU eeeeeececeeeesseeeeeeeeeee 138 Storing exterior rear view mirror Vehicle status message memory Parking position eee eeeeeeee 115 MENU ssia ie aean aa 138 Settings MenU essseeesssesssressesssses 140 Trip Computer MENU cccceeeee 156 TEL MEN seeds es sccstecesavectscetiaseeecaecd 158 Automatic transmission 00 One touch gearshifting 0 0 Gear ranges 00 eeseeeeeneeee
309. ooster Before installing the child seat make sure anchors Q are folded out and locked in place Safety and Security Occupant safety Install child seat according to manufacturer s instructions The child seat must be firmly attached in the right and left side anchors 4 An incorrectly mounted child seat may come loose during an accident which could result in serious injury or death to the child Damaged or impact damaged child seats or child seat mounting fittings must be replaced Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle even if the children are secured in a child restraint system Safety and Security Occupant safety Blocking of rear door window operation Activating override switch gt Slide override switch 3 to the right Warning A You can block the rear door window operation for instance when you have The rear door windows can no longer Activate the override switch when children children riding in the rear passenger be operated using the respective are riding in the back seats of the vehicle compartment switch located in the rear doors The children may otherwise injure them A I g i in the win The override switch is located on the door ee 8 by becomne trappeciinitne win dow opening control panel of the driver s door Operation of the rear door windows with the switches located on the door control panel of the driver s door is still When leaving the vehicle a
310. or illustration purposes only Load limit data is specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in the illustra tions below Refer to placard on vehicle for actual data specific to your vehicle Placard Example A ADDITIONAL COMPACT SPARE TIRE COLT RE INF RE 7125 70015 oti P40 00 2051 31 Load limit information on the Tire and Loading Information placard The placard showing the load limit informa tion is located on the driver s door B pillar If your vehicle is equipped with the Tire and Loading Information placard Example A locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kilograms or XXX lbs on this placard The combined weight of all occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue load if applicable should never exceed the weight referenced in that statement Placard Example B VEHICLE TIRE INFORMATION Wl Kc MELBs SEATING CAPACITY COLD TIRE PRESSURE Load limit information on the Vehicle Tire Information placard The placard showing the load limit informa tion is located on the driver s door B pillar If your vehicle is equipped with the Vehicle Tire Information placard Example B locate the heading Vehicle Capacity Weight on this placard The combined weight of all occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue if applicable should never exceed the weight listed next to vehicle capacity weight Seating capacity
311. or call our Customer Assistance Center at 1 800 FOR MERCedes 1 800 367 6372 for details Safety and Security Occupant safety Air bags Warning VAN Air bags are designed to reduce the poten tial of injury and fatality in certain frontal impacts front air bags or side impacts side impact air bags and head protection window curtain air bags However no system available today can totally eliminate injuries and fatalities The deployment of the air bags temporarily releases a small amount of dust from the air bags This dust however is neither injurious to your health nor does it indicate a fire in the vehicle The dust might cause some tem porary breathing difficulty for people with asthma or other breathing trouble To avoid this you may wish to get out of the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so If you have any breathing difficulty but cannot get out of the vehicle after the air bag inflates then get fresh air by opening a window or door Safety and Security Occupant safety Warning VAN To reduce the risk of injury when the front air bags inflate it is very important for the driver and front passenger to always be in a properly seated position and to wear their seat belts For maximum protection in the event of a collision always be in normal seated position with your back against the backrest Fasten your seat belt and make sure that it is prop erly positioned on your body Since the air b
312. ormance At ambient temperatures above 95 F 35 C start times may increase and be accompanied by a rough idle following the start Cruising range E85 fuel contains less energy per gallon than gasoline To make sure that engine performance with ethanol fuel is similar to that when using gasoline the engine must burn more ethanol fuel As a result it is to be expected that the fuel consumption will increase when using E85 compared to gasoline operation i Use of E85 may reduce your driving range Maintenance Please inform your Mercedes Benz Center if you use or have used E85 fuel when your vehicle is delivered for maintenance or repairs Coolants The engine coolant is a mixture of water and anticorrosion antifreeze which provides e Corrosion protection e Freeze protection e Boiling protection by increasing the boiling point The cooling system was filled at the factory with a coolant providing freeze protection to approximately 22 F 30 C and corrosion protection If the antifreeze mixture is effective to 22 F 30 C the boiling point of the coolant in the pressurized cooling system is reached at approx 266 F 130 C The coolant solution must be used year round to provide the necessary corro sion protection and increase boil over protection Refer to Maintenance Booklet for replacement interval Coolant system design and coolant used determine the replacement interval The replac
313. ornia law you may be entitled to a replacement of your vehicle or a refund of the purchase price or lease price if Mercedes Benz USA LLC and or its au thorized repair or service facilities fail to fix one or more substantial defects or mal functions in the vehicle that are covered by its express warranty after a reasonable number of repair attempts During the pe riod of 18 months from original delivery of the vehicle or the accumulation of 18000 miles approx 29000 km on the odometer of the vehicle whichever occurs first a reasonable number of repair at tempts is presumed for a retail buyer or lessee if one or more of the following oc curs 1 the same substantial defect or mal function results in a condition that is likely to cause death or serious bodily injury if the vehicle is driven that de fect or malfunction has been subject to repair two or more times and you have directly notified Mercedes Benz USA LLC in writing of the need for its repair 2 the same substantial defect or mal function of a less serious nature than category 1 has been subject to repair four or more times and you have direct ly notified us in writing of the need for its repair or Introduction Operator s Manual 3 the vehicle is out of service by reason of repair of the same or different sub stantial defects or malfunctions for a cumulative total of more than 30 calender days Written notification should be sent to us
314. osition R immediately once your vehicle exceeds a speed of approx 6 mph 10 km h immediately when you press button 1 for the driver s side exterior rear view mirror 173 Controls in detail Good visibility Sun visors The sun visors protect you from sun glare while driving Warning A Do not use the vanity mirror while driving Keep the mirrors in the sun visors closed while vehicle is in motion Reflected glare can endanger you and others gt Swing sun visors down when you experience glare 174 If sunlight enters through a side window disengage sun visor from mounting Q and pivot to the side The mirror lamp 8 will switch off Mounting Mirror cover Mirror lamp Sun visor gt Touse illuminated mirror lift up cover 2 Controls in detail Good visibility Rear window defroster Activating a Warning A gt Press button E or in the climate control panel gt page 177 or automatic climate control panel gt page 187 The rear window defroster uses a large amount of power To keep the battery drain to a minimum switch off the defroster as soon as the rear window is Any accumulation of snow and ice should be removed from the rear window before driving Visibility could otherwise be clear The defroster is automatically The indicator lamp on the button impaired endangering you and others deactivated after approximately comes on 6 to 17 minute
315. osure to light as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and gasoline Depending upon the weather and or road surface conditions the tire traction varies widely Cleaning tires Never use a round nozzle to power wash tires The intense jet of water can result in damage to the tire Always replace a damaged tire TWI Tread Wear Indicator The treadwear indicator appears as a solid band across the tread Direction of rotation Unidirectional tires offer added advan tages such as better hydroplaning perfor mance To benefit however you must make sure the tires rotate in the direction specified An arrow on the sidewall indicates the intended direction of rotation spinning of the tire i Spare wheels may be mounted against the direction of rotation spinning even with a unidirectional tire for temporary use only until the regular drive wheel has been repaired or replaced Always observe and follow applicable tempo rary use restrictions and speed limita tions indicated on the spare wheel Loading the vehicle Two labels on your vehicle show how much weight it may properly carry e The Tire and Loading Information placard Example A or the Vehicle Tire Information placard Example B can be found on the driver s door B pillar This placard tells you important information about the number of people that can be in the vehicle and the total weight that can be carried in the vehicle
316. ote control 96 Restoring to factory setting 99 Selective setting 98 Starting the engine 47 Turning off the engine 57 Unlocking with 32 Kickdown 169 441 Kilometers miles in speedometer 143 Kilopascal 328 Km h or mph in speedometer 143 L Labels identification 420 Lamp bulbs exterior 388 Lamp sensor Message in display 372 Lamps exterior Front 389 Light sensor 372 Messages in display 371 374 Rear 389 Lamps indicator and warning ABS 25 344 Battery SmartKey 98 Brakes 25 345 Engine diagnostics 346 349 Engine malfunction 25 346 347 ESP 25 348 Front fog lamps 116 Front passenger front air bag off 27 66 350 351 Fuel reserve 25 349 High beam headlamps 25 Instrument cluster 344 349 Low beam headlamps 25 Maintenance service indicator 334 Rear fog lamp 116 Seat belt telltale 25 349 SRS 25 61 349 Turn signals 25 Language Multifunction display 144 Setting 144 LATCH type child seat anchors 80 Folding back 81 Folding out 80 Layout of poly V belt drive 421 Leather upholstery Cleaning 341 License plate lamps Messages in display 372 Replacing bulbs 389 Light alloy wheels Cleaning 340 Technical data 424 Light sensor 372 Lighter see Cigarette lighter Lighting 116 Automatic headlamp mode 117 Cargo compartment 124 Combination switch 120 Daytime running lamp mode 118 Door entry lamps 124 Exterior lamp switch 116 Front fog lamps 119 High beams 120 Instrument cluster illumination 125 Instruments 125 Interior
317. ow with Wiper blades 397 Standing lamp bulbs rear 396 washer fluid 53 Tail lamp bulbs 396 Recommended tire Turn signal lamp bulbs inflation pressure 329 front 392 394 Turn signal lamp bulbs rear 396 Wiper blades 397 Reporting Safety defects 18 Research Octane Number see RON Reset button in the instrument cluster 125 140 141 Resetting All functions control system 140 All functions of a submenu 141 Fuel consumption 158 Maintenance service indicator 336 Trip odometer 127 Residual heat utilization 197 Residual ventilation 197 Restraint system Message in display 361 Restraint system see Infant and child restraint systems Rim 329 Rims 423 Roadside Assistance 12 RON 294 443 Roof rack 250 Rubber parts Cleaning 342 468 S Safety Occupant 60 Safety belts see Seat belts Safety defects Reporting 18 Safety systems Driving 85 Satellite radio Additional text information 216 general information 212 Manual channel input 214 Storing station 216 Seat belt force limiter 69 Seat belt system Message in display 375 Seat belt telltale 25 Seat belts 66 Cleaning 341 Fastening 43 Height adjustment 45 Proper use of 45 68 Safety guidelines 64 Telltale 349 Seat cushion depth Adjusting 111 Seat heating Switching off 112 Switching on 112 Seating capacity 309 Seats 105 Adjusting 35 Easy entry exit feature 105 Heating 112 Manual seat 36 Multicontour seat 111 Power seat 38 Split rear bench seat 254 Securing cargo
318. owing options are available for Direct frequency input gt Select desired waveband selecting a station Direct frequency input gt page 208 Manual tuning gt page 209 Automatic seek tuning gt page 209 Scan search gt page 209 P82 60 4454 31 Station memory gt page 210 y gt pag gt Press EJ button gt Enter desired frequency with buttons to Gal Automatic station memory Autostore gt page 210 The station search proceeds in the following frequency increments 200 kHz in FM range 10 kHz in AM range i You can only enter frequencies within the respective waveband If a button is not pressed within four seconds the radio will return to the last station tuned Manual tuning gt gt gt Select desired waveband Press or button for approx three seconds Press button repeatedly until desired frequency has been reached Step by step station tuning takes place in ascending or descending order Each time the button is pressed the radio tunes further by 0 2 MHz During manual tuning the radio is muted Automatic seek tuning gt gt Select desired waveband Press Bagg or button briefly The radio will tune to the next highest or next lowest receivable frequency i If no station is received after two consecutive scans of the complete frequency range then the scan stops at the frequency from which it began Controls in detail
319. own rings 257 Cargo tie down rings 257 Catalytic converter 291 CD changer 217 CD changer operation 219 CD player Operating 137 CD operation 217 Center console 27 Front passenger front air bag off indicator lamp 27 66 Lampin 350 351 Lower part 28 Upper part 27 Center console ashtray 262 Centigrade Setting temperature units 143 Central locking Automatic 102 From inside 103 Locking from inside 103 Switch 103 Switching on off control system 153 Unlocking from inside 103 Central locking switch 103 Central unlocking Switch 103 Unlocking from inside 103 Central unlocking switch 103 Certification label 420 Changing Batteries SmartKey CDs 217 Changing key setting Charcoal filter 194 Activating 195 Deactivating 195 Charging Vehicle battery 404 Checking Brake fluid 295 Coolant level 295 301 Engine oil level 295 298 Tire inflation pressure 295 Vehicle lighting 295 Washer reservoir level Child safety 70 Airbags 62 Front passenger front air bag off indicator lamp 77 Infant and child restraint systems 66 70 LATCH type child seat anchors 80 OCS 73 387 155 295 Child safety switch see Blocking of rear door window operation Child seat anchors see LATCH type child seat anchors Cigarette lighter 264 Cleaning Cloth upholstery 342 Cup holders 341 Gear selector lever 341 Hard plastic trimitems 341 Headlamps 171 Headliner and shelf below rear window 341 Instrument cluster 340 L
320. pare wheel bolts 378 Towing eye bolt 378 Vehicle jack 378 Wheel wrench 378 Vehicle washing 339 VIN 420 444 Ww Warning lamps see Lamps indicator and warning Warning sounds Drivers seat belts 66 Parking brake 48 Warranty coverage 419 Washer fluid Wiping rear window with 53 Wiping windshield with 52 Washer fluid see Windshield washer fluid Washer reservoir level Checking 295 Washing the vehicle 337 Wear pattern tires 331 Weights 428 Wheel change Tightening torque 402 Wheels Tires and wheels 304 Window curtain air bags 66 Windows see Side windows Windshield Defogging 180 191 Refilling washer fluid 303 Replacing wiper blades 397 Washer fluid 303 437 Washer system 437 Windshield washer fluid 437 Message in display 376 Mixing ratio 437 Refilling 303 Windshield washer system 437 Windshield wipers 50 Fast wiper speed 51 Intermittent wiping 52 Replacing wiper blades 397 Single wipe 52 Switching on 51 Wiping windshield with washer fluid 52 Winter driving 332 X Block heater Canada only 333 Xenon headlamps Snow chains 333 Bi Xenon 439 Tires 332 Winter driving instructions 288 Winter tires 332 Wiper blades Cleaning 340 Installing 397 Removing 397 Replacing 397 Wiping Rear window with washer fluid 53 Windshield with washer fluid 52 Wood trims Cleaning 342 Service and Literature Your authorized Mercedes Benz Center has trained technicians and original Mercedes Benz parts to service your vehicle p
321. passenger car tires must conform to federal safety requirements in addition to these grades Operation Tires and wheels Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rat ing based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For ex ample a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half 1 1 3 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate Operation Tires and wheels Traction The traction grades from highest to low est are AA A B and C Those grades rep resent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor mance A The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics Warning Temperature The temperature grades are A the high est B and C representing the tire s resis tance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor labor
322. passengers should always wear seat belts If you are ever in an accident your injuries can be considerably more severe without your seat belt properly buckled Without your seat belt buckled you are much more likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be ejected from it You can be seriously injured or killed In the same crash the possibility of injury or death is lessened if you are properly wearing your seat belt Air bags can only protect as they are designed if the occupants are properly wearing their seat belts Safety and Security Occupant safety Warning A Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat backrest in an excessively reclined position as this can be dangerous You could slide under the seat belt in a collision If you slide under it the belt would apply force at the abdomen or neck That could cause serious or even fatal injuries The seat backrest and seat belt provide the best restraint when the wearer is in a nearly upright position and the belt is properly positioned on the body Warning A Never let more people ride in the vehicle than there are seat belts available Be sure everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly restrained with a separate seat belt Never use a seat belt for more than one person at a time Safety and Security Occupant safety Warning A Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly stressed in an accident must be replaced and their anchoring points must also
323. place step 4 with the following Step 4 gt Continue to press and hold the integrated signal transmitter button or while you press and re press cycle your hand held remote control transmitter 6 every two seconds until the frequency signal has been learned Upon successful training the indicator lamp Q will flash slowly and then rapidly after several seconds gt Proceed with programming step 5 and step 6 to complete Operation of integrated remote control gt Switch on ignition gt page 33 gt Select and press the appropriate integrated signal transmitter button or to activate the remote controlled device The integrated remote control trans mitter continues to send the signal as long as the button is pressed up to 20 seconds Erasing the integrated remote control memory gt gt Switch on ignition gt page 33 Simultaneously hold down the signal transmitter buttons 2 and for approximately 20 seconds until the indicator lamp Q flashes rapidly Do not hold for longer than 30 seconds The codes of all three channels are erased i If you sell your vehicle erase the codes of all three channels Controls in detail Useful features Reprogramming a single integrated signal transmitter button To program a device using a signal trans mitter button previously trained follow these steps gt Press and hold the desired signal transmitter
324. plies particularly if the tires are subjected to high loads e g high speeds heavy loads high ambient temper atures A Do not drive with a flat tire A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle You may lose control of the vehicle Continued driving with a flat tire or driving at high speed with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build up and possibly a fire Warning Hydroplaning Depending on the depth of the water layer on the road hydroplaning may occur even at low speeds and with new tires Reduce vehicle speed avoid track grooves in the road and apply brakes cautiously in the rain Tire traction The safe speed on a wet snow covered or icy road is always lower than on a dry road You should pay particular attention to the condition of the road whenever the outside temperatures are close to the freezing point A If ice has formed on the road tire traction will be substantially reduced Under such weather conditions drive steer and brake with extreme caution Warning Mercedes Benz recommends M S rated radial ply tires with a minimum tread depth of approximately A in 4 mm on all four wheels for the winter season to ensure normal balanced handling characteristics On packed snow they can reduce your stopping distance compared to summer tires Stopping distance however is still considerably greater than when the road is not covered with snow or ice Exercise appropriate
325. ply to your vehicle type also apply when driving the first 1000 miles 1500 km after the engine or the rear differential has been replaced i Always obey applicable speed limits Y Driving instructions Drive sensibly save fuel Fuel consumption to a great extent depends on driving habits and operating conditions To save fuel you should e Keep tires at the recommended tire inflation pressures e Remove unnecessary loads e Remove roof rack when not in use e Allow engine to warm up under low load use e Avoid frequent acceleration and decel eration e Have all maintenance work performed at the intervals specified in the Maintenance Booklet and as required by the maintenance service display Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Fuel consumption is also increased by driving in cold weather in stop and go traffic on short trips and in hilly area Drinking and driving A Drinking and driving and or taking drugs and driving are very dangerous combina tions Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can affect your reflexes perceptions and judgement Warning The possibility of a serious or even fatal accident are greatly increased when you drink or take drugs and drive Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow anyone to drive who has been drinking or taking drugs Operation Driving instructions Pedals A Keep driver s foot area clear at all times Objec
326. pment signaling the door to stop and reverse does not meet current U S federal safety standards 274 i Certain types of garage door openers are incompatible with the integrated opener If you should experience difficulties with programming the transmitter contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center or call Mercedes Benz Customer Assistance Center in the USA only at 1 800 FOR MERCedes or Customer Service in Canada at 1 800 387 0100 i USA only This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user s authority to operate the equipment Controls in detail Useful features Canada only This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interfer ence and 2 this device must accept any inter ference received including interfer ence that may cause undesired operation of the device Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user s authority to operate the equipment 275 Controls in detail Useful features Step 3 gt Hold the end of the hand held remote Programming or reprogramm
327. possible Replace the bulb as soon as possible Switch off the headlamps Replace the bulb as soon as possible Replace the bulb as soon as possible Practical hints What to do if Display symbol Display message Turn signal left front Turn signal right front Turn signal left mirror Turn signal right mirror Turn signal left rear Substitute bulb on Turn signal right rear Substitute bulb on Possible cause The left front turn signal lamp is malfunctioning The right front turn signal lamp is malfunctioning The left turn signal in the side mirror is malfunctioning This message will only appear if all light emitting diodes have stopped working The right turn signal in the side mirror is malfunctioning This message will only appear if all light emitting diodes have stopped working The left rear turn signal lamp is malfunctioning A substitute bulb is being used The right rear turn signal lamp is malfunctioning A substitute bulb is being used Possible solution gt gt gt Replace the bulb as soon as possible Replace the bulb as soon as possible Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Replace the bulb as soon as possible Replace the bulb as soon as possible Display symbol Display message Belt system Drive to workshop Steering oi Visit workshop Warning
328. press the bottom of cover plate The cover plate opens automatically Removing ashtray insert Warning VAN gt Remove front ashtray only with vehicle standing still Set the parking brake to secure vehicle from movement Move gear selector lever to position N With gear selec tor lever in position N turn off the engine Secure vehicle from movement by setting the parking brake Move the gear selector lever to position N Now you have more room to take out the insert Push sliding button 2 to the right The ashtray insert slides out slightly Remove the ashtray insert Controls in detail Useful features Reinstalling the ashtray insert Removing ashtray insert gt Push the ashtray insert down into gt Push button to disengage ashtray the retainer until it engages insert 2 and remove it gt Pushd lat to cl usdGw cover plate C foclose Reinstalling ashtray insert ashtray gt Push the ashtray insert 2 down into The cover plate engages p Bas the retainer until it engages Rear seat ashtray gt Push at top of cover 8 to close ashtray Button Ashtray insert Cover gt Pull at top of cover Q Controls in detail Useful features Cigarette lighter A Cover plate Cigarette lighter gt Switch on ignition gt page 33 gt Briefly press the bottom of cover plate The cover plate opens automatically gt Push in cigarette lighte
329. procedure Closing Convenience feature gt gt Press and hold button after locking the vehicle The windows and tilt sliding sunroof begin to close after approximately one second Release the button to stop procedure Make sure all side windows and the tilt sliding sunroof are properly closed before leaving the vehicle Synchronizing power windows The power windows must be resynchronized each time after the battery has been disconnected if the power windows cannot be fully opened Express open or closed Express close Switch on ignition gt page 33 Pull the power window switches until the side windows are closed Hold the switches for approximately one second The power windows are synchronized Vv Power tilt sliding sunroof Opening and closing the power tilt sliding sunroof The tilt sliding sunroof can be opened and closed electrically The switch for the tilt sliding sunroof is on the overhead control panel Sunroof switch Push up to raise sunroof at rear Pull down to lower sunroof at rear Push forward to slide sunroof closed Push back to slide sunroof open With the sunroof closed or tilted open a screen can be slid into the roof opening to guard against sun rays When sliding the sunroof open the screen will also retract Screen Controls in detail Power tilt sliding sunroof A When closing the tilt sliding sunroof make sure there
330. r The cigarette lighter will pop out automatically when hot Warning A Never touch the heating element or sides of the lighter they are extremely hot Hold the knob only When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsuper vised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and or serious personal injury e The lighter socket can be used to accommodate electrical accessories up to a maximum 85 W gt Push down cover plate Q to close ashtray The cover plate engages Electrical outlet The electrical outlet can be used to accommodate electrical consumers e g air pump auxiliary lamps up to a maximum of 180 W Electrical outlet in the rear passenger compartment Electrical outlet Cover Switch on ignition gt page 33 Pull at top of cover Flip cover to the left and insert electrical plug cigarette lighter type Electrical outlet in the cargo compartment P82 00 2195 31 gt Switch on ignition gt page 33 gt Flip up cover and insert electrical plug cigarette lighter type Telephone A Never operate radio transmitters equipped with a built in or attached antenna i e with out being connected to an external antenna from inside the vehicle while the engine is running Doing s
331. r EN repeatedly until the desired channel is found i For more information on satellite radio operation see Introduction to satellite radio USA only gt page 212 Vehicles with COMAND Refer to separate operating instructions Operate the CD player gt Turn on the radio and select the CD player gt page 217 Vehicles with COMAND Refer to separate operating instructions gt Press button or repeatedly until the settings for the CD currently being played appear in the multifunction display Controls in detail Control system co4 lt gt TRACK 5 Ss P54 32 2352 31 Current CD for CD changer Current track gt Press button R or EN repeatedly until the desired track is selected i To select a CD from the magazine press a number on the audio system or the COMAND system key pad located in the center dashboard 137 Controls in detail Control system NAV menu The NAV menu contains the functions needed to operate your navigation system gt Press button or repeatedly until the message NAV appears in the multifunction display e Ifthe navigation system is switched off the message NAV OFF appears in the multifunction display e Ifthe navigation system is on different messages depending on the current state of the navigation system appear in the multifunction display Please refer to the COMAND manual for instructions on how to activate
332. r as soon as possible The coolant temperature is above 248 F 120 C The coolant is too hot and is no longer cooling the engine gt Stop the vehicle as soon as possible and turn off the engine Allow engine and coolant to cool gt Check the coolant level and add coolant if necessary gt page 301 In case of accident If the vehicle is leaking gasoline gt Do not start the engine under any cir cumstances gt Notify local fire and or police authori ties If the extent of the damage cannot be de termined gt Notify an authorized Mercedes Benz Center If no damage can be determined on the e major assemblies e fuel system e engine mount gt Start the engine in the usual manner Getting started Parking and locking Y Parking and locking You have now completed your first drive Parking brake You have properly stopped and parked Warning A your vehicle End your drive as follows Do not park this vehicle in areas where com bustible materials such as grass hay or A leaves can come into contact with the hot exhaust system as these materials could be ignited and cause a vehicle fire Warning With the engine not running there is no power assistance for the brake and steering system In this case it is important to keep To reduce the risk of personal injury as a re in mind that a considerably higher degree of sult of vehicle movement before turning off effort is necessary
333. r glance over your shoulder before changing lanes Getting started Adjusting The buttons are located above the exterior Press button 3 for the driver s side i lamp switch exterior rear view mirror or button The memory function gt page 113 for the passenger side exterior rear lets you store the setting for the VIEW TUE OF exterior rear view mirrors together with gt Push adjustment button Q up down the settings for the steering wheel and Adjustment button left or right according to the desired setting If an exterior rear view mirror was forcibly pushed forward hit from the rear or forcibly pushed rearward hit from the front reposition it by seat position i At low ambient temperatures the exterior rear view mirrors will be heated automatically For more information see Rear view mir rors gt page 171 2 Passenger side exterior rear view mirror button Driver s side exterior rear view mirror button applying firm pressure until it snaps into place The mirror housing is now properly positioned and you can adjust the mirror normally gt Switch on ignition gt page 33 V Driving Warning VAN Do not lay any objects in the driver s foot well Be careful that floor mats or carpets in the driver s footwell have sufficient clear ance for the pedals During sudden driving or braking maneuvers the objects could get caught between the pedals You could
334. r short periods to sunroof can be immediately halted by prevent window fogging moving the tilt sliding sunroof switch in Window fogging may impair visibility and the overhead control panel in any direction endanger you and others The closing of the side windows and tilt sliding sunroof can be reversed by again pressing and holding the button i The air recirculation mode is activated automatically at high outside tempera tures The indicator lamp on the button is not lit when the air recirculation mode is automatically switched on After approx 30 minutes outside air is added to the air inside the vehicle If you have turned off the air condi tioning gt page 183 or the outside temperature is below 41 F 5 C the air recirculation mode will not switch on automatically Deactivating gt Press button RE gt page 177 The indicator lamp on the button goes out i If you keep button pressed the side windows and tilt sliding sunroof will return to their previous position The air recirculation mode is deactivated automatically e after five minutes if the outside temperature is below approximately 41 F 5 C e after five minutes if the air conditioning is turned off e after 30 minutes if the outside temperature is above approximately 41 F 5 C At outside temperatures above 79 F 26 C the system will not automatically switch back to outside air A quantity of outside air is adde
335. r the tailgate is open The fluid level has dropped to about Ta of total reservoir capacity Possible solution gt Close the tilt sliding sunroof gt page 243 gt Close the tilt sliding sunroof gt page 243 gt Have the Tele Aid system checked by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center gt Close the tailgate gt Add washer fluid gt page 303 Practical hints Where will I find Y Where will I find First aid kit Vehicle tool kit The first aid kit is located in the storage compartment behind the left trim panel The vehicle tool kit is located in the storage gt Remove first aid kit gt Press button Q gt Fold down panel 2 for completeness at least once a year Press button Q i P68 00 3100 31 Check expiration dates and contents and replace missing expired items gt Fold down panel 377 Practical hints Where will I find Vehicle jack The vehicle jack is located in the storage compartment behind the left trim panel Warning A The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up the vehicle at the jack take up brackets built into both sides of the vehicle To help avoid personal injury use the jack only to lift the vehicle during a wheel change Never get beneath the vehicle while it is supported by the jack Keep hands and feet away from Vehicle tool kit PEIEE P40 10 2773 31 The following is included the area under t
336. rdous Some are poisonous others are flammable Always follow the instructions on the partic ular container Always open your vehicle s doors or windows when cleaning the inside Warning Never use fluids or solvents that are not designed for cleaning your vehicle While in operation even while parked your vehicle is subjected to varying external influences which if gone unchecked can attack the paintwork as well as the under body and cause lasting damage Such damage is caused not only by extreme and varying climatic conditions but also by e Air pollution e Road salt e Tar e Gravel and stone chipping To avoid paint damage you should immediately remove e Grease and oil e Fuel e Coolant e Brake fluid e Bird droppings e Insects e Tree resins etc Frequent washing reduces and or elimi nates the aggressiveness and potency of the above adverse influences Operation Vehicle care More frequent washings are necessary to deal with unfavorable conditions e near the ocean e in industrial areas smoke exhaust emissions e during winter operation You should check your vehicle from time to time for stone chipping or other damage Any damage should be repaired as soon as possible to prevent corrosion In doing so do not neglect the underbody of the vehicle A prerequisite for a thor ough check is a washing of the underbody followed by a thorough inspection Dam aged areas need to be
337. re Cloth upholstery Clean with soft bristle brush or use a dry shampoo cleaner in case of excessive dirt MB Tex upholstery Pour Mercedes Benz approved Interior Care onto soft lint free cloth and apply with light pressure Plastic and rubber parts Do not use oil or wax on these parts Wood trims Dampen cloth using water and use damp cloth to clean wood trims in your vehicle Do not use solvents like tar remover or wheel cleaner nor polishes or waxes as these may be abrasive What to do if il Where will find Unlocking locking in an emergency Opening closing in an emergency Replacing SmartKey batteries Replacing bulbs Replacing wiper blades Flat tire Battery Jump starting Towing the vehicle Fuses Practical hints What to do if Lamps in instrument cluster Problem The yellow ABS malfunction indicator lamp comes on while driving General information If any of the following lamps in the instru ment cluster fails to come on during the Possible cause The ABS has detected a malfunction and has switched off The BAS and the ESP are also switched off see messages in display The brake system is still functioning normally but without the ABS available If the ABS control unit is malfunctioning other systems such as the navigation system or the automatic transmission may also be malfunctioning The charging voltage has fallen below ten volts The ABS has switched off
338. re department Warning A The engine is equipped with a transistorized ignition system Because of the high voltage it is dangerous to touch any components ignition coils spark plug sockets diagnos tic socket of the ignition system e with the engine running e while starting the engine e if ignition is on and the engine is turned manually Operation Engine compartment Closing Warning A gt Be careful that you do not close the hood on anyone Let the hood drop from a height of approximately 1 ft 30 cm The hood will lock audibly Check to make sure the hood is fully closed If you can raise the hood at a point above the headlamps then it is not properly closed Open it again and let it drop with somewhat greater force Operation Engine compartment Engine oil The amount of oil your engine needs will depend on a number of factors including driving style Higher oil consumption can occur when e the vehicle is new e the vehicle is driven frequently at higher engine speeds Engine oil consumption checks should only be made after the vehicle break in period bi Do not use any special lubricant addi tives as these may damage the drive assemblies Using special additives not approved by Mercedes Benz may cause damage not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty More information on this subject is available at any Mercedes Benz Center Checking engine oil lev
339. re wheel installed accessories passengers and cargo and if applicable trailer tongue load The GWV must never exceed the GWYVR indicated on the certification label located on the driver s door B pillar GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating This is the maximum permissible vehicle weight of the fully loaded vehicle weight of the vehicle including all options passen gers fuel and cargo and if applicable trailer tongue load It is indicated on certification label located on the driver s door B pillar Kilopascal kPa The metric unit for air pressure There are 6 9 kPa to one psi another metric unit for air pressure is bars There are 100 kilopascals kPa to one bar Maximum load rating The maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be carried by the tire Maximum loaded vehicle weight The sum of curb weight accessory weight vehicle capacity weight and production options weight Maximum tire inflation pressure This number is the greatest amount of air pressure that should ever be put in the tire under normal driving conditions Normal occupant weight The number of occupants the vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 68 kilograms 150 Ibs Occupant distribution The distribution of occupants in a vehicle at their designated seating positions Production options weight The combined weight of those installed regular production options weighing over 5 Ibs 2 3 kilograms in excess of
340. reases the risk of an accident gt Drive with added caution to the near est authorized Mercedes Benz Center which could result in serious or fatal injury or it might deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily which could also result in injury Practical hints What to do if Symbol messages Display symbol Display message Possible cause Battery Alternator The battery is no longer charging Visit workshop Possible causes e broken poly V belt e alternator malfunctioning Low voltage The battery has insufficient voltage Charge battery Low voltage The battery has insufficient voltage Switch off consumers Possible solution gt Stop immediately and check the poly V belt If it is broken gt Do not continue to drive Otherwise the engine will overheat due to an inoperative water pump which may result in damage to the engine Notify an authorized Mercedes Benz Center If it is intact gt Drive immediately to the nearest authorized Mercedes Benz Center gt Start the engine gt page 46 gt Turn off unnecessary electrical consumers Display symbol USA only Parking brake Canada only Release brake Visit workshop USA only Brake fluid Canada only Visit workshop Display message Brake wear Warning A Driving with this message displayed can result in an accident Have your brake system checked immediately Do not add brake fluid before checking the brake system
341. rect only a very weak spray towards the ventilation intake Use plenty of water and rinse the sponge and chamois frequently Rinse with clear water and thoroughly dry with a chamois Do not allow cleaning agents to dry on the finish Due to the width of the vehicle fold in exterior rear view mirrors prior to running the vehicle through an automatic car wash to prevent damage to the mirrors In the winter thoroughly remove all traces of road salt as soon as possible When washing the underbody do not forget to clean the inner sides of the wheels Operation Vehicle care Ornamental moldings For regular cleaning and care of very dirty chrome plated parts use a chrome cleaner Headlamps tail lamps side markers turn signal lenses Use a mild car wash detergent such as Mercedes Benz approved Car Shampoo with plenty of water To prevent scratches never apply strong force and only use a soft non scratchy cloth when cleaning the lenses Do not attempt to wipe dirty lenses with a dry cloth or sponge Operation Vehicle care Wiper blades gt Fold wiper arms forward A For safety reasons switch off wipers and remove SmartKey from starter switch before cleaning the wiper blades Other wise the wiper motor could suddenly turn on and cause injury Warning gt Clean the wiper blade inserts with a clean cloth and detergent solution Fold the windshield wiper arms back onto the windshield
342. regarding use of an external antenna Catalytic converter Your Mercedes Benz is equipped with monolithic type catalytic converters an important element in conjunction with the oxygen sensors to achieve substantial control of the pollutants in the exhaust emissions Keep your vehicle in proper operating condition by following our recommended maintenance instructions as outlined in your Maintenance Booklet To prevent damage to the catalytic converters only use premium unleaded gasoline in this vehicle Any noticeable irregularities in engine operation should be repaired promptly Otherwise excessive unburned fuel may reach the catalytic converter causing it to overheat and potentially start a fire Warning A As with any vehicle do not idle park or operate this vehicle in areas where combus tible materials such as grass hay or leaves can come into contact with the hot exhaust system as these materials could be ignited and cause a vehicle fire Operation Driving instructions Emission control Certain systems of the engine serve to keep the toxic components of the exhaust gases within permissible limits required by law These systems of course will function properly only when maintained strictly according to factory specifications Any adjustments on the engine should therefore be carried out only by qualified Mercedes Benz Center authorized techni cians Engine adjustments should not be altere
343. res and wheels Placard Example A ener TIRE AND LOAD NG INFORMATION WA C SEATING CAPACITY ROTAL 5 FRONT 2 REAR 3 The combined weight of occupants and carge Bhould never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ibs ORIGINAL TIRE SIZE P195 70R14 1125 7008 win P40 00 2053 31 Tire and Loading Information placard with recommended cold tire inflation pressures Placard Example A lists the recommend ed cold tire inflation pressures for maxi mum loaded vehicle weight The tire inflation pressures listed apply to the tires installed as original equipment Placard Example B VEHICLE TIRE INFORMATION Malitaeeuasen ich ES mz SEAT IG CAPACITY Vehicle Tire Information placard with recommended cold tire inflation pressures Placard Example B lists the recommend ed cold tire inflation pressures for maxi mum loaded vehicle weight The tire inflation pressures listed apply to the tires installed as original equipment Placard Example B may list recommended cold tire inflation pressures for different vehicle loads Important notes on tire inflation pressure A If the tire inflation pressure repeatedly drops Warning e Check the tires for punctures from foreign objects e Check to see whether air is leaking from the valves or from around the rim Tire temperature and tire inflation pressure are also increased while driving depending on the driving speed and the tire load If you will
344. ress MEM soft key or press button WN or BA Press RCV soft key received calls The number of received calls and then the call last received appear briefly in the display Select desired telephone number with button WN or BA The letter R and the number of the memory position appear in the upper left hand corner of the display The numbers are stored in the order of the calls received When you have selected a number press button The call will be made 227 Controls in detail Audio system Speed dial If you have stored telephone numbers as speed dial numbers in your telephone you can also enter these with buttons to E on the radio head unit gt Press desired button to Ha briefly gt Press button The call will be made Turbo dial If you have stored telephone numbers as turbo dial numbers in your telephone you can also enter these with buttons to QM on the radio head unit gt Press desired button to Hi until the call is made Redial If the number you have dialed is busy you can again place calls to the last ten telephone numbers dialed using the redial function mi If you have activated the automatic redial function on your telephone the number of the person being called is automatically redialed after a short waiting period if there is a busy signal Refer to the separate operating instructions for the mobile telephone e Manual redial Li MERCEDES GLR HUM RFCU
345. rive to workshop is displayed in the multifunction display after the system self check a mal function in the system has been detected If a malfunction is indicated as outlined above the system may not operate as expected Have the system checked at the nearest Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible 267 Controls in detail Useful features Emergency calls An emergency call is initiated automatically following an accident in which the emergency tensioning devices ETDs or air bags deploy An emergency call can also be initiated manually by opening the cover next to the interior rear view mirror labeled SOS then briefly pressing the button located under the cover See gt page 269 for instructions on initiating an emergency call manually Once the emergency call is in progress the indicator lamp in the SOS button will begin to flash The message Connecting call appears in the multifunction display and the audio system is muted When the connection is established the message Call connected appears in the multifunc tion display All information relevant to the emergency such as the location of the vehicle determined by the GPS satellite location system vehicle model identifica tion number and color are generated A voice connection between the Response Center and the occupants of the vehicle will be established automatically soon af ter the emergency call has been initiated The Response Center wi
346. rked on an incline turn the front wheels towards the road curb Do not park this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as grass hay or leaves can come into contact with the hot exhaust system as these materials could be ignited and cause a vehicle fire Controls in detail Automatic transmission Warning VAN When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Children could move the gear selector lever from position P which could result in an accident and or serious personal injury 167 Controls in detail Automatic transmission Automatic shift program Hi Never change the program mode when the gear selector lever is out of position P This could result in a change of driving characteristics for which you may not be prepared i The last selected program mode C or S is switched on when the engine is restarted The program mode selector switch is located on the lower part of the center console C Program mode selector switch C Comfort For comfort driving S Sport For standard driving The current gear selector lever position and the selected program mode C S are indicated in the multifunction display gt page 163 Press program mode selector switch Q repeatedly until the letter of the desired program mode appears in
347. roperly For expert advice and quality service see an authorized Mercedes Benz Center If you are interested in obtaining service literature for your vehicle please contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center We consider this the best way for you to obtain accurate information for your vehicle For further information you can find us on the Mercedes Benz web site www mbusa com or www mercedes benz ca Warning A To help avoid personal injury be extremely careful when performing any service work or repairs Improper or incomplete service or the use of incorrect or inappropriate parts or materials may damage the vehicle or its equipment which may in turn result in personal injury If you have questions about carrying out any type of service turn to the advice of an authorized Mercedes Benz Center We reserve the right to modify the technical details of the vehicle as given in the data and illustrations of this Operator s Manual Reprinting translation and copying even of excerpts is not permitted without our prior authorization in writing Title illustration no P00 0 1 29 14 31 Press time May 18 2004 GSP TIP Printed in Germany
348. roximately 4 psi 0 3 bar higher than the cold reading This is normal Do not let air out to match the specified cold tire inflation pressure Otherwise the tire will be underinflated Operation Tires and wheels Follow the steps below to achieve correct tire inflation pressure gt gt Remove the cap from the valve on one tire Firmly press a tire gauge onto the valve Read tire inflation pressure on tire gauge and check against the recom mended tire inflation pressure on the placard on the driver s door B pillar gt page 314 If necessary add air to achieve the recommended tire inflation pressure bb gt D Operation Tires and wheels i If you have overfilled the tire release tire inflation pressure by pushing the metal stem of the valve with e g a tip of a pen Then recheck the tire inflation pressure with the tire gauge Install the valve cap Repeat this procedure for each tire i The recommended tire inflation pressures for your vehicle can be found on the tire placard located on the driver s door B pillar The tire inflation pressures are not listed in the owner s manual Warning VAN Follow recommended tire inflation pres sures Do not overinflate tires Overinflating tires can result in sudden deflation blowout be cause they are more likely to become punc tured or damaged by road debris potholes etc Do not underinflate tires Underinflated tir
349. rtKey in the starter switch Front doors gt Pull on door handle on the respective front door to open door If door was locked locking knob Q will move up Rear doors gt Pull up locking knob Q on the respective rear door to unlock door gt Pull on door handle on the respective rear door to open door Opening the tailgate A minimum height clearance of 6 40 ft 1 95 m is required to open the tailgate The handle is located above the rear license plate recess P80 20 2617 31 Handle The vehicle must be unlocked gt Pull on handle Q gt Lift the tailgate Always make sure there is sufficient overhead clearance Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Closing the tailgate A Handle gt Lower tailgate by pulling firmly on handle Q gt Close tailgate with hands placed flat on the tailgate Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Warning A To prevent possible personal injury always keep hands and fingers away from the tail gate opening when closing the tailgate Be especially careful when small children are around When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsuper vised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and or serious personal injury Warning A Only drive wit
350. s Operation Driving instructions Driving abroad Abroad there is an extensive Mercedes Benz service network at your disposal If you plan to drive into areas which are not listed in the index of your Mercedes Benz Center directory you should request pertinent information from an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Control and operation of radio transmitter COMAND radio and telephone Warning A Please do not forget that your primary responsibility is to drive the vehicle safely Only operate the COMAND Cockpit Management and Data System radio or telephone if road weather and traffic conditions permit Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph approximately 50 km h your vehicle is covering a distance of 44 feet approximately 14 m every second Observe all legal requirements Telephones and two way radios Warning A Never operate radio transmitters equipped with a built in or attached antenna i e with out being connected to an external antenna from inside the vehicle while the engine is running Doing so could lead to a malfunc tion of the vehicle s electronic system possibly resulting in an accident and or personal injury Radio transmitters such as a portable telephone or a citizens band unit should only be used inside the vehicle if they are connected to an antenna that is installed on the outside of the vehicle Refer to the radio transmitter operation instructions
351. s Benz Center check the transmission Coolant level The engine coolant is a mixture of water and anticorrosion antifreeze To check the coolant level the vehicle must be parked on level ground and the engine must be cool The coolant expansion tank is located on the passenger side of the engine compart ment Warning A In order to avoid any possibly serious burns e Use extreme caution when opening the hood if there are any signs of steam or coolant leaking from the cooling system or if the coolant temperature gauge indi cates that the coolant is overheated e Do not remove pressure cap on coolant reservoir if coolant temperature is above 158 F 70 C Allow engine to cool down before removing cap The coolant reservoir contains hot fluid and is under pressure Using a rag slowly open the cap approximately Ve turn to relieve ex cess pressure If opened immediately scalding hot fluid and steam will be blown out under pressure Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which may burn if it comes into contact with hot engine parts Coolant expansion tank Cap Operation Engine compartment gt Using a rag turn cap 2 slowly approx imately one half turn to the left to release any excess pressure gt Continue turning the cap to the left and remove it The coolant level is correct if the level e for cold coolant reaches the black top part of t
352. s an extended oper ating range To prevent theft however it is advisable to only unlock the vehicle when you are in close proximity to it The SmartKey centrally locks and unlocks e the doors e the tailgate e the fuel filler flap P80 35 2109 31 SmartKey with remote control Lock button Mechanical key locking tab Unlock button Battery check lamp Panic button gt page 83 i Canada only Only vehicles equipped with an anti theft alarm system have SmartKeys with integrated panic button Warning A When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle It is possible for children to open a locked door from the inside which could result in an accident and or serious injury To prevent possible malfunction avoid exposing the SmartKey to high levels of electromagnetic radiation i USA only This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any inter ference received including interfer ence that may cause undesired operation Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user s authority to operate the equipment Controls in detail Locking and unlocking i
353. s of operation depending on H the outside temperature Deactivating If the rear window defroster switches gt Press button Egy or again off too soon and the indicator lamp starts flashing this means that too many electrical consumers are operating simultaneously and there is insufficient voltage in the battery The system responds automatically by deactivating the rear window defroster The indicator lamp on the button goes out As soon as the battery has sufficient voltage the rear window defroster automatically turns itself back on 175 detail E Ei e be 4 e S Climate control Item Left side defroster vent fixed Left side air vent adjustable Thumbwheel for air volume control for left side air vent Thumbwheel for air volume control for left center air vent Left center air vent adjustable Right center air vent adjustable Thumbwheel for air volume control for right center air vent CC Sele elere Thumbwheel for air volume control for right side air vent Right side air vent adjustable Right side defroster vent fixed 00 Climate control panel id For draft free ventilation move the sliders for the air vents and 9 to the middle position Depending on production date your vehicle is equipped with either climate control panel design A or B Climate control panel design B OO ODOLIO Controls in detail Climate control Item A
354. s running This facilitates early detection of malfunctions The EY indicator lamp in the instrument cluster comes on when the ignition is switched on and goes out no later than a few seconds after the engine has been started The SRS components are in operational readiness if the EY indicator lamp is not lit when the engine is running A malfunction in the system has been detected if the E9 indicator lamp e fails to go out after approximately four seconds after the engine was started e does not come on at all e comes on after the engine was started or while driving Warning VAN In the event that the EY indicator lamp comes on during driving or does not come on at all the SRS self check has detected a malfunction For your safety we strongly recommend that you visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center immediately to have the system checked otherwise the SRS may not deploy when needed in an accident which could result in serious or fatal injury or it might deploy unexpectedly and unnec essarily which could also result in injury In addition improper work on the SRS creates a risk of rendering the SRS inopera tive or causing unintended air bag deploy ment Work on the SRS must therefore only be performed by qualified technicians Con tact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center If it is necessary to modify an air bag system to accommodate a person with disabilities contact your local authorized Mercedes Benz Center
355. s the information and share it with others for safety research or vehicle diagnosis purposes with the consent of the vehicle owner or lessee in response to an official request by law enforcement or other government agency for use in dispute resolution involving DaimlerChrysler its affiliates or sales service organization and or as otherwise required or permitted by law Please check the Tele Aid subscription service agreement for details regarding the information that may be recorded or transmitted via that system At a glance At a glance Cockpit oL OR Item Cruise control lever Multifunction steering wheel Horn Instrument cluster Overhead control panel Glove box lid release Glove box lock Center console Page 247 26 130 24 125 29 258 258 27 000 OOO Item Page Starter switch 33 Hood lock release 296 Steering wheel adjustment 40 handle manual Steering wheel adjustment 40 stalk electrical Parking brake pedal 47 55 Door control panel 30 Parking brake release 47 At a glance Item Combination switch e Turn signals e Windshield wipers e Rear window wiper e High beam Exterior lamp switch Exterior rear view mirror adjustment Headlamp washer switch Cockpit Page 50 50 53 49 49 116 41 115 171 At a glance Instrument cluster 50 gt 010 10 30 PM 70 T PRI L w 6 P54 32 2500 31 Item Speedometer with
356. s while being towed with the hazard warning flasher in use switch on ignition and activate the combination switch for the left or right turn signal in the usual manner only the selected turn signal will operate Upon canceling the turn signal the hazard warning flasher will operate again Practical hints Towing the vehicle Warning A With the engine not running there is no power assistance for the brake and steering systems In this case it is important to keep in mind that a considerably higher degree of effort is necessary to brake and steer the ve hicle Adapt your driving accordingly When towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground please note the following With the automatic central locking activated and the SmartKey in starter switch position 2 the vehicle doors lock if the left front wheel as well as the right rear wheel are turning at vehicle speeds of approx 9 mph 15 km h or more Switch off the tow away alarm gt page 93 To prevent the vehicle doors from locking deactivate the automatic central locking gt page 153 Towing of the vehicle should only be done using the properly installed towing eye bolt Never attach tow cable tow rope or tow rod to vehicle chassis frame or suspension parts i If the battery is disconnected or discharged e the SmartKey will not turn in the starter switch For more informa tion see Battery gt page 403 and Jump startin
357. seeeeee Gear selector lever position Automatic shift program Driving tIPS c3 c csectsseassiesten rsss Emergency operation Limp Home Mode cc00 Good visibility 0 0 eeesteeeeeeesteeees Headlamp cleaning system Rear view MirTOrS sssesessssssseessee SUN VISOIS errienta Rear window defroster 4 Climate control ccccssseceeeesseeeeees Deactivating the climate control SYSTEM ceeeeeceeeesreeeeees Setting the temperature Adjusting air distribution and De fFOSTING cerceii Air recirculation mode 006 Air conditioning eee Rear passenger compartment adjustable air vents cceeee 162 Automatic climate control 00 00 186 164 Deactivating the automatic 165 climate control system 6 189 166 Setting the temperature 0 189 168 Adjusting air distribution 190 169 Adjusting air volume eee 191 DefrOStING kesseorsresiiiiirrss siss 192 170 Maximum cooling MAXCOOL 192 171 Air recirculation mode 006 193 171 Charcoal filter eee eeeeeeeeeeeee 194 171 Air conditioning 196 174 Residual heat and ventilation 175 available on automatic climate 176 control panel design A onlly 197 Rear passenger compartment 179 adjustable air vents cccesee 198 179 180 181 182 183 185 Audio SYSTOM ce eessrece
358. set approximately four hours after the SmartKey in the starter switch is turned to position O or removed from the starter switch Resetting will not occur if you turn the SmartKey back to position 1 or 2 within this time period Controls in detail Control system Fuel consumption since last reset gt Press button or repeatedly until the first function of the Trip computer menu appears in the multifunction display gt Press button EAN or eg repeatedly until the message After reset appears in the multifunction display After reset 790 mi 15 00 h 2 50 Mph 21 4 mpg 4 P54 32 2390 31 Distance driven since last reset Time elapsed since last reset Average speed since last reset Average fuel consumption since last reset 157 Controls in detail Control system Resetting fuel consumption statistics gt Press button or repeatedly until the first function of the Trip computer menu appears in the multifunction display gt Press button EAN or eg repeatedly until the reading that you want to reset appears in the multifunction display gt Press and hold the reset button in the instrument cluster gt page 125 until the value is reset to 0 Call up range distance to empty gt Press button or repeatedly until the first function of the Trip computer menu appears in the multifunction display gt Press button J or Beg repeatedly until the messag
359. signals The combination switch is located on the left of the steering column Combination switch Turn signals right Turn signals left gt Press combination switch in direction of arrow or The corresponding turn signal indicator lamp Keli or EM in the instrument cluster flashes gt page 24 The combination switch resets automati cally after major steering wheel move ments To signal minor directional changes such as changing lanes press combi nation switch only to point of resis tance and release The corresponding turn signals will flash three times Windshield wipers The combination switch is located on the left of the steering column Combination switch Single wipe Switching on windshield wipers gt Switch on ignition gt page 33 Switching on windshield wipers gt Turn the combination switch to the desired position depending on the intensity of the rain O Windshield wipers off Intermittent wiping Il Normal wiper speed Ill Fast wiper speed i Vehicles without rain sensor When the vehicle is standing still the wiper speed returns to next lower setting Vehicles with rain sensor Intermittent wiping interval is dependent on wetness of windshield After the initial wipe pauses between wipes are automatically controlled by the rain sensor Getting started Vehicles with rain sensor Do not leave windshield wipers in intermit
360. size designation for exam for the tire 2 R up to 106 mph 170 km h ple 245 40 ZR18 To determine the maximum speed capability of the tire Warning A S upto 112 mpn 180 m i the service description for the tire must T up to 118 mph 190 km h be referred to The service description Even waen permitted by law never operate H up to 130 mph 210 km h is comprised of the tire load rating a vehicle at speeds greater than the gt page 318 and the tire speed maximum speed rating of the tires V up to 149 mph 240 km h rating gt page 318 Exceeding the maximum speed for which Ww up to 168 mph 270 km h If your tire includes ZR in the size tires are rated can lead to sudden tire Y up to 186 mph 300 km h designation and no service failure causing loss of vehicle control and Y above 186 mph 300 km h description and gt page 318 is possibly resulting in an accident and or personal injury and possible death for you ZR above 149 mph 240 km h and for others given the tire manufacturer must be consulted for the maximum speed capability i Tire load rating gt page 318 and Tire speed rating gt page 318 are also referred to as service descrip tion If a service description and gt page 318 is given the speed capa bility is limited by the speed symbol in the service description Example 245 40 ZR18 97Y In this example 97Y is the service description The le
361. sly for about five seconds until battery check lamp 4 flashes twice The SmartKey will then function as follows Unlocking driver s door and fuel filler flap gt Press button once All turn signal lamps flash once The locking knob in the driver s door moves up The anti theft alarm system is disarmed Global unlocking gt Press button twice All turn signal lamps flash once The locking knobs in the doors move up The anti theft alarm system is disarmed Global locking gt Press button EEN All turn signal lamps flash three times The locking knobs in the doors move down The anti theft alarm system is armed Restoring to factory setting gt Press and hold buttons and simultaneously for about six seconds until battery check lamp flashes twice If you can no longer lock or unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey then either the batteries in the SmartKey are dis charged the SmartKey is malfunction ing or the vehicle battery is drained e Check the batteries in the SmartKey gt page 99 and replace them if necessary gt page 387 e Use the mechanical key to unlock the driver s door gt page 382 e Use the mechanical key to lock the driver s door gt page 383 e Have the vehicle battery and the battery connections checked gt page 403 If the SmartKey is malfunctioning contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Controls in detail Locking and unlock
362. sound during a telephone call Sound adjustment gt page 203 Placing a call Entering a telephone number and starting the dialing process P82 60 4558 31 gt Enter desired telephone number using buttons to Gal The number can have up to 32 digits but only twelve of these are visible in the display gt D Controls in detail Audio system gt gt gt If necessary correct number entered with the CLR soft key Press soft key briefly to delete the last digit entered press soft key and hold to delete the complete number gt After correct telephone number has been entered press button 5 0 If the telephone number has been saved together with a name in the phone book the name will appear in the display Phone book The numbers stored in the phone book of the mobile telephone can be called up either by name or number In addition incoming calls are stored in the phone book 5 9 This is only possible however when the call information transmitted includes the number of the person calling If the telephone number is not transmitted NO NUMBER will be stored in the phone book e Searching and calling up phone book entries by name You can access your mobile telephone s phone book with the audio system You can access both the main entries and the sub entries of your phone book CLR HUM RCW P82 60 4559 31 or or gt Press MEM soft key or press button WN or BA Press des
363. speeds and the The maintenance service indicator will avoidance of short distance trips will Service notify you when your next maintenance A lengthen the interval between services service is due in 300 Miles P54 32 2399 31 Clearing the maintenance service indicator T The maintenance service indicator is automatically cleared e after ten seconds when you switch on the ignition or when reaching the main tenance service threshold while driving e after 30 seconds once the suggested maintenance service term has passed You can also clear it yourself C Reset button gt Press reset button Q on the instrument cluster Maintenance service term exceeded If you have exceeded the suggested maintenance service term you will see the following message in the multifunction display Service A exceeded by XX Days Service A exceeded by XX Miles Km In addition a signal sounds when the message appears Any authorized Mercedes Benz Center will reset the maintenance service indicator following a completed maintenance service Operation Maintenance Calling up the maintenance service indicator gt Switch on ignition gt page 33 The standard display of the control system appears gt page 129 gt Press button R or EN on the multifunction steering wheel until the maintenance service indicator with the service symbol or and the service deadline appears in the multifunction
364. starter switch e Take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle when leaving Operation Driving instructions Tires A If you feel a sudden significant vibration or ride disturbance or you suspect that possi ble damage to your vehicle has occurred you should turn on the hazard warning flash ers carefully slow down and drive with cau tion to an area which is a safe distance from the road Warning Inspect the tires and the vehicle underbody for possible damage If the vehicle or tires appear unsafe have it towed to the nearest Mercedes Benz Center or tire dealer for repairs Treadwear indicators TWI are required by law These indicators are located in six places on the tread circumference and become visible at a tread depth of approximately T in 1 6 mm at which point the tire is considered worn and should be replaced The treadwear indicator appears as a solid band across the tread A Warning Although the applicable federal motor vehicle safety laws consider a tire to be worn when the treadwear indicators TWI become visible at approximately ig in 1 6 mm we recommend that you do not allow your tires to wear down to that level As tread depth approaches Wis in 3 mm the adhesion properties on a wet road are sharply reduced Depending upon the weather and or road surface conditions the tire traction varies widely Specified tire inflation pressures must be maintained This ap
365. stem have SmartKeys with integrated panic button Q Safety and Security Panic alarm i Canada only This device complies with RSS 2 10 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interfer ence and 2 this device must accept any inter ference received including interfer ence that may cause undesired operation of the device Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user s authority to operate the equipment V Driving safety systems In this section you will find information on the following driving safety systems e ABS Antilock Brake System e BAS Brake Assist System e ESP Electronic Stability Program e AMATIC Four Wheel Electronic Traction System O In winter operation the maximum effectiveness of the ABS ESP and 4MATIC if so equipped is only achieved with winter tires M S tires or snow chains as required Warning A The following factors increase the risk of accidents e Excessive speed especially in turns e Wet and slippery road surfaces e Following another vehicle too closely The ABS BAS ESP and 4MATIC if so equipped cannot reduce this risk Always adjust your driving style to the prevailing road and weather conditions Safety and Security Driving safety systems ABS Warning A Do not pump the brake pedal Use firm steady brake pedal pressure instead Pump ing the
366. stem 202 Automatic central locking control system 153 Cornering fog lamps 121 122 ESP 89 Front fog lamps 119 Hazard warning flasher 122 Headlamps 49 High beam headlamps 49 High beams 120 Vehicle 153 Low beam headlamps 49 Substitute lamps Rear foglamp 120 Bulbs 388 Seat heating 112 Sun visors 174 Windshield wipers 51 Supplemental Restraint System see SRS Symbol 362 Switching Symbols 15 Fuel Flexible fuel vehicle 434 Synchronizing Power windows 242 Tilt sliding sunroof 246 T Tachometer 25 127 Overspeed range 127 Tail lamps Cleaning 339 Messages in display 373 Replacing bulbs 389 395 Tailgate Closing 101 Message in display 376 Opening 101 Tar stains 338 Technical data Air conditioning refrigerant 431 Brake fluid 431 Coolant 429 Coolants 435 Electrical system 426 Engine 422 Engine oil additives 431 Engine oils 431 Flexible fuel vehicles 433 Fuel requirements 432 Fuels 429 430 Gasoline additives 433 Lubricants 429 Main dimensions 427 Premium unleaded gasoline 432 Rims and tires 423 Weights 428 Windshield washer 430 Windshield washer and headlamp cleaning system 430 437 Tele Aid 266 Emergency calls 268 Hands free microphone 29 Information 270 Initiating an emergency call manually 269 Message in display 376 Remote door unlock 273 Roadside Assistance 269 SOS button 269 Stolen Vehicle Recovery services 273 System self check 267 Tele Aid System 266 443 Upgrade scenario 272 Telematics
367. stem are controlled by the buttons on the multifunc tion steering wheel Multifunction display Operating the control system Selecting the submenu or setting the volume Press button up to increase E down to decrease Telephone Press button to take a call to end a call Menu systems Press button for next menu for previous menu Moving within a menu Press button E for next display for previous display Pressing any of the buttons on the multi function steering wheel will alter what is shown in the multifunction display The information available in the multifunc tion display is arranged in menus each containing a number of functions or sub menus The individual functions are then found within the relevant menu radio or CD op erations under AUDIO for example These functions serve to call up relevant informa tion or to customize the settings for your vehicle It is helpful to think of the menus and the functions within each menu as being arranged in a circular pattern e If you press button or repeatedly you will pass through each menu one after the other e Ifyou press button or repeatedly you will pass through each function display one after the other in the current menu Inthe Settings menu instead of functions you will find a number of submenus for calling up and changing settings For instructions on using these submenus see Submenus in the Settings menu gt
368. str C1 via the function Status line display gt page 144 Controls in detail Control system AUDIO menu The functions in the AUDIO menu operate the audio equipment which you currently have turned on If no audio equipment is currently turned on the message AUDIO OFF appears in the multifunction display The following functions are available Function Page Select radio station 136 Select satellite radio station 136 USA only Operate CD player 137 Controls in detail Control system Select radio station gt Turn on the radio gt page 202 Vehicles with COMAND Refer to separate operating instructions gt Press button or repeatedly until the currently tuned station appears in the multifunction display Fri C 101 1 FM SA Waveband setting Station frequency P54 32 2351 31 Press button R or repeatedly until the desired station is found i You can only store new stations using the corresponding feature on the radio gt page 210 Vehicles with COMAND Refer to separate operating instructions You can also operate the radio in the usual manner Select satellite radio station The Sirius Satellite Radio is treated as a radio application gt Select satellite radio with the corresponding soft key SAT in the radio menu SATI gt CHS5 v P54 32 2505 31 C SAT mode and preset number Channel name or number gt Press button R o
369. submenus 131 Resetting all control system 140 Resetting inthe submenu 141 Selective SmartKey 98 Settings menu Functions in 140 Individual vehicle settings 140 Submenus 141 Shift lock 443 Shift program mode 129 Shifting Gear selector lever 46 162 Gear selector lever positions 166 Into optimal gear range automatic transmission 164 Side impact airbags 66 Side marker lamps front Messages in display 371 Replacing bulbs 389 Side marker lamps rear Replacing bulbs 389 Side markers Cleaning 339 Side windows Automatic opening 240 Cleaning 340 Closing 239 240 241 Closing fully 240 Closing with SmartKey 241 Opening 239 240 241 Opening fully 240 Opening with SmartKey 241 Stopping 241 Synchronizing power windows 242 Sidewall 329 Simultaneous wiping and washing Rear window wiper 53 Windshield wipers 52 Single CD mode selector 201 Single wipe 52 Sliding in Swiveling cup holder in front of seat armrest 261 Sliding out Swiveling cup holder in front of seat armrest 260 SmartKey 96 Changing batteries 387 Locking and unlocking 96 Opening and closing the tilt sliding sunroof with 245 Opening and closing windows with 241 Unlocking with 32 Snow chains 333 Soft keys Audio system 202 Sound system 204 Spare fuses 413 Spare wheel 425 Spare wheel bolts For Minispare wheel 381 Speed Setting current 248 Speed settings Cruise control 249 Speedometer 25 Settings units 143 Speedometer display mode Selecting 143 Sp
370. sure the system is switched on gt Press EJECT button The system ejects the CD NO CD will appear in the display Remove CD from slot iJ If you do not take the CD out of the CD slot within approx 15 seconds the system automatically pulls the CD back in and plays it If a CD is pulled back in press EJECT button for five seconds the CD will then be ejected Controls in detail Audio system Operational readiness of CD changer If a CD changer has been installed in the vehicle it can be operated from the front control panel of the audio system A loaded magazine must be installed to play CDs The CD changer is located in the glove box Loading unloading the CD magazine i The CD changer may not be able to play audio CDs with copy protection gt Slide changer door to the right and press EW button gt Magazine will be ejected Controls in detail Audio system CD CD changer CD tray CD magazine gt Remove magazine 4 and pull CD tray fully out gt Place CD inrecess of tray label side up gt Push tray into magazine in direction of arrow i CDs which have been inserted improperly or are unreadable will not be played Push magazine into CD changer in direction of arrow and close sliding door Playing CDs Single CD player in the audio unit gt Press button CD 0 will appear in the upper left hand corner of the display The C
371. switches for all the side windows are on the driver s door The switches for the respective windows are on the front passenger door and the rear doors C Left front window Right front window Right rear window Left rear window Rear window override switch gt page 82 Warning A When closing the windows make sure there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the closing procedure The closing of the door windows can be im mediately halted by releasing the switch or if switch was pulled past the resistance point and released by either pressing or pulling the respective switch If the window encounters an obstruction that blocks its path in a circumstance where you pulled the switch past the resistance point and released it to close the window the automatic reversal function will stop the window and open it slightly Controls in detail Power windows If the window encounters an obstruction that blocks its path in a circumstance where you are closing the window by pulling and holding the switch or by pressing and hold ing button on the SmartKey the auto matic reversal function will not operate When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsuper vised use of vehicle equipment can cause an accident and or serious personal injury
372. t for other products and therefore cannot be held responsible for them even if in indi vidual cases an official approval or authori zation by governmental or other agencies should exist Use of such parts and acces sories could adversely affect the safety performance or reliability of your vehicle Please do not use them Introduction Product information Genuine Mercedes Benz parts as well as conversion parts and accessories approved by us are available at your authorized Mercedes Benz Center where you will receive comprehensive informa tion also on permissible technical modifi cations and where proper installation will be performed Introduction Operator s Manual This Operator s Manual contains a great deal of useful information We urge you to read it carefully and familiarize yourself with the vehicle before driving For your own safety and longer service life of the vehicle we urge you to follow the in structions and warnings contained in this manual Ignoring them could result in dam age to the vehicle or personal injury to you or others Vehicle damage caused by fail ure to follow instructions is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Your vehicle may have some or all of the equipment described in this manual Therefore you may find explanations for optional equipment not installed in your vehicle If you have any questions about the operation of any equipment your authorized Mer
373. t from the vehicle or secure it with the seat belt to prevent the child restraint from becoming a projectile in the event of an accident Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle even if the children are secured ina child restraint system Unsupervised children in a child restraint system may use vehicle equipment and may cause an accident and or serious personal injury Safety and Security Occupant safety Occupant Classification System The Occupant Classification System OCS automatically turns the front passenger front air bag on or off based on the classi fied occupant weight category determined by weight sensor readings from the front passenger seat a The system does not deactivate the front passenger side impact air bag the window curtain air bag and the emergency tensioning device Occupants must sit properly belted in a nearly upright position with their back against the seat backrest and feet on the floor to be correctly classified If the occupant s weight is transferred to another object in the vehicle e g by leaning on armrests the OCS may not be able to properly approximate the occupant s weight category Safety and Security Occupant safety i If your seat including your trim cover and cushion needs to be serviced in any way take the vehicle to your authorized Mercedes Benz Center Only seat accessories approved by Mercedes Benz may be used Both driver and the front
374. t ignore the low engine coolant level warning Extended driving with the message and symbol displayed may cause serious engine damage not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Do not drive without sufficient amount of coolant in the cooling system The engine will overheat causing major engine damage Display symbol Display message zE Coolant Stop engine off A Driving when your engine is badly over heated can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire You could be seriously burned Warning Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns and can occur just by opening the hood Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it Turn off the engine get out of the vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until the engine has cooled down Possible cause The coolant is too hot During severe operating conditions and stop and go city traffic the coolant tem perature may rise close to 248 F 120 C Practical hints What to do if Possible solution gt Stop the vehicle and turn off the engine Only start the engine again after the message disappears You could otherwise damage the engine The engine should not be operated with the coolant temperature above 248 F 120 C Doing so may cause serious engine damage which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Practical hints What to do if
375. tandards Letter P preceding the size designation Passenger car tire based on U S design standards Letter LT preceding the size designation Light Truck tire based on U S design standards Letter T preceding the size designation Temporary spare tires which are high pressure compact spares designed for temporary emergency use only Tire width The tire width Q gt page 318 indicates the nominal tire width in mm Aspect ratio The aspect ratio gt page 318 is the dimensional relationship between tire section height and section width and is expressed in percentage The aspect ratio is arrived at by dividing section height by section width Tire code The tire code 8 gt page 318 indicates the tire construction type The R stands for radial tire type Letter D means diag onal or bias ply construction letter B means belted bias ply construction At the tire manufacturer s option any tire with a speed capability above 149 mph 240 km h can include a ZR in the size designation for example 245 40 ZR 18 For additional information see Tire speed rating gt page 320 Rim diameter The rim diameter gt page 318 is the diameter of the bead seat not the diameter of the rim edge Rim diameter is indicated in inches in Tire load rating The tire load rating gt page 318 is a numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire ca
376. tch off with a three minute delay When the engine is running and you e turn the exterior lamp switch to position xg the parking lamps switch on additionally e turn the exterior lamp switch to position E the manual headlamp mode has priority over the daytime running lamp mode The corresponding exterior lamps switch on gt page 116 USA only By default the daytime running lamp mode is deactivated Activate the daytime running lamp mode using the control system see Setting daytime running lamp mode USA only gt page 150 When the engine is running and you turn the exterior lamp switch to position or Jy the manual headlamp mode has priority over the daytime running lamp mode The corresponding exterior lamps switch on gt page 116 Locator lighting and night security illumination The locator lighting and the night security illumination are described in the Control system section see Setting locator light ing gt page 151 and Setting night secu rity illumination gt page 151 Fog lamps Warning VAN In low ambient lighting or foggy conditions only switch from position N to with the vehicle at a standstill Switching from WA to will briefly switch off the headlamps Doing so while driving in low ambient lighting conditions may result in an accident i Fog lamps will operate with the parking lamps and or the low beam headlamps on Fog lamps should only b
377. tch to position 0 and switch off the exterior headlamps the door entry lamps will remain lit for approximately five minutes VY Instrument cluster For a full view illustration of the instrument Instrument cluster illumination cluster see At a glance gt page 24 Use reset button to adjust the illumination brightness for the instrument cluster i The instrument cluster illumination is dimmed or brightened automatically to suit ambient light conditions The instrument cluster illumination will also be adjusted automatically when Reset button you switch on the vehicle s exterior lamps The instrument cluster is activated when you e open a door e switch on ignition e press reset button Q e switch on the exterior lamps You can change the instrument cluster settings in the Instrument cluster submenu of the control system gt page 143 Controls in detail Instrument cluster To brighten illumination gt Turn reset button Q clockwise The instrument cluster illumination will brighten To dim illumination gt Turn reset button Q counterclock wise The instrument cluster illumination will dim Controls in detail Instrument cluster Coolant temperature gauge The coolant temperature gauge is on the left side in the instrument cluster gt page 24 Warning A e Driving when your engine is badly overheated can cause some fluids which may have leaked into th
378. ted snugly Take special care of this when wearing loose clothing A Do not pass belts over sharp edges They could tear Warning Do not allow the belt to get caught in the door or in the seat adjustment mechanism This could damage the belt Never attempt to make modifications to seat belts This could impair the effective ness of the belts Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may severely weaken them In a crash they may not be able to provide adequate protection Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly stressed in an accident must be replaced Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Starting the engine A Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to your health All exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide and inhaling it can cause uncon sciousness and lead to death Warning Do not run the engine in confined areas such as garage which are not properly ven tilated If you think that exhaust gas fumes are entering the vehicle while driving have the cause determined and corrected imme diately If you must drive under these condi tions drive only with at least one window fully open Automatic transmission E e Gearshift pattern for automatic transmission P Park position with gear selector lever lock R Reverse gear N Neutral D Drive position For more information see Automatic transmission gt page 162 Starting gt Make sure the gear selector lever is
379. tem and telephone Page 124 243 124 123 158 224 266 O00 At a glance Overhead control panel Item Interior rear view mirror Garage door opener Left reading lamp on off Tele Aid emergency call system button Page 41 171 274 124 266 At a glance Door control panel Item Door handle Memory function for storing seat exterior mirror and steering wheel settings Switches for seat adjustment Switches for opening closing front door windows Switch for rear door window override Switches for opening closing rear door windows Getting started Getting started Unlocking The Getting started section provides an Unlocking with the SmartKey overview of the vehicle s most basic func Warning A tions First time Mercedes Benz owners should pay special attention to the infor mation given here When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsuper vised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and or serious personal injury If you are already familiar with the basic functions described here the Controls in detail section will provide you with further information The corresponding page references are located at the end of each segment P80 35 2108 31 7 SmartKe
380. tem only if permitted by road weather and traffic conditions Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph approximately 50 km h your car covers a distance of 44 feet approximately 14 m every second General notes The system may not be able to play audio CDs with copy protection Playing copied CDs may cause malfunctions during playback 217 Controls in detail Audio system If you affix stickers to the CDs they can become warped due to the heat that develops in the CD drive or CD changer In certain situations the CDs can then no longer be ejected and cause damage to the drive Such damage is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Your CD drive or CD changer has been designed to play CDs which correspond to the EN 60908 standard You can therefore only use CDs with a maximum thickness of 1 3 mm If you insert thicker data carriers e g ones that have data on both sides one side with DVD data the other side with audio data they cannot be ejected and will damage the drive Do not use CDs with an eight cm diameter not even with a CD adapter Attempting to play CDs with an eight cm diameter or playing such CDs with an adapter may cause damage to the CD drive Such damage is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Should excessively high or low tempera tures occur while in CD changer mode CD TEMP will appear in the display and the CD will be muted until the temperature has
381. tent setting when the vehicle is taken to an automatic car wash or during windshield cleaning Wipers will operate in the presence of water sprayed on the windshield and wipers may be damaged as a result The switch should not be left in intermittent setting as the wipers will wipe the windshield once every time the engine is started Dust that accumulates on the windshield might scratch the glass and or damage the wiper blades when wiping occurs on a dry windshield Getting started Driving Intermittent wiping Wiping with windshield washer fluid Hi gt Set the wiper switch to position I gt Push combination switch in direction of If anything blocks the windshield arrow A past the resistance point wipers leaves snow etc switch iJ them off immediately The windshield wipers operate with washer fluid e For safety reasons withdraw SmartKey from starter switch before attempting to remove any blockage Intermittent wiping is interrupted when the vehicle is at a standstill and a front door is opened For information on filling up the washer reservoir see Windshield washer system Single wipe and headlamp cleaning system gt page 303 e Remove blockage gt Press combination switch briefly in direction of arrow e Turn the windshield wipers on again The windshield wipers wipe one time without washer fluid If windshield wipers fail to function at all in switch position l e set the combinatio
382. th the vehicle paint finish can be completely removed only while in the liquid state and by applying plenty of water Warning A Exercise care when using the passen ger side exterior rear view mirror The mirror surface is convex outwardly curved surface for a wider field of view Objects in mirror are closer than they appear Check your interior rear view mirror or glance over your shoulder before changing lanes Activating exterior rear view mirror parking position Follow these steps to activate the mirror parking position so that the passenger side exterior rear view mirror will be turned downward to the stored position The buttons are located above the exterior lamp switch button Passenger side exterior rear view mirror button Make sure you have stored a parking position for the passenger side exterior rear view mirror gt page 115 Make sure the Mirror set parking aid function in the Convenience submenu of the control system is switched to On gt page 156 Switch on ignition gt page 33 Press button 2 for the passenger side exterior rear view mirror Place the gear selector lever in reverse gear R The passenger side exterior rear view mirror will be turned downward to the stored position Controls in detail Good visibility The exterior rear view mirror returns to its previously stored driving position ten seconds after you put the gear selector lever out of p
383. the following pages Otherwise the windows could fog up impairing visibility and endangering you and others i Severe conditions e g strong air pollution may require replacement of the filter before its scheduled interval A clogged filter will reduce the air volume to the interior If the vehicle interior is hot ventilate the interior before driving off see Opening Summer opening feature gt page 245 Keep the air intake grille in front of the windshield free of snow and debris Deactivating the automatic climate control system Deactivating It is possible to deactivate the automatic climate control system gt Press button gt page 187 The indicator lamp on the button comes on The automatic climate control system is deactivated i When the air conditioning is switched off the outside air supply and circula tion are also switched off Only choose this setting for a short time Otherwise the windows could fog up Reactivating gt Press button gt page 187 The indicator lamp on the button goes out The automatic climate control system is reactivated Controls in detail Automatic climate control Setting the temperature Use temperature controls 3 and 49 for the left side or and Q for the right side gt page 187 to separately adjust the air temperature on each side of the passenger compartment You should raise or lower the temperature setting in
384. the front passenger seat More information can be found in the Practical hints section gt page 350 Warning A Never place anything between seat cushion and child seat e g pillow since it reduces the effectiveness of the Occupant Classifi cation System The bottom of the child seat must make full contact with the passenger seat cushion An incorrectly mounted child seat could cause injuries to the child in case of an accident instead of increasing protec tion for the child Follow the manufacturer s instructions for installation of child seats Installation of infant and child restraint systems Prior to installing a tether strap note the following steps gt gt Roll up retractable luggage cover and partition net If you place a child seat in the left or center rear seat position remove twin roller blind gt page 253 and return seat to its original position Do not reinstall twin roller blind with a child seat and top tether installed in the left and center rear seat position If you place a child seat in the right rear seat position the twin roller blind can remain installed if so desired Fold the rear backrest slightly forward gt page 254 gt Guide top tether strap between head restraint and top of seat back Head restraints must be installed such that the top tether strap can pass freely between the head restraint and top of the seat back Make sure the tether str
385. the head as possible Warning A For your protection drive only with properly positioned head restraints Adjust head restraint so that the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at eye level This will reduce the poten tial for injury to the head and neck in the event of an accident or similar situation Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head restraints Head restraints are intended to help reduce injuries during an accident Getting started Adjusting Head restraint tilt Steering wheel Warning A Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving Adjusting the steering wheel while driving or driving without the adjustment locked could cause the driver to lose control N of the vehicle P91 16 224 When leaving the vehicle always remove the Manually adjust the angle of the head SmartKey from the starter switch take it restraint with you and lock the vehicle gt Push or pull on the lower edge of the Even with the SmartKey removed from the head restraint cushion starter switch the electrical steering wheel i For more information see Seats adjustment feature can be operated when gt page 105 the driver s door is open Therefore do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsu pervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and or serious personal injury Getting started Adjusting Steering wheel a
386. the route guidance system Vehicle status message memory menu Use the vehicle status message memory menu to scan malfunction and warning messages that may be stored in the system Such messages appear in the mul tifunction display and are based on condi tions or system status the vehicle s system has recorded Warning A Malfunction and warning messages are only indicated for certain systems and are inten tionally not very detailed The malfunction and warning messages are simply a remind er with respect to the operation of certain systems and do not replace the owner s and or driver s responsibility to maintain the vehicle s operating safety by having all required maintenance and safety checks performed on the vehicle and by bringing the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes Benz Center to address the malfunction and warning messages gt page 352 gt Press button or repeatedly until the vehicle status message memory appears in the multifunction display No vehicle status messages If no conditions are recorded in memory the message in the multifunction display is No message Vehicle status messages have been recorded If conditions have occured causing status messages to be recorded the number of messages appears in the multifunction display 2 messages P54 32 2357 31 Number of messages gt Press button RA or EN The stored messages will now be displayed in order in
387. the tires and rims for damage Dented or bent rims can cause tire inflation pressure loss and damage to the tire beads If vehicle is heavily loaded check tire inflation pressure and correct as required Do not allow your tires to wear down too far Adhesion properties on wet roads are sharply reduced at tread depths under 17 in 3 mm When replacing individual tires you should mount new tires on the front wheels first on vehicles with same sized wheels all around Tire care and maintenance A Regularly check the tires for damage Dam aged tires can cause tire inflation pressure loss As a result you could lose control of your vehicle Warning Worn old tires can cause accidents If the tire tread is badly worn or if the tires have sustained damage replace them Regularly check your tire inflation pressure at least once a month For more informa tion on checking tire inflation pressure see Recommended tire inflation pressure gt page 313 Tire inspection Every time you check your tire inflation pressure you should also inspect your tires for wear and damage for the following e excessive treadwear gt page 306 e cord or fabric showing through the tire s rubber e bumps bulges cuts cracks or splits in the tread or side of the tire Replace the tire if you find any of the above conditions Make sure you also inspect the spare tire periodically for condition and tire inflati
388. these instructions increases the risk of an accident Practical hints What to do if Problem Possible cause Suggested solution The yellow fuel tank reserve The fuel level has gone below the reserve gt Refuel at the next gas station warning lamp in the fuel gauge mark gt page 293 gt page 24 comes on while driving The red seat belt telltale The telltale reminds you and your passengers Fasten your seat belt illuminates for a brief period to fasten seat belts 3 The telltale goes out after starting the engine The red seat belt telltale The driver s seat belt is not fastened before Fasten the driver s seat belt illuminates and a warning chime the engine is started sounds for approximately six seconds after starting the The telltale goes out engine SRS The red SRS indicator lamp There is a malfunction in the restraint gt Drive with added caution to the comes on while driving systems The air bags or emergency nearest authorized Mercedes Benz tensioning devices ETDs could deploy Center unexpectedly or fail to deploy in an accident Warning A For your safety we auone recommend ee cona result in serious or fatal injury that you visit an authorized Mercedes Benz or it might deploy unexpectedly and AAN LOONES RSIS Center immediately to have the system unnecessarily which could also result in an checked otherwise the SRS may not be accident and or injury to you or to others indicated as outline
389. those standard items which they replace not previously considered in curb weight or accessory weight including heavy duty brakes ride levelers roof rack heavy duty battery and special trim PSI Pounds per square inch A standard unit of measure for air pressure gt bar kilopascal kPa Recommended tire inflation pressure Recommended tire inflation pressure listed on placard located on driver s door B pillar for normal driving conditions Provides best handling tread life and riding comfort Rim A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated Sidewall The portion of a tire between the tread and the bead Operation Tires and wheels TIN Tire Identification Number Unique identifier which facilitates efforts by tire manufacturers to notify purchasers in recall situations or other safety matters concerning tires and gives purchases the means to easily identify such tires The TIN is comprised of Manufacturer s identifica tion mark Tire size Tire type code and Date of manufacture Tire load rating Numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can support Tire ply composition and material used This indicates the number of plies or the number of layers of rubber coated fabric in the tire tread and sidewall Tire manufac turers also must indicate the ply materials in the tire and sidewall which include steel ny
390. tion to both callers is When you insert your Mercedes Benz terminated specified mobile telephone into the telephone cradle you will be prompted to enter your PIN for 30 seconds gt page 231 This display disappears when you press any button When your mobile telephone is inserted into the telephone cradle you will see the reception strength in the upper right hand corner of the display Switching on the telephone Switching on the telephone gt Press button If you have programmed an unlock code for the telephone you must now enter the code P82 60 4469 31 Enter code using buttons to Ga If necessary correct number entered with the CLR soft key Press soft key briefly to delete the last digit entered press soft key and hold to delete the complete number gt Press OK soft key after entering correct code The telephone is unlocked If you have entered an incorrect code you must enter the correct code Switching off the telephone gt Press button for approx three seconds PROCESSING appears in the display until the telephone is off Afterward PHONE OFF appears in the display Adjusting the volume gt Turn rotary control of button during a telephone call The volume will increase or decrease depending on the direction turned i The volume can be adjusted separately for telephone mode and audio mode Controls in detail Audio system Adjusting sound gt Adjust
391. tion yourself Sit properly belted in a nearly upright position with your back against the seat backrest If performing any of the above corrective steps is successful the message Front pass airbag activated See Operator s Manual will appear in the multifunction display confirming the situation has been remedied Continued on next page Display message Possible cause Front pass airbag deactivated See Operator s Manual Warning VAN If the message Front pass airbag deactivated See Operator s Manual remains on in the multifunction display and or the indicator lamp remains illuminated even after performing the above corrective steps do not have any passenger use the front passenger seat until the system has been repaired Practical hints What to do if Possible solution Note that after performing the corrective steps it may take up to 60 seconds for the message Front pass airbag activated See Operator s Manual to appear Ifthe message Front pass airbag deactivated See Operator s Manual remains on in the multifunction display and or the indicator lamp remains on even after performing the above corrective steps have the system checked as soon as possible by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Do not have any passenger use the front passenger seat until the system has been repaired Practical hints What to do if Display message ABS malfunction Visit workshop Display malfu
392. tivated as soon as the SmartKey in the starter switch is turned to position 1 The control system enables you to e call up information about your vehicle e change vehicle settings For example you can use the control system to find out when your vehicle is next due for service to set the language for messages in the instrument cluster display and much more i The displays for the audio systems radio CD player will appear in English regardless of the language selected Warning A A driver s attention to the road and traffic conditions must always be his her primary focus when driving For your safety and the safety of others selecting features through the multifunction steering wheel should only be done by the driver when traffic and road conditions permit it to be done safely Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph approximately 50 km h your vehicle is covering a distance of 44 feet approximately 14 m every second The control system relays information to the multifunction display Controls in detail Control system Multifunction display Trip odometer Main odometer Current program mode Current gear selector lever position gear range Digital clock Status indicator outside tempera ture digital speedometer Controls in detail Control system Multifunction steering wheel The displays in the multifunction display and the settings in the control sy
393. tle as possible e While driving ease up on the accelera tor e Adapt your speed and driving style to the prevailing road conditions Failure to observe these guidelines could cause the vehicle to skid The ESP cannot prevent accidents resulting from excessive speed Safety and Security Driving safety systems Warning A The ESP cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded The ESP cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns or hydroplaning Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ESP equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or danger ous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others i The ESP will only function properly if you use wheels of the recommended tire size gt page 423 a Vehicles without 4MATIC Because of the ESP s automatic operation the engine must be shut off SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or 1 when e the parking brake is being tested on a brake test dynamometer e the vehicle is being towed with the front axle raised Active braking action through the ESP may otherwise seriously damage the brake system For information on vehicles with 4MATIC see Four wheel electronic traction system 4MATIC with the ESP gt page 90 For more information see Practical
394. ton once more to confirm appears in the multifunction display gt Press the reset button once more All functions of the submenu will reset to factory settings i The settings you have changed will not be reset unless you confirm the action by pressing the reset button a second time After approximately five seconds the Settings menu reappears in the multifunction display Controls in detail Control system The table below shows what settings can Detailed instructions on making individual be changed within the various menus settings can be found on the following pages Instrument cluster Time Date Lighting Vehicle Selecting temperature Time synchronization with head Setting daytime running Setting automatic display mode unit lamp mode USA only locking Selecting speedometer Setting the time hours Setting locator lighting display mode Selecting language Setting the time minutes Setting night security illumination Selecting display speed Selecting time display mode Setting interior lighting display or outside delayed shut off temperature for status indicator Selecting automatic time change Daylight Saving Time DST summer Standard time winter Setting the date month Setting the date day Setting the date year Convenience Activating easy entry exit feature Setting key dependency Setting parking position for exterior rear view mirror Controls in detail Control system
395. ts stored in this area may impair pedal movement Warning Power assistance A With the engine not running there is no power assistance for the brake and steering systems In this case it is important to keep in mind that a considerably higher degree of effort is necessary to brake and steer the vehicle Warning Operation Driving instructions Brakes AN After driving in heavy rain for some time without applying the brakes or through wa ter deep enough to wet brake components the first braking action may be somewhat reduced and increased pedal pressure may be necessary to obtain expected braking ef fect Maintain a safe distance from vehicles in front Warning Resting your foot on the brake pedal will cause excessive and premature wear of the brake pads It can also result in the brakes overheating thereby significantly reducing their effec tiveness It may not be possible to stop the vehicle in sufficient time to avoid an acci dent To help prevent brake disk corrosion after driving on wet road surfaces particularly salted roads it is advisable to brake the vehicle with considerable force prior to parking The heat generated serves to dry the brakes If your brake system is normally only subjected to moderate loads you should occasionally test the effectiveness of the brakes by applying above normal braking pressure at higher speeds This will also enhance the grip of the brake pads
396. tter Y designates the speed rating and the speed capabil ity of the tire is limited to 186 mph 300 km h All season and winter tires Index Speed rating Q M S upto 100 mph 160 km h T M S upto 118 mph 190 km h H M S up to 130 mph 210 km h V M S upto 149 mph 240 km h Operation Tires and wheels Load identification HS __eepans0 956033 Load identification Any tire with a speed capability above 186 mph 300 km h must include a The marking M S next to the service description designates tires with mud ZR in the size designation AND the service description must be placed in parenthesis Example 275 40 ZR 18 99Y The Y speed rating in paren thesis designates the maximum speed capability of the tire as being above 186 mph 300 km h Consult the tire manufacturer for the actual maximum permissible speed of the tire and snow capabilities For illustration purposes only Actual data on tires is specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in above illustration Operation Tires and wheels In addition to tire load rating special load information may be molded into the tire sidewall following the letter designating the tire speed rating gt page 321 No specification given absence of any text like in above example indicates a standard load SL tire XL or Extra Load designates an extra load or reinforced tire Light Load designates a l
397. tune to stations broadcasting a certain type of program category mode gt page 215 Calling up the SAT main menu gt Press SAT soft key SAT is displayed in the upper left hand corner of the display Prior to activation of the satellite radio service gt page 213 After activation of satellite radio service gt page 213 Prior to activation of the satellite radio service P82 60 4463 31 The telephone number of the SIRIUS Service Center 888 539 7474 is displayed Controls in detail Audio system gt Press ESN soft key The twelve digit electronic serial number ESN of the SAT tuner installed in your vehicle is displayed This information is required to call the SIRIUS Service Center for an activation request 0 Credit card information may also be required for your application The activation process takes approxi mately five to ten minutes after calling the SIRIUS Service Center After activation of the satellite radio service The satellite radio main menu appears The radio station selected last is audible provided it can be received Controls in detail Audio system The system will tune to a default station if no station had been selected previously P82 60 4460 31 The first channel 001 is called up and the PTY system changes to All categories If no station can be received ACQUIRING appears in the display If the Satellite radio service is not
398. uctions 283 Driving off 285 Driving safety systems 4MATIC 90 ABS 85 BAS 86 ESP 87 Driving systems 247 Cruise control 247 Driving safety systems 85 E Easy entry exit feature 105 Activating 154 Electrical fuses 412 Electrical outlet 264 Electrical outlet in cargo compartment 265 Electrical outlet in rear passenger compartment 264 Electrical system Technical data 426 Electronic Stability Program see ESP Emergency call911 237 Emergency call system 266 Emergency calls Initiating an emergency call 269 With Tele Aid 268 Emergency operation Limp Home Mode 170 Emergency operations Closing power tilt sliding sunroof 385 Locking the vehicle 383 Opening power tilt sliding sunroof 385 Remote door unlock 273 Unlocking the vehicle 382 Emergency Tensioning Device see ETD Emission control 291 Emission control information label 420 Ending A call telephone 160 Engine Compartment 296 Starting with automatic transmission 47 Starting with the SmartKey 47 Technical data 422 Turning off with the SmartKey 57 Engine cleaning 339 Engine compartment 296 Fuse box in 414 Hood 296 Engine malfunction indicator lamp 25 346 Engine number 420 440 Engine oil 298 Adding 300 Additives 431 Checking level 295 298 Consumption 298 Display messages Fillerneck 300 Messages in display 299 368 369 Viscosity 440 Engine oil level Checking 295 298 Engine oils 431 299 368 369 ESP 87 440 Four wheel electronic traction system
399. ufactured or selected for and adapted to Mercedes Benz vehicles Therefore genuine Mercedes Benz parts should be installed The use of non genuine Mercedes Benz parts and accessories not authorized by Mercedes Benz could damage the vehicle which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty or could compromise the vehicle s durability or safety Vv Warranty coverage Your vehicle is covered under the terms of the warranties printed in the Service and Warranty Information booklet Your autho rized Mercedes Benz Center will exchange or repair any defective parts originally installed in the vehicle in accordance with the terms of the following warranties e New Vehicle Limited Warranty e Emission System Warranty e Emission Performance Warranty e California Maine Massachusetts and Vermont Emission Control Systems Warranty Replacement parts and accessories are covered by the Mercedes Benz Parts and Accessories warranties copies of which are available at any Mercedes Benz Center Technical data Warranty coverage Loss of Service and Warranty Information Booklet Should you lose your Service and Warranty Information booklet have an authorized Mercedes Benz Center arrange for a replacement It will be mailed to you Technical data Identification labels SAES Certification label Emission control information label includes Paintwork code includes both federal and California certi
400. ul the message Front pass airbag deactivated See Operator s Manual will appear in the multifunction display confirming the situation has been remedied Note that after performing the corrective steps it may take up to 60 seconds for the message Front pass airbag deactivated See Operator s Manual to appear If the message Front pass airbag activated See Operator s Manual remains on in the multifunction display and or the indicator lamp remains out even after performing the above corrective steps have the system checked as soon as possible by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center remains out even after performing the above corrective steps do not have any children12 years old and under and other small individuals use the front passenger seat until the system has been repaired Practical hints What to do if Display message Front pass airbag deactivated See Operator s Manual Possible cause Possible solution Air bag is deactivated while driving Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as even though an adult or someone possible and check the following larger than a small individual is occupying the front passenger seat Forces acting on the seat may make the system sense a decrease in weight Do not lean on armrests or lift yourself up using handle over the door This may make the system sense that an occupant of a lesser weight than actually present is on the front passenger seat Re posi
401. ulations Part 575 pursuant to the National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966 Reporting Safety Defects If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying Mercedes Benz USA LLC If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your dealer or Mercedes Benz USA LLC To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 or 366 0123 in Washington D C area or write to NHTSA U S Department of Transportation Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor ve hicle safety from the Hotline Introduction Vehicle data recording Y Vehicle data recording Information regarding electronic recording devices Including notice pursuant to California Code 9951 Please note that your vehicle is equipped with devices that can record vehicle systems data and if equipped with the Tele Aid system may transmit some data in certain accidents This information helps for example to diagnose vehicle systems after a collision and to continuously improve vehicle safety DaimlerChrysler may acces
402. ulb socket 6 back into the lamp Align housing cover 2 and press until it engages Practical hints Replacing bulbs Bi Xenon headlamp Warning VAN Do not remove the cover Q for the a Bi Xenon headlamp Because of high voltage in Bi Xenon lamps it is dangerous to replace the bulb or repair the lamp and its compo nents We recommend that you have such work done by a qualified technician High beam flasher bulb gt Press the clamp on housing cover 2 and remove it Pull the electrical connector off Turn bulb socket counterclockwise and take out the bulb gt Insert the new bulb so that its socket P82 30 2333 31 locates in the recess of the lamp housing Bulb socket for turn signal lamp bulb Bulb socket for high beam flasher bulb gt Turn bulb socket clockwise until it Bulb socket for parking and standing engages tamp bulb gt Plug the electrical connector onto the bulb gt Align housing cover and press until it engages P82 30 2332 31 Housing cover for Bi Xenon headlamp Housing cover for high beam flasher parking and standing lamp Practical hints Replacing bulbs Front turn signal lamp bulb gt Turn bulb socket with the bulb counterclockwise and remove it Press gently onto the bulb and turn it counterclockwise out of bulb socket G Press new bulb gently into bulb socket 8 and turn clockwise until it engages Place bulb so
403. us personal injury tilt sliding sunroof using the air Release the sunroof switch when the recirculation button in the tilt sliding sunroof has reached the Hi climate control panel gt page 177 or desired position To avoid damaging the seals do not automatic climate control panel transport any objects with sharp edges gt page 187 Fully opening Express open and which can stick out of the tilt sliding You can close and reopen the closing Express close the power sunroof tilt sliding sunroof using the charcoal _ tilt sliding sunroof Do not open the tilt sliding sunroof if filter button in the automatic gt To open or close the tilt sliding there is snow or ice on the roof as this climate control panel gt page 187 sunroof move the sunroof switch past could result in malfunctions the resistance point in the required The tilt sliding sunroof can be opened gt Switch on ignition gt page 33 direction of arrow or and i release or closed manually should an electrical malfunction occur gt page 385 The tilt sliding sunroof opens or closes completely Stopping the power tilt sliding sunroof during Express operation gt Move the sunroof switch in any direction i If the movement of the tilt sliding sunroof is blocked during the closing procedure the tilt sliding sunroof will stop and reopen slightly Opening and closing the tilt sliding sunroof with the SmartKey The power windows gt page 241 will also
404. utomatic climate control panel design A only With the engine switched off it is possible to continue to heat or ventilate the interior for up to 30 minutes This feature makes use of the residual heat produced by the engine Activating gt Switch off ignition gt page 57 gt Press button gt page 187 The indicator lamp on the button comes on Controls in detail Automatic climate control Deactivating gt Press button gt page 187 The indicator lamp on the button goes out The residual heat is automatically turned off e when the ignition is switched on e after about 30 minutes e if the battery voltage drops i How long the system will provide heating depends on e the coolant temperature e the temperature set by the operator The blower will run at speed setting 1 regardless of the air distribution control setting 197 Controls in detail Automatic climate control Rear passenger compartment adjustable air vents The air conditioning for the rear passenger compartment is controlled via the auto matic climate control panel gt page 187 i The temperature at the center air vents for the rear passenger compartment and isthe same as at the dashboard center air vents The air vents for the rear passenger compartment are located in the rear center console Ei ie Left center air vent Thumbwheel for air volume control for center air vents
405. vehicle Warning VAN When working on the vehicle set the parking brake and move gear selector lever to position P Otherwise the vehicle could roll away Controls in detail Automatic transmission Emergency operation Limp Home Mode If vehicle acceleration worsens or the transmission no longer shifts the trans mission is most likely operating in limp home emergency operation mode In this mode only second gear and reverse gear can be activated Stop the vehicle v Move gear selector lever to P v Turn off the engine Wait at least ten seconds before restarting v v Restart the engine gt Move gear selector lever to position D for second gear or R gt Have the transmission checked at an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible 170 YV Good visibility For information on the windshield wipers see Windshield wipers gt page 50 Headlamp cleaning system The switch is located on the left side of the dashboard Headlamp washer switch gt Switch on ignition gt page 33 gt Press switch Q The headlamps are cleaned with a high pressure water jet For information on filling up the washer reservoir see Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system gt page 303 Controls in detail bil Good vis ty Rear view mirrors For more information on setting the rear view mirrors see Mirrors gt page 4
406. view mirror should be turned downward during parking maneuvers when reverse gear R is engaged For additional information see Activating exterior rear view mirror parking position gt page 173 gt Move the selection marker with button or E to the Convenience submenu gt Press button EAN or ed repeatedly until the message Mirror set parking aid appears in the multifunction display The selection marker is on the current setting Mirror set parking aid On P54 32 2387 31 gt Press button or FES to switch function On or Off Trip computer menu Use the trip computer menu to call up statistical data on your vehicle The following information is available Function Page Fuel consumption statistics after 157 start Fuel consumption statistics 157 since last reset Calling up range 158 distance to empty Fuel consumption statistics after start gt Press button or repeatedly until the first function of the Trip computer menu appears in the multifunction display gt Press button EAN or Keg repeatedly until the message After start appears in the multifunction display After start 75 mi 1 1 30 h___ 2 50 Mph 3 aA we ma P54 32 2389 31 Distance driven since start Time elapsed since start Average speed since start Average fuel consumption since start i All statistics stored since the last engine start will be re
407. volume will increase or decrease depending on the direction turned Press OK soft key after entering correct PIN READY or ROAMING will appear in the display Adjusting sound gt Adjust sound during a telephone call Sound adjustment gt page 203 Controls in detail Audio system Placing a call Entering a telephone number and starting the dialing process P82 60 4558 31 gt Enter desired telephone number using buttons to I The number can have up to 32 digits but only twelve of these are visible in the display gt D Controls in detail Audio system gt gt gt If necessary correct number entered E O gt Press MEM soft key or press with the CLR soft key Press soft key This is only possible however when button ra or Bg briefly to delete the last digit entered the call information transmitted gt Press desired numerical key press soft key and hold to delete the includes the number of the person to EEN complete number calling If the telephone number is not The stored entries are selected gt After correct telephone number has transmitted NO NUMBER will be stored according to the alphabetical order been entered press button in the phone book of the initial letters e g for imi f S Schneider press button e Searching and calling up telephone four times If the telephone number has been book entries by name i saved together with a name in the y bil or ou can access your mobile telephone
408. ween calls Placing a second call e Terminating a call gt Press button If you wish to place another call during an gt Press button already active call you can place the second call and switch between the callers or combine them into one call Note that The current call is terminated The connection to the caller previously kept on hold is also interrupted This switches between the calls The non active call is kept on hold e Terminating a call i i i ilabili amp this feature is depending on availability however reconnection is indicated gt Press button from your mobile phone service provider by an acoustic signal The current call is terminated The Placing a second call e Combining two calls connection to the caller previously gt Place a new call by entering kept on hold is also interrupted telephone number manually Pee aut however reconnection is indicated The calls are combined into one gt Press button You are connected to the second caller the first caller is kept on hold gt Press button The connection to both callers is terminated by an acoustic signal call e Terminating a combined call Emergency calls 911 The following describes how to dial a 9 11 emergency call using the audio system head unit when a Mercedes Benz specified mobile phone is inserted in the phone cradle Unless otherwise specified the descriptions refer to the audio system head unit Consult the sep
409. which they have occured For malfunction and warning messages see Vehicle status messag es in the multifunction display gt page 352 Should the vehicle s system record any conditions while driving the number of malfunctions will reappear in the multi function display when the SmartKey in the starter switch is turned to position O or removed from the starter switch Controls in detail Control system i The vehicle status message memory will be cleared when you turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 1 or 2 You will then only see high priority messages in the multi function display gt page 352 Controls in detail Control system Settings menu In the Settings menu there are two functions The function Reset to factory settings with which you can reset all the settings to the original factory settings A collection of submenus with which you can make individual settings for your vehicle Press button or repeatedly until the Settings menu appears in the multifunction display Settings To reseti Press reset button for 3 sec P54 32 2358 31 Resetting all settings You can reset all the functions of all submenus to the factory settings gt Press the reset button in the instrument cluster gt page 125 for approximately three seconds The request to press the reset button once more to confirm appears in the multifunction display Settings
410. wind Warning A The outside temperature indicator is not designed to serve as an ice warning device and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose Indicated temperatures just above the freezing point do not guarantee that the road surface is free of ice For more information see Winter driving gt page 332 Do not drive through flooded areas or water of unknown depth Before driving through water determine its depth Never accelerate before driving into water The bow wave could force water into the engine and auxiliary equip ment thus damaging them If you must drive through standing wa ter drive slowly to prevent water from entering the passenger compartment or the engine compartment Water in these areas could cause damage to electrical components or wiring of the engine or transmission or could result in water being ingested by the engine through the air intake causing severe internal engine damage Any such damage is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Warning A Always fasten items being carried as securely as possible In an accident during hard braking or sud den maneuvers loose items will be thrown around inside the vehicle and cause injury to vehicle occupants unless the items are securely fastened in the vehicle The cargo compartment is the preferred place to carry objects Always use partition net when transporting cargo Partition net cannot secure hard or heavy object
411. with ESP 90 Messages in display 360 361 Switching off 88 Switching on 89 Warning lamp 25 348 ETD 69 440 Safety guidelines 64 Ethanol fuel At the gas station 293 Requirements 433 Switching fuels 434 Exterior lamp switch 49 116 Exterior lamps Delayed shut off 151 Exterior rear view mirrors Adjusting 41 Parking position for 156 F Fahrenheit Setting temperature units 143 Fastening the seat belts 43 Fine adjustment Cruise control 249 First aid kit 377 Flat tire 398 Lowering the vehicle 402 Minispare wheel 380 Mounting the Minispare wheel 398 Preparing the vehicle 398 Flexible fuel vehicles 433 At the gas station 293 Switching fuels 434 Flexible Service System see FSS Fog lamp rear Message in display 373 Replacing bulb 389 Switching on 120 Fog lamps front Messages in display 371 Replacing bulbs 389 Switching on 119 Four wheel electronic traction system 4MATIC with ESP 90 4MATIC 90 Front airbags 65 Front fog lamps Indicator lamp 116 Switching on 119 Front lamps Bi Xenon type 393 Halogen type 391 Messages in display 371 374 Replacing bulbs 389 391 Switching on 116 Front passenger front air bag Messages in display 354 357 Front passenger front air bag off indicatorlamp 27 66 350 351 Front seat head restraints Installing manual seat 107 Installing power seat 108 Manual seat 107 Power seat 108 Removing manual seat 107 Removing power seat 108 Front seats Heating 112 FSS Canada vehicles 334 4
412. with jumper cables and the battery of another vehicle Observe the following Jump starting should only be performed when the engine and catalytic con verter are cold Do not start the engine if the battery is frozen Let the battery thaw out first Only jump start from batteries with the same voltage rating 12 V Jump starting with a more powerful battery could damage the vehicle s electrical system which will not be covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Only use jumper cables with sufficient cross section and insulated terminal clamps Always make sure the jumper cables are not on or near pulleys fans or oth er parts that move when an engine is started or running Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts Do not attempt to start the engine using a battery quick charge unit If engine does not run after several unsuccessful starting attempts have it checked at the nearest authorized Mercedes Benz Center Excessive unburned fuel generated by repeated failed starting attempts may damage the catalytic converter and may present a fire risk Make sure the jumper cables do not have loose or missing insulation Make sure the cable clamps do not touch any other metal part while the other end is still attached to a battery Warning Keep flames or sparks away from battery Do not smoke Observe all safety instructions and precau tions when handling automotive batteries gt page 302 T
413. y impair the operating safety of your vehicle We recommend that you have any service work on electronic components carried out by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Controls in detail Audio system Controls in detail Audio system Operating and display elements Slee SEEK 2 0 P82 60 4555 31 OOo ee Item CD changer mode selector AUX mode selector Single CD mode selector Radio mode selector Mute function radio Pause CD Volume distribution Sound settings Display Alphanumeric keypad Page 217 207 219 211 223 205 203 Item Speed dialing memory telephone in descending order Accepting a call telephone Telephone mode selector Speed dialing memory telephone in ascending order Terminating a call telephone CD slot CD ejection Page 229 224 229 219 Controls in detail Audio system Item Soft keys Volume Switching on off Manual tuning seek tuning radio Track search reverse CD Manual tuning seek tuning radio Track search fast forward CD Page 202 203 202 209 222 209 222 Controls in detail Audio system Button and soft key operation In these instructions the alphanumeric Operation i If the radio is switched on without the key in the starter switch it will keypad right side of radio panel and the Switching the unit on off funct
414. y with remote control gt Press unlock button on the SmartKey EE Lock button Unlock button P pa ee sell ibe once The E Panic button gt page 83 Cons KNOOS IN TIE oars OVE UP gt pag The anti theft alarm system is i disarmed Canada only gt Get in the vehicle and insert the Only vehicles equipped with an SmartKey in the starter switch anti theft alarm system have SmartKeys with integrated panic button For more information see Locking and unlocking gt page 96 Starter switch positions Warning A When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsuper vised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and or serious personal injury SmartKey ve PB gt Starter switch 0 For removing SmartKey The steering is locked when the SmartKey is removed from the starter switch If necessary move steering wheel slightly to allow the locking mechanism to engage 1 Power supply to some electrical consumers such as seat adjustment Getting started Unlocking 2 Ignition power supply for all electrical consumers and driving position All lamps except low beam headlamp indicator lamp high beam headlamp in dicator lamp and turn signal indicator lamps unless activated in the instru ment clust
415. ystem OCS Safety and Security Occupant safety Warning VAN According to accident statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seat ing position Thus we strongly recommend that children be placed in the rear seats whenever possible Regardless of seating position children 12 years old and under must be seated and properly secured in an appropriate infant or child restraint recom mended for the size and weight of the child The infant or child restraint must be properly secured with the vehicle s seat belt the seat belt and top tether strap or lower anchors and top tether strap fully in accordance with the child seat manufacturer s instruc tions gt D Safety and Security Occupant safety a4 Children can be killed or seriously injured by an inflating air bag Note the following important information when circumstances require you to place a child in the front passenger seat e Your vehicle is equipped with air bag technology designed to turn off the front passenger front air bag in your vehicle when the system senses the weight of a typical 12 month old child or less along with the weight of a standard appropri ate child restraint on the front passen ger seat e Achild ina rear facing child restraint on the front passenger seat will be seriously injured or even killed if the front passenger front air bag inflates in a collision which

Mercedes Benz 4MATIC User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents